Genetics
The complete book on one page. Use the button at the bottom right to save it as a PDF.
- Chapter 1: Mendelian Transmission and Probability
- Chapter 2: Extensions of Mendel
- Chapter 3: Sex Linkage and Extranuclear Inheritance
- Chapter 4: Linkage and Genetic Mapping
- Chapter 5: Bacterial and Viral Genetics
- Chapter 6: Chromosome Mutations
- Chapter 7: DNA Replication, Recombination, Mutation and Repair
- Chapter 8: Transcription, RNA Processing and Translation
- Chapter 9: Gene Regulation and Epigenetics
- Chapter 10: Molecular Genetic Tools and Genomics
- Chapter 11: Quantitative Genetics
- Chapter 12: Population and Evolutionary Genetics
- Chapter 13: Developmental and Cancer Genetics
- Chapter 14: Human Inheritance, Genetic Testing and Counseling
Mendelian Transmission and Probability
Every genetics problem you will ever solve, from predicting the coat color of a puppy to estimating a couple's risk of having a child with cystic fibrosis, rests on a handful of rules worked out by a monk counting peas in a monastery garden. Those rules turn inheritance from a mystery into arithmetic: genes come in pairs, the pairs separate when gametes form, different pairs sort independently, and chance decides which gamete meets which. This chapter teaches those rules, the probability tools that make them fast, the chi square test that tells you whether real data fit them, and the pedigree reasoning that lets you apply them to human families.
By the end of this chapter you can
- Explain why the garden pea and Mendel's quantitative, generation by generation design made his discoveries possible, and use the vocabulary of genes, alleles, genotype and phenotype correctly.
- State the principle of segregation, connect it to the separation of homologous chromosomes in meiosis, and predict the 3:1 and 1:2:1 ratios of a monohybrid cross.
- Use a testcross to determine an unknown genotype and interpret its results.
- State the principle of independent assortment, predict the 9:3:3:1 ratio of a dihybrid cross, and generalize to crosses involving many genes.
- Apply the product rule, the sum rule, conditional probability and the binomial expansion to genetics problems without drawing large Punnett squares.
- Carry out a chi square goodness of fit test, choose the correct degrees of freedom, and decide whether to reject a genetic hypothesis.
- Read standard pedigree symbols and distinguish autosomal dominant from autosomal recessive inheritance in a family tree.
- Calculate recurrence and carrier risks for relatives in a pedigree, including the classic two thirds carrier problem.
Section 1Mendel's approach and monohybrid crosses
Why peas, and why Mendel succeeded
Before Mendel, most naturalists believed in blending inheritance: the traits of two parents mixed in their offspring like two colors of paint, so that variation should steadily disappear from a population. Breeders knew that traits sometimes skipped a generation, but no one had a model that could predict how often. Gregor Mendel, working in the 1850s and 1860s and publishing in 1866, succeeded where others failed for reasons of experimental design as much as insight.
The garden pea, Pisum sativum, was an excellent choice. It is cheap, grows quickly, and produces many seeds per plant, so large numbers of offspring can be counted. Its flowers normally self fertilize, because the pollen bearing anthers and the egg containing ovary are enclosed together within the petals, yet a researcher can easily perform cross fertilization by removing the anthers of one flower before they mature and dusting its stigma with pollen from another plant. Commercial seed suppliers already offered many varieties that differed in clear, either or traits.
Mendel's method had four features that remain the backbone of genetic analysis:
- He began with true breeding (pure) lines, plants that produced only one form of a trait generation after generation when allowed to self. This guaranteed that the parents were homozygous.
- He studied traits with two clearly distinct forms, such as round versus wrinkled seeds, rather than continuously varying traits like overall plant weight.
- He followed one or two traits at a time through several generations, keeping the generations separate: the parental generation (P), the first filial generation (F1) and the second filial generation (F2), produced by selfing or intercrossing the F1.
- He counted. Rather than describing offspring as "mostly round," he recorded thousands of individuals and looked for numerical ratios. This quantitative habit, unusual in biology at the time, is what let him see the regularities.
He also performed reciprocal crosses, in which the trait carried by the male parent in one cross is carried by the female parent in the other (round female by wrinkled male, and wrinkled female by round male). The results were the same in both directions, which told him that both parents contribute equally to the offspring for these traits. Reciprocal crosses remain a standard first test: when they give different results, the trait may be sex linked or inherited through the cytoplasm, topics we take up in Chapter 3.
| Trait | Dominant form | Recessive form | F2 counts (dominant : recessive) | Ratio |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Seed shape | Round | Wrinkled | 5,474 : 1,850 | 2.96 : 1 |
| Seed (cotyledon) color | Yellow | Green | 6,022 : 2,001 | 3.01 : 1 |
| Flower color | Purple | White | 705 : 224 | 3.15 : 1 |
| Pod shape | Inflated | Constricted | 882 : 299 | 2.95 : 1 |
| Pod color | Green | Yellow | 428 : 152 | 2.82 : 1 |
| Flower position | Axial | Terminal | 651 : 207 | 3.14 : 1 |
| Stem length | Tall | Dwarf | 787 : 277 | 2.84 : 1 |
The monohybrid cross and its results
A monohybrid cross follows a single trait. When Mendel crossed a true breeding round seeded plant with a true breeding wrinkled seeded plant, every F1 seed was round. The wrinkled form had not blended with round; it had vanished. When he let the F1 plants self fertilize, wrinkled seeds reappeared in the F2, about one quarter of the total. The table above shows that all seven traits behaved the same way: the F1 showed only one form, which Mendel called dominant, and the F2 showed dominant and recessive forms in a ratio close to 3:1.
Mendel reasoned that each plant carries two hereditary "factors" for each trait, that the factors remain discrete rather than blending, and that a plant passes only one of its two factors to each gamete. Today we call his factors genes, and the alternative forms of a gene alleles. The F1 round plants carried one allele for round (R) and one for wrinkled (r); because R is dominant, they looked round. When these plants made gametes, half carried R and half carried r. Random union of gametes then gives the F2 genotypes in the proportions 1/4 RR, 1/2 Rr and 1/4 rr.
The vocabulary you will use in every chapter
The genotype is the set of alleles an individual carries; the phenotype is the observable trait, which may be a visible feature, a biochemical property or a disease. An individual with two identical alleles (RR or rr) is homozygous; one with two different alleles (Rr) is heterozygous. The physical position of a gene on a chromosome is its locus (plural loci). By convention the dominant allele is written with an uppercase letter and the recessive with the same letter in lowercase, and gene symbols are italicized. A blank or underscore, as in R_, means "either allele"; it is a compact way of writing "has at least one dominant allele and therefore shows the dominant phenotype."
Dominance describes the relationship between alleles at one locus as seen in the phenotype of the heterozygote. It does not mean that a dominant allele is more common, more beneficial, or that it suppresses the recessive allele. In the case of seed shape, the r allele carries an insertion that disrupts a starch branching enzyme. Seeds with at least one working copy make enough branched starch to stay plump; rr seeds accumulate sugar, take up water during development and wrinkle as they dry. Many recessive alleles are, like this one, loss of function alleles, and the heterozygote is normal because one working copy makes enough product.
The principle of segregation and its chromosomal basis
Mendel's first law, the principle of segregation, states that each individual carries two alleles for a gene, and that these two alleles separate (segregate) when gametes form, so each gamete receives only one allele, with equal probability. Mendel had no knowledge of chromosomes. When cytologists described meiosis around 1900, Walter Sutton and Theodor Boveri noticed that chromosomes behave exactly like Mendel's factors: they come in homologous pairs, one from each parent, and the members of each pair separate into different cells in anaphase I of meiosis. This chromosome theory of inheritance placed genes on chromosomes, and segregation became the visible separation of homologous chromosomes. Because each gamete receives one homolog, a heterozygote produces two types of gametes in equal numbers.
Testcrosses and backcrosses
A plant with the dominant phenotype may be homozygous or heterozygous. To find out, cross it with a homozygous recessive individual, a testcross. The recessive tester contributes only recessive alleles, so the phenotype of each offspring directly reveals which allele the unknown parent contributed. If the unknown is RR, all offspring are round; if it is Rr, round and wrinkled appear in a 1:1 ratio. A backcross is any cross of an F1 individual with one of its parents (or a genotype identical to a parent); a testcross is the special backcross to the recessive parent. Mendel used testcrosses to confirm his model and obtained the predicted 1:1 ratios.
Ratios to know by heart
The table below collects the monohybrid crosses you will meet most often. Recognizing a ratio in data is often the fastest way to infer the parental genotypes.
| Cross | Genotypic ratio of offspring | Phenotypic ratio (complete dominance) | Typical use |
|---|---|---|---|
| AA × aa | All Aa | All dominant | P generation cross to make an F1 |
| Aa × Aa | 1 AA : 2 Aa : 1 aa | 3 dominant : 1 recessive | F1 intercross or self |
| Aa × aa | 1 Aa : 1 aa | 1 dominant : 1 recessive | Testcross of a heterozygote |
| AA × Aa | 1 AA : 1 Aa | All dominant | Backcross to the dominant parent |
| aa × aa | All aa | All recessive | Two recessive parents breed true |
Two features of the F2 deserve emphasis. First, among the dominant phenotype F2 offspring, the ratio of AA to Aa is 1:2, so two thirds of them are heterozygous. Mendel confirmed this by selfing round F2 plants: about one third bred true and two thirds again produced wrinkled offspring. This "two thirds" fraction returns in human pedigree problems in Section 5. Second, ratios are expectations about probability, not guarantees. A family of four children from two heterozygous parents may easily have no affected children or two of them; ratios emerge only in large samples, which is why we need the statistical tools of Section 4.
Mendel's careful counts of true breeding peas showed that hereditary factors are discrete units that occur in pairs and separate into gametes with equal probability. A monohybrid intercross gives a 1:2:1 genotypic and, with complete dominance, a 3:1 phenotypic ratio; a testcross reveals an unknown genotype; and segregation is simply the separation of homologous chromosomes in meiosis I.
Section 2Dihybrid crosses and independent assortment
Following two traits at once
Having established segregation, Mendel asked whether different traits are inherited together or separately. He crossed a true breeding plant with round, yellow seeds (RRYY) with one that had wrinkled, green seeds (rryy). The F1 were all round and yellow (RrYy), heterozygous at two loci, so they are called dihybrids. When the F1 self fertilized, the F2 contained four phenotypes, two like the parents and two new combinations:
- 315 round, yellow
- 108 round, green
- 101 wrinkled, yellow
- 32 wrinkled, green
That is 556 seeds in a ratio close to 9:3:3:1. The two new combinations, round green and wrinkled yellow, are called recombinant (or nonparental) phenotypes; the other two are parental phenotypes. Notice that if you look at each trait alone, you still see 3:1. Round to wrinkled is (315 + 108) : (101 + 32) = 423 : 133, which is 3.18:1, and yellow to green is (315 + 101) : (108 + 32) = 416 : 140, which is 2.97:1. The 9:3:3:1 ratio is simply two independent 3:1 ratios multiplied together: (3 round : 1 wrinkled) × (3 yellow : 1 green) = 9 round yellow : 3 round green : 3 wrinkled yellow : 1 wrinkled green.
The principle of independent assortment
Mendel's second law, the principle of independent assortment, states that alleles at different loci segregate independently of one another when gametes form. A dihybrid RrYy therefore produces four kinds of gametes, RY, Ry, rY and ry, each with probability 1/2 × 1/2 = 1/4. Combining four kinds of eggs with four kinds of pollen gives a 4 × 4 Punnett square of 16 equally likely cells, containing 9 genotypes and 4 phenotypes.
The chromosomal basis is the random orientation of homologous pairs at metaphase I. If the seed shape and seed color genes lie on different chromosomes, the way one pair lines up at the metaphase plate has no influence on the way the other pair lines up. Half of all meioses place R and Y on the same side, producing RY and ry gametes; the other half place R with y, producing Ry and rY. Averaged over many meioses, all four gamete types are equally common.
Independent assortment holds for genes on different chromosomes and for genes far apart on the same chromosome. Genes that are close together on one chromosome are linked: they tend to travel together, and the dihybrid produces more parental than recombinant gametes. Mendel was fortunate, or perhaps selective, in that the traits he reported in his dihybrid and trihybrid experiments assorted independently. Linkage and its use in mapping are the subject of Chapter 4.
The dihybrid testcross
Crossing a dihybrid with a double recessive (RrYy × rryy) shows independent assortment even more directly. The tester contributes only ry gametes, so each offspring's phenotype reveals the gamete it received from the dihybrid. The four phenotypes appear in a 1:1:1:1 ratio, reflecting the four equally frequent gamete types. When Mendel performed this cross he obtained close to equal numbers of all four classes. In later chapters, a departure of the testcross from 1:1:1:1, with an excess of the parental classes, is the signature of linkage.
Branch diagrams instead of big Punnett squares
A 4 × 4 Punnett square is manageable, but a trihybrid cross needs an 8 × 8 square of 64 cells, and four genes need 256 cells. A branch diagram (also called a forked line method) is faster. Because the genes assort independently, you can work out the outcome for each gene separately and then combine. For the phenotypes of an AaBb × AaBb cross, first split into 3/4 A_ and 1/4 aa; then split each of those into 3/4 B_ and 1/4 bb; multiply along each path. Figure 1.3 in the next section shows exactly this tree. The same approach works for genotypes, with three branches per gene (1/4, 1/2, 1/4) instead of two.
| Number of heterozygous gene pairs in the F1 (n) | Kinds of F1 gametes (2n) | Cells in the Punnett square (4n) | F2 genotypes (3n) | F2 phenotypes with complete dominance (2n) | Fraction of F2 homozygous recessive at all loci (1/4)n |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 2 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1/4 |
| 2 | 4 | 16 | 9 | 4 | 1/16 |
| 3 | 8 | 64 | 27 | 8 | 1/64 |
| 4 | 16 | 256 | 81 | 16 | 1/256 |
| n | 2n | 4n | 3n | 2n | (1/4)n |
For a trihybrid intercross, AaBbCc × AaBbCc, the phenotypic ratio is (3:1)3 = 27:9:9:9:3:3:3:1. The 27 class is A_B_C_ (3/4 × 3/4 × 3/4 = 27/64); each 9 class is dominant at two loci and recessive at one (3/4 × 3/4 × 1/4 = 9/64); each 3 class is dominant at one locus (3/4 × 1/4 × 1/4 = 3/64); and 1/64 are recessive at all three.
Mixed crosses
Real problems rarely involve two identical heterozygotes. The branch approach works for any combination. In AaBbcc × AabbCc, take each gene separately: Aa × Aa gives 3/4 A_; Bb × bb gives 1/2 Bb and 1/2 bb; cc × Cc gives 1/2 Cc and 1/2 cc. The probability of an offspring showing the dominant phenotype for all three traits is 3/4 × 1/2 × 1/2 = 3/16. The probability of a genotype that matches neither parent can be found by subtraction: P(exactly AaBbcc, like parent 1) = 1/2 (Aa) × 1/2 (Bb) × 1/2 (cc) = 1/8, P(exactly AabbCc, like parent 2) = 1/2 × 1/2 × 1/2 = 1/8, so P(neither parental genotype) = 1 − 1/8 − 1/8 = 3/4.
Genes on different chromosomes assort independently because homologous pairs orient at random at metaphase I. A dihybrid therefore makes four gamete types in equal numbers, giving 9:3:3:1 in an intercross and 1:1:1:1 in a testcross. For many genes, solve each gene separately and multiply, using the 2n, 3n and 4n rules to check your work.
Section 3Probability rules for genetics problems
Why probability is the language of inheritance
Segregation and fertilization are random events, so every prediction in transmission genetics is a probability. A probability is the expected frequency of an event over many trials, written as a number from 0 (never happens) to 1 (always happens). The probability that a heterozygote Aa transmits a is 1/2, just as the probability that a fair coin lands heads is 1/2. A handful of rules let you solve almost any transmission problem quickly and without drawing Punnett squares.
The product rule
The product rule (multiplication rule) states that the probability of two or more independent events all occurring together is the product of their separate probabilities. Events are independent when the outcome of one does not change the probability of the other. Separate gametes, separate children and separate unlinked genes are all independent. The key word in a question is usually "and": the probability that a child is a girl and has cystic fibrosis, or that one child is affected and the next child is affected.
If two carriers of a recessive disease (Aa × Aa) have a child, the probability the child is aa is the probability that the egg carries a (1/2) times the probability that the sperm carries a (1/2), or 1/4. The probability that their first two children are both affected is 1/4 × 1/4 = 1/16, and the probability that their first child is an affected boy is 1/4 × 1/2 = 1/8.
The sum rule
The sum rule (addition rule) states that the probability of any one of two or more mutually exclusive events occurring is the sum of their separate probabilities. Events are mutually exclusive when only one can happen in a given trial; a single child cannot be both AA and Aa. The key word is "or." In Aa × Aa, the probability that a child has the dominant phenotype is P(AA) + P(Aa) = 1/4 + 1/2 = 3/4. The phenotypic 3/4 you have been using is itself a sum.
Many problems require both rules. In a family of two children from carrier parents, what is the probability that exactly one child is affected? There are two mutually exclusive orders: affected then unaffected (1/4 × 3/4 = 3/16) or unaffected then affected (3/4 × 1/4 = 3/16). The answer is 3/16 + 3/16 = 6/16 = 3/8.
Conditional probability
Sometimes we already know something about an individual, and that knowledge changes the relevant probabilities. A conditional probability is the probability of an event given that another event is known to have occurred, written P(A | B). It is calculated by restricting attention to the outcomes consistent with what we know:
P(A | B) = P(A and B) / P(B)
The most important example in genetics is the unaffected sibling of a person with a recessive disorder. The parents must both be carriers (Aa × Aa). Before anything is known, a child has probability 1/4 of being AA, 1/2 of being Aa and 1/4 of being aa. But we are told the sibling is unaffected, which eliminates aa. Among the remaining 3/4, the chance of being a carrier is (1/2) / (3/4) = 2/3, and the chance of being AA is (1/4) / (3/4) = 1/3. Students often answer 1/2 by reflex; the 2/3 answer is correct because the information "unaffected" has been used.
The binomial expansion
When a question asks for a specific number of outcomes among several independent trials, without specifying the order, use the binomial expansion. If p is the probability of one outcome and q = 1 − p the probability of the other, the probability of exactly s outcomes of the first kind and t of the second in n = s + t trials is
P = [n! / (s! t!)] ps qt
The factor n! / (s! t!) counts the number of different orders in which the outcomes can occur. (Remember that 0! = 1.) For small n, you can also read the coefficients from Pascal's triangle: for n = 4 they are 1, 4, 6, 4, 1.
"At least one" problems
Questions that ask for "at least one" are easiest by subtraction. The probability of at least one affected child among four from carrier parents is 1 minus the probability that none is affected: 1 − (3/4)4 = 1 − 81/256 = 175/256, about 0.68. Doing this by addition would require summing the probabilities of exactly 1, 2, 3 and 4 affected children.
| Tool | When to use it | Signal words | Example |
|---|---|---|---|
| Product rule | Independent events all occurring together | "and," "both," "all," a specified order | First child affected and second unaffected: 1/4 × 3/4 = 3/16 |
| Sum rule | Any one of several mutually exclusive outcomes | "or," "either" | Dominant phenotype: 1/4 AA + 1/2 Aa = 3/4 |
| Conditional probability | Some outcomes have been ruled out by information | "given that," "who is unaffected," "known to be" | Unaffected sibling of an affected child is a carrier: 2/3 |
| Binomial expansion | A set number of each outcome in any order | "exactly 2 of 5," "3 boys and 1 girl" | Exactly 1 affected of 3 children: 3 × (1/4)(3/4)2 = 27/64 |
| Complement | "At least one" of an outcome | "at least one," "one or more" | At least one affected of 3: 1 − (3/4)3 = 37/64 |
Multiply probabilities for independent events that must all happen, add them for mutually exclusive alternatives, restrict the sample space when information rules outcomes out, use the binomial formula when order is unspecified, and subtract from 1 for "at least one." These five tools solve nearly every transmission problem faster than a Punnett square.
Section 4Chi square testing of genetic ratios
The problem of chance deviation
Real data never match expected ratios exactly. Mendel's 5,474 round and 1,850 wrinkled seeds were not exactly 3:1, and a student who counts 72 dominant and 48 recessive offspring from a supposed testcross must decide whether 72:48 is "close enough" to 1:1. The deviation could be due to chance alone (sampling error), or it could mean the hypothesis is wrong, perhaps because the parent is not the genotype assumed, the genes are linked, or one class has lower survival. The chi square (χ2) goodness of fit test is the standard tool for deciding.
Hypotheses and the logic of the test
The test begins with a null hypothesis (H0): there is no real difference between the observed and expected numbers, and any deviation is due to chance. In genetics, the null hypothesis is usually a specific ratio, such as "the offspring segregate 3:1." The test asks: if H0 were true, how often would chance alone produce a deviation at least as large as the one observed? That probability is the P value. If it is small, conventionally less than 0.05, we reject the null hypothesis. If it is larger, we fail to reject it: the data are consistent with the hypothesis, though that does not prove the hypothesis true.
Calculating chi square
The statistic is
χ2 = Σ (O − E)2 / E
where O is the observed number in each class, E the expected number, and the sum runs over all phenotypic classes. Each term squares the deviation (so positive and negative deviations do not cancel) and scales it by the expected number (so a deviation of 10 matters more when 20 were expected than when 2,000 were). The steps are always the same:
- State the null hypothesis and the ratio it predicts.
- Find the total number of offspring, and calculate the expected number in each class by multiplying the total by the expected fraction. Expected numbers may be decimals; do not round them to whole numbers.
- For each class compute (O − E)2 / E, then add the terms.
- Determine the degrees of freedom (df). For a genetic ratio test, df = number of phenotypic classes − 1. Once the total and all but one class are fixed, the last class is determined, so it is not free to vary.
- Compare the χ2 value with the critical value for that df at the chosen significance level (usually 0.05) in a chi square table, and state the conclusion.
| df | P = 0.95 | P = 0.50 | P = 0.10 | P = 0.05 | P = 0.01 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 0.004 | 0.455 | 2.706 | 3.841 | 6.635 |
| 2 | 0.103 | 1.386 | 4.605 | 5.991 | 9.210 |
| 3 | 0.352 | 2.366 | 6.251 | 7.815 | 11.345 |
| 4 | 0.711 | 3.357 | 7.779 | 9.488 | 13.277 |
| 5 | 1.145 | 4.351 | 9.236 | 11.070 | 15.086 |
Read the table this way: with 3 degrees of freedom, a chi square of 7.815 or more would arise by chance only 5 percent of the time if the null hypothesis were true. Larger chi square values mean larger deviations and smaller P values.
Rules and pitfalls
- Use counts, never percentages or ratios. The chi square value depends on sample size. 60:40 out of 100 gives χ2 = 4.0, but 6:4 out of 10 gives only 0.4, even though the percentages are identical. Larger samples give the test more power to detect a real departure.
- Expected numbers should be at least about 5 in every class. With very small expected values, the chi square approximation becomes unreliable; combine classes or collect more data.
- Degrees of freedom come from the number of classes, not the number of offspring. A 9:3:3:1 test has df = 3 whether you counted 50 or 5,000 offspring. (In some tests, such as Hardy Weinberg tests in Chapter 12, an additional degree of freedom is lost for each parameter estimated from the data.)
- Failing to reject is not proof. A small chi square says the data are compatible with the hypothesis, but other hypotheses may fit as well.
- Suspiciously good fits deserve attention too. The statistician R. A. Fisher pointed out in 1936 that Mendel's data, taken together, fit his expectations more closely than chance would usually allow. Historians still debate whether this reflects unconscious bias in scoring, selective reporting or something else, but no one doubts that the underlying principles are correct.
| Expected ratio | Classes | df | Critical χ2 at P = 0.05 | Typical cross |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 3:1 | 2 | 1 | 3.841 | Monohybrid F2, complete dominance |
| 1:1 | 2 | 1 | 3.841 | Monohybrid testcross |
| 1:2:1 | 3 | 2 | 5.991 | Monohybrid F2, incomplete dominance or codominance |
| 9:3:3:1 | 4 | 3 | 7.815 | Dihybrid F2 |
| 1:1:1:1 | 4 | 3 | 7.815 | Dihybrid testcross |
Chi square measures how far observed counts fall from those predicted by a hypothesis: χ2 = Σ(O − E)2/E with df = classes − 1. If the value exceeds the critical value at P = 0.05 (3.841 for df 1, 5.991 for df 2, 7.815 for df 3), reject the hypothesis; otherwise the deviation can reasonably be attributed to chance. Always work with raw counts and keep expected values unrounded.
Section 5Pedigree analysis basics
Why human genetics needs pedigrees
Geneticists working with peas or fruit flies design the crosses they want and count hundreds of offspring. Human geneticists can do neither. Matings are not controlled, families are small, generations are long, and many traits of interest are rare. Instead we reconstruct inheritance from a pedigree, a standardized family tree that records who is related to whom and who shows the trait. By asking which modes of inheritance are consistent with the pattern, we can usually identify the most likely mode and then calculate risks for relatives.
Pedigree conventions
Males are drawn as squares and females as circles; a diamond is used when sex is unknown or not relevant. Affected individuals are filled in. A horizontal line between a male and a female is a mating, and a vertical line drops from it to a horizontal sibship line from which the children hang in birth order, left to right. A double mating line marks a consanguineous mating, one between relatives such as first cousins. Generations are numbered with Roman numerals and individuals within a generation with Arabic numerals, so II-3 is the third person in the second generation. The person through whom the family came to attention, the proband (or propositus), is marked with an arrow. Heterozygous carriers, when known, may be shown by a half filled symbol or a dot in the center. A diagonal slash marks a deceased person. Twins hang from a common point; identical (monozygotic) twins are joined by a short horizontal bar.
Autosomal recessive inheritance
A trait caused by a recessive allele on an autosome typically shows these features:
- Affected children are usually born to unaffected parents, who are both heterozygous carriers. The trait often appears to "skip" generations.
- Males and females are affected in roughly equal numbers, and either parent can transmit the allele.
- Among the children of two carriers, about one quarter are affected. (In real pedigrees the observed fraction is often higher, because families with no affected child are never ascertained.)
- The trait is more common among the children of consanguineous matings, because relatives are more likely to carry the same rare allele inherited from a common ancestor.
- Two affected parents (aa × aa) have only affected children, unless the parents carry mutations in different genes (see complementation, Chapter 2).
Examples include cystic fibrosis, sickle cell disease, phenylketonuria, Tay Sachs disease and albinism.
Autosomal dominant inheritance
A trait caused by a dominant allele on an autosome typically shows:
- Every affected person has at least one affected parent (unless the allele arose by new mutation or is not fully penetrant). The trait appears in every generation, a vertical pattern.
- Males and females are affected about equally, and both sexes transmit the trait, including male to male transmission, which rules out X linked inheritance.
- An affected heterozygote mated with an unaffected person has, on average, half affected children.
- Two unaffected parents do not have affected children (again barring new mutation or incomplete penetrance).
- Two affected parents can have an unaffected child (Aa × Aa gives 1/4 aa); this pattern is the single best clue that a trait is dominant.
Most people affected by rare dominant disorders are heterozygous, because homozygotes require two affected parents and are often more severely affected. Examples include Huntington disease, Marfan syndrome, neurofibromatosis type 1, achondroplasia and familial hypercholesterolemia.
| Feature | Autosomal recessive | Autosomal dominant |
|---|---|---|
| Parents of an affected child | Usually both unaffected carriers | Usually one parent affected |
| Pattern across generations | Horizontal: affected siblings, skipped generations | Vertical: appears in each generation |
| Sex ratio of affected | About equal | About equal |
| Male to male transmission | Possible | Seen, and excludes X linkage |
| Risk to children of affected × unaffected (noncarrier) | 0 affected; all are carriers | 1/2 affected |
| Risk to children of two carriers or two heterozygotes | 1/4 affected | 3/4 affected (1/4 may be severe homozygotes) |
| Consanguinity | Increases frequency | Little effect |
| Key diagnostic clue | Two unaffected parents with an affected child | Two affected parents with an unaffected child |
Reasoning through a pedigree
A systematic approach avoids most errors. First, look for two unaffected parents with an affected child: if present, the trait must be recessive. Next, look for two affected parents with an unaffected child: if present, the trait must be dominant. Then check for sex bias and male to male transmission to decide between autosomal and X linked modes (Chapter 3). For each hypothesis that remains, try to assign genotypes to every person; a hypothesis is ruled out if any individual cannot be given a consistent genotype. Finally, if more than one mode fits, choose the one that requires the fewest assumptions, such as the fewest unrelated carriers marrying into the family. For a rare trait, assume that people marrying into the family are homozygous for the common allele unless the pedigree forces otherwise.
Ascertainment and the limits of pedigrees
Pedigrees are small, so the ratios within any one family seldom match Mendelian expectations, and the way families are found (ascertainment) can bias the data: a family is usually studied because it has at least one affected child, which inflates the observed proportion of affected children. Other complications include new mutations, which can produce an isolated affected child with a dominant disorder; incomplete penetrance, in which a carrier of a dominant allele is unaffected; locus heterogeneity, in which mutations in different genes cause the same phenotype; and nonpaternity or adoption, which break the assumed genetic relationships. Chapter 2 discusses penetrance and expressivity, and Chapter 14 returns to risk calculation in genetic counseling.
Pedigrees let us apply Mendel's rules to human families. Recessive traits typically appear in children of unaffected carrier parents and are favored by consanguinity; dominant traits appear in every generation and pass from an affected parent to about half the children. Assign genotypes systematically, use conditional probability (the 2/3 rule) for unaffected siblings, and multiply the independent probabilities to obtain risk.
The chapter in one breath
- Mendel succeeded by using true breeding pea lines, either or traits, separate generations, reciprocal crosses and large counts.
- Genes come in pairs of alleles; the genotype is the allele combination and the phenotype is the observed trait.
- The principle of segregation: the two alleles of a gene separate into different gametes with equal probability, reflecting separation of homologs in anaphase I.
- A monohybrid intercross gives 1:2:1 genotypes and, with complete dominance, 3:1 phenotypes; two thirds of the dominant F2 are heterozygous.
- A testcross to a homozygous recessive reveals the gametes of the tested individual: 1:1 for a heterozygote, all dominant for a homozygote.
- The principle of independent assortment: unlinked genes segregate independently because homologous pairs orient randomly at metaphase I, giving 9:3:3:1 in a dihybrid intercross and 1:1:1:1 in a dihybrid testcross.
- For n heterozygous genes, expect 2n gametes, 3n genotypes, 2n phenotypes and a 4n cell Punnett square.
- The product rule multiplies probabilities of independent events; the sum rule adds probabilities of mutually exclusive events.
- Conditional probability gives the 2/3 carrier risk for an unaffected sibling of a person with a recessive disorder; the binomial expansion handles "exactly k of n" questions.
- The chi square test, Σ(O − E)2/E with df = classes − 1, decides whether deviations from a ratio can be attributed to chance; reject at P < 0.05.
- In pedigrees, unaffected parents with an affected child signal a recessive trait; affected parents with an unaffected child signal a dominant trait.
Words worth knowing
| Term | What it means |
|---|---|
| Allele | One of the alternative forms of a gene, such as R (round) or r (wrinkled). |
| Autosomal dominant | Inheritance of a trait caused by a dominant allele on a non sex chromosome; affected people usually have an affected parent. |
| Autosomal recessive | Inheritance of a trait that appears only in individuals homozygous for a recessive allele on a non sex chromosome; parents are usually unaffected carriers. |
| Backcross | A cross of an F1 individual with one of its parents or with an individual of the same genotype as a parent. |
| Binomial expansion | A formula, n!/(s! t!) ps qt, for the probability of a given number of each of two outcomes in any order. |
| Blending inheritance | The disproven idea that parental traits mix permanently in offspring, like mixing paints. |
| Carrier | A heterozygous individual who carries a recessive allele but does not show the recessive phenotype. |
| Chi square test | A statistical test that compares observed and expected counts to judge whether deviations from a hypothesis are likely due to chance. |
| Conditional probability | The probability of an event given that some other information is already known, calculated by restricting the possible outcomes. |
| Consanguineous mating | A mating between close relatives, which raises the chance that children are homozygous for a rare recessive allele. |
| Degrees of freedom | The number of classes that are free to vary once the total is fixed; for a genetic ratio test, the number of classes minus one. |
| Dihybrid cross | A cross between individuals that are heterozygous at two loci, such as RrYy × RrYy. |
| Dominant | Describes an allele whose phenotype is expressed in the heterozygote. |
| F1 and F2 | The first and second filial generations: the offspring of the P cross, and the offspring of the F1. |
| Gene | A unit of heredity occupying a specific locus on a chromosome that influences one or more traits. |
| Genotype | The set of alleles an individual carries at one or more loci. |
| Heterozygous | Having two different alleles at a locus. |
| Homozygous | Having two identical alleles at a locus. |
| Independent assortment | Mendel's second principle: alleles of different, unlinked genes segregate into gametes independently of one another. |
| Locus | The specific location of a gene on a chromosome. |
| Monohybrid cross | A cross that follows the inheritance of a single gene, such as Aa × Aa. |
| Null hypothesis | The hypothesis that observed results differ from expected only by chance; in genetics, usually a specific Mendelian ratio. |
| P value | The probability, if the null hypothesis is true, of obtaining a deviation at least as large as the one observed. |
| Pedigree | A standardized family tree showing relationships and which members express a trait. |
| Phenotype | The observable characteristics of an individual, from visible traits to biochemical properties. |
| Proband | The person through whom a family first comes to a geneticist's attention, marked by an arrow in a pedigree. |
| Product rule | The probability that independent events all occur is the product of their individual probabilities. |
| Reciprocal cross | A pair of crosses in which the phenotypes of the male and female parents are switched. |
| Recessive | Describes an allele whose phenotype is expressed only when it is homozygous (or hemizygous). |
| Segregation | Mendel's first principle: the two alleles of a gene separate so each gamete receives only one. |
| Sum rule | The probability that any one of several mutually exclusive events occurs is the sum of their individual probabilities. |
| Testcross | A cross of an individual of unknown genotype with a homozygous recessive, so that offspring phenotypes reveal the unknown's gametes. |
| True breeding | Describes a line that produces only offspring like itself when selfed or intercrossed, because it is homozygous. |
Check yourself
Extensions of Mendel
Mendel's peas gave clean 3:1 and 9:3:3:1 ratios, but most real genes are not so tidy. Heterozygotes can look intermediate, both alleles can show at once, a gene can have dozens of alleles, some genotypes never survive to be counted, and one gene can hide the effects of another. This chapter shows that none of these complications overturn Mendel: they are his rules operating on the biochemistry of real gene products, and once you see the pathway behind a strange ratio, the ratio stops being strange.
By the end of this chapter you can
- Distinguish complete dominance, incomplete dominance and codominance, and explain each in terms of gene product.
- Analyze multiple allele series, including the ABO blood group and dominance hierarchies, and predict offspring of crosses involving them.
- Recognize the 2:1 ratio produced by a recessive lethal allele and contrast recessive, dominant and conditional lethals.
- Explain gene interaction that produces novel phenotypes while preserving a 9:3:3:1 ratio.
- Identify the major forms of epistasis from their modified dihybrid ratios (9:3:4, 12:3:1, 9:7, 15:1, 13:3 and 9:6:1) and relate each to a biochemical pathway.
- Define and calculate penetrance, define expressivity, and explain how environment, modifier genes and age alter phenotype.
- Explain phenocopies, norms of reaction and temperature sensitive alleles.
- Design and interpret a complementation test to decide whether two recessive mutations lie in the same gene, and sort mutants into complementation groups.
Section 1Incomplete dominance, codominance and multiple alleles
Dominance is a property of the heterozygote's phenotype
In Chapter 1, dominance meant that a heterozygote looked like one homozygote. That is complete dominance. But dominance is not built into an allele; it describes how the phenotype of the heterozygote compares with the two homozygotes, and the answer depends on the trait and on how closely you look. Three relationships are recognized:
- Complete dominance: the heterozygote is indistinguishable from one homozygote. This usually happens when one functional allele makes enough product for a normal phenotype (the gene is haplosufficient).
- Incomplete dominance (partial dominance): the heterozygote phenotype is intermediate between the two homozygotes, often because the amount of product, and thus the trait, depends on the dose of a functional allele.
- Codominance: the heterozygote shows the phenotypes of both alleles simultaneously, because each allele makes its own distinct, detectable product.
Incomplete dominance
The classic example is flower color in snapdragons (Antirrhinum) and four o'clocks (Mirabilis). A true breeding red line crossed with a true breeding white line gives pink F1 plants. Intercrossing the pink plants gives an F2 of 1 red : 2 pink : 1 white. This looks at first like blending, but it is not: red and white reappear unchanged in the F2, proving that the alleles stayed discrete. The red allele CR encodes an enzyme in anthocyanin pigment synthesis, while CW makes no functional enzyme. Two doses give full red pigment, one dose gives half as much, which we see as pink, and none gives white.
With incomplete dominance the phenotypic ratio equals the genotypic ratio, 1:2:1, because each genotype has its own phenotype. Symbols change accordingly: since neither allele is dominant, geneticists use superscripts on a common base letter rather than upper and lower case letters.
Codominance
In codominance both alleles are expressed in the heterozygote, each detectable in its own right. The human MN blood group is a clean example. The GYPA gene encodes glycophorin A, a red cell surface protein, and two common alleles, LM and LN, make forms that differ at two amino acids. People with genotype LMLM have type M cells, LNLN have type N, and heterozygotes LMLN have type MN, with both antigens present on their cells. Two MN parents have children in the ratio 1 M : 2 MN : 1 N.
Whether a pair of alleles looks dominant, incompletely dominant or codominant often depends on the level of analysis. Sickle cell disease illustrates this. At the level of the whole person under ordinary conditions, the sickle allele HbS is recessive: heterozygotes (sickle cell trait) are generally healthy. At the level of red cell shape under low oxygen, heterozygote cells sickle somewhat, so the allele is incompletely dominant. At the level of the protein, heterozygotes make both normal hemoglobin A and hemoglobin S, which can be separated by electrophoresis, so the alleles are codominant. Same alleles, three answers.
Multiple alleles
Any one diploid individual carries at most two alleles of a gene, but a population can carry many. A gene with three or more alleles in the population has multiple alleles, and the alleles form an allelic series. With n alleles, the number of possible genotypes is n(n + 1)/2: n homozygotes plus n(n − 1)/2 heterozygotes. Three alleles give 6 genotypes; four give 10.
The ABO blood group combines multiple alleles with both dominance and codominance. The ABO gene encodes a glycosyltransferase that adds a sugar to a cell surface precursor called the H antigen. The IA allele's enzyme adds N acetylgalactosamine, making the A antigen; the IB enzyme adds galactose, making the B antigen; the i allele carries a frameshift and makes no active enzyme, so the H antigen is left unmodified (type O). IA and IB are each dominant to i and codominant with each other.
| Blood type | Genotypes | Antigens on red cells | Antibodies in plasma | Can receive red cells from |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| A | IAIA, IAi | A | Anti B | A, O |
| B | IBIB, IBi | B | Anti A | B, O |
| AB | IAIB | A and B | Neither | A, B, AB, O (universal recipient) |
| O | ii | Neither (unmodified H) | Anti A and anti B | O only (O is the universal red cell donor) |
Another kind of allelic series is a dominance hierarchy, in which each allele is dominant to those below it. Rabbit coat color is the textbook case, with four alleles of the C gene: C (full color, agouti) > cch (chinchilla, silvery gray) > ch (Himalayan, white with dark extremities) > c (albino). A cchch rabbit is chinchilla, a chc rabbit is Himalayan, and so on. The Himalayan allele is itself temperature sensitive, a point we return to in Section 4. Plant self incompatibility systems carry the idea to an extreme: the S locus of some species has dozens of alleles, and pollen cannot fertilize a plant that carries the same S allele, which enforces outcrossing.
Dominance describes the heterozygote's phenotype, not a property of the allele. Incomplete dominance gives intermediate heterozygotes and a 1:2:1 phenotypic ratio; codominance shows both allele products, as in the MN and AB blood types. Genes can have many alleles in a population, arranged in dominance hierarchies or mixed relationships like ABO, and n alleles give n(n + 1)/2 genotypes.
Section 2Lethal alleles and gene interaction
The yellow mouse puzzle
Soon after Mendel's work was rediscovered, the French geneticist Lucien Cuénot studied coat color in mice and hit a ratio that made no sense. Yellow mice never bred true. When yellow was crossed with yellow, the offspring were always about 2 yellow : 1 nonyellow (agouti), never 3:1. And every yellow mouse, when testcrossed, proved to be heterozygous. Where were the homozygous yellow mice?
The answer is that they die as embryos. The yellow allele, AY, is an allele of the agouti gene. It has a dominant effect on coat color (one copy makes the coat yellow) but a recessive lethal effect: AYAY embryos die shortly after implantation. A yellow by yellow cross (AYA × AYA) is expected to give 1/4 AYAY (dead), 1/2 AYA (yellow) and 1/4 AA (agouti). Among the survivors, yellow : agouti = 1/2 : 1/4 = 2:1. The mechanism was later found: AY carries a large deletion that fuses the agouti coding sequence to the promoter of a neighboring gene, Raly, which is essential for early development. The deletion destroys Raly function (lethal when homozygous) while driving agouti protein expression everywhere (yellow coat, plus obesity and diabetes in adult yellow mice).
Kinds of lethal alleles
A lethal allele causes death of the organism, usually before reproductive age. Most are recessive lethals: heterozygotes survive (often appearing normal), and homozygotes die. Many essential genes, whose complete loss is incompatible with life, can mutate to recessive lethal alleles, and every human is estimated to carry a small number of them in the heterozygous state. A cross of two heterozygous carriers of a recessive lethal with no visible heterozygous phenotype simply produces about one quarter fewer offspring, with all survivors normal in appearance; only when the heterozygote has a visible phenotype, as with yellow mice, does the 2:1 ratio appear.
Other examples: the Manx allele in cats (M) causes taillessness in heterozygotes and is lethal early in development in homozygotes, so Manx by Manx crosses give 2 Manx : 1 tailed. Creeper chickens, with short legs, behave the same way. In humans, achondroplasia (caused by an activating mutation in FGFR3) is dominant for short limbed dwarfism, while homozygotes have a severe skeletal dysplasia that is usually lethal in infancy.
Dominant lethal alleles kill even in one copy. Those that act before reproduction are removed from the population in the same generation they arise, so they are seen only as new mutations. A dominant lethal can persist only if its effect appears after reproduction has begun. Huntington disease is the textbook example: symptoms typically begin between 30 and 50 years of age, after many affected people have had children, and the disease is eventually fatal.
Conditional lethal alleles are lethal only under certain conditions. Temperature sensitive (ts) mutants of bacteria, yeast and flies survive at a permissive temperature but die at a restrictive one, usually because the mutant protein misfolds at higher temperature. Geneticists prize ts alleles because they allow the study of essential genes: grow the organism at the permissive temperature, then shift it and see what fails. In humans, glucose 6 phosphate dehydrogenase deficiency is conditional in a different sense: carriers are usually healthy but can suffer severe hemolysis after eating fava beans or taking certain drugs.
| Type of lethal | Genotype that dies | Effect on ratios | Example |
|---|---|---|---|
| Recessive lethal with dominant visible effect | Homozygote | Heterozygote intercross gives 2:1 | Yellow mice (AY), Manx cats |
| Recessive lethal, no heterozygous phenotype | Homozygote | All survivors look normal; litter size reduced by about 1/4 | Many essential gene loss of function alleles |
| Dominant lethal, early acting | Heterozygote and homozygote | Not transmitted; seen only as new mutations | Severe developmental mutations |
| Dominant lethal, late acting | Heterozygote (later in life) | Transmitted 1:1 like any dominant trait | Huntington disease |
| Conditional lethal | Depends on environment | Normal ratios under permissive conditions | Temperature sensitive mutants, G6PD deficiency |
Gene interaction that produces novel phenotypes
So far each trait has been controlled by one gene. But most traits are the products of several genes whose products interact, and when two genes affect the same trait, the dihybrid ratio may be modified or new phenotypes may appear. The term gene interaction covers all such cases; the simplest are those in which the 9:3:3:1 ratio is preserved but the four classes are four distinct forms of one trait.
The classic example, analyzed by William Bateson and Reginald Punnett in the early 1900s, is comb shape in chickens. Two genes, R (rose) and P (pea), act together:
- R_P_: walnut comb
- R_pp: rose comb
- rrP_: pea comb
- rrpp: single comb
A cross of true breeding rose (RRpp) with true breeding pea (rrPP) gives an F1 with walnut combs, a phenotype seen in neither parent. The F2 shows 9 walnut : 3 rose : 3 pea : 1 single. The ratio is Mendelian, but the walnut and single classes are novel phenotypes created by the combination of alleles at two loci. Similar interactions produce the red, brown, scarlet and white eyes that segregate when Drosophila carrying the brown and scarlet mutations are crossed and bell pepper colors (red, peach, brown, green, from two genes).
How can you tell gene interaction for a single trait from two separate traits? Look at the parents and the F1. If one trait (comb shape) appears in four forms in the F2, and the F1 shows a form not present in either parent, two genes are acting on that one trait. Testcrossing the F1 to rrpp confirms it: the four comb types appear 1:1:1:1.
Lethal alleles remove genotype classes and modify ratios: a recessive lethal with a visible heterozygote converts 1:2:1 into 2:1, and a lethal combined with a second gene gives ratios in twelfths. Late acting dominant lethals such as Huntington disease persist because they act after reproduction, and conditional lethals depend on the environment. When two genes shape one trait, the F2 can show 9:3:3:1 with novel phenotypes, as in chicken combs.
Section 3Epistasis and modified ratios
When one gene masks another
Epistasis is a form of gene interaction in which the genotype at one locus masks or modifies the phenotypic expression of a genotype at another locus. The gene doing the masking is epistatic; the gene whose effect is hidden is hypostatic. The word comes from Greek for "standing upon," and the image is apt: one gene stands on top of another. Epistasis is different from dominance. Dominance is an interaction between alleles at the same locus; epistasis is an interaction between different loci.
In a dihybrid intercross with epistasis, the 16 Punnett cells still occur in the usual proportions of 9 A_B_ : 3 A_bb : 3 aaB_ : 1 aabb. Independent assortment has not changed. What changes is that some of these genotype classes share a phenotype, so the four classes merge into three or two phenotypic classes. Every epistatic ratio therefore still adds up to 16, and recognizing a ratio with a total of 16 is the first clue that two genes are involved.
Thinking in pathways
Epistasis is easiest to understand through biochemical pathways. Many traits are the end product of a series of enzyme catalyzed steps, each enzyme encoded by a different gene. A loss of function mutation in any step blocks everything downstream. If a mutation blocks an early step, it does not matter what alleles are present at genes acting later; the later enzymes have no substrate. The early acting gene is therefore epistatic to the later one.
Recessive epistasis: 9:3:4
In recessive epistasis, the homozygous recessive genotype at one locus masks the other locus. Labrador retriever coat color is the standard example. The B gene (TYRP1) determines whether the dark pigment eumelanin is black (B_) or brown (bb). The E gene (MC1R, the melanocortin 1 receptor) determines whether eumelanin is deposited in the hair at all; ee dogs make little eumelanin in the coat and are yellow, although their noses and lips still show the B genotype. A cross of two dogs heterozygous at both loci (BbEe × BbEe) gives 9 black (B_E_) : 3 chocolate (bbE_) : 4 yellow (3 B_ee + 1 bbee). Albinism in many animals works the same way: cc individuals lacking tyrosinase are white whatever their other coat color genes say, which is why albino mice are a frequent textbook example of 9:3:4.
The Bombay phenotype in humans is recessive epistasis too. The FUT1 gene (the H locus) makes the fucosyltransferase that builds the H antigen, the substrate on which the ABO enzymes act. People homozygous for a null allele (hh) make no H antigen, so even if they carry IA or IB, no A or B antigen can be made, and they type as O. The famous clue is a pedigree in which a "type O" mother has an AB child: she must carry an IB or IA allele masked by hh.
Dominant epistasis: 12:3:1
In dominant epistasis, a dominant allele at one locus masks the other locus. Fruit color in summer squash shows it. A dominant allele W blocks pigment formation, giving white fruit regardless of the second gene. Among ww plants, Y_ gives yellow and yy gives green. The F2 of WwYy × WwYy is 12 white (9 W_Y_ + 3 W_yy) : 3 yellow (wwY_) : 1 green (wwyy).
Duplicate recessive epistasis (complementary genes): 9:7
When two genes act in series in one pathway and a recessive loss of function at either one gives the same mutant phenotype, both genes must have a dominant allele for the wild type phenotype. Bateson and Punnett found this in sweet peas: two true breeding white flowered strains crossed to give purple F1 plants, and the F2 was 9 purple : 7 white. Purple requires C_P_; every genotype with cc or pp is white (Figure 2.3A). This is also called complementary gene action, because the two white parents each supply what the other lacks, which is exactly the logic of the complementation test in Section 5.
Duplicate dominant epistasis: 15:1
When either of two genes can supply the same function, as with duplicated genes, a dominant allele at either locus is enough for the wild type phenotype, and only the double homozygous recessive is mutant. Seed capsule shape in shepherd's purse (Capsella) segregates 15 triangular (any genotype with at least one A or one B) : 1 ovoid (aabb). Duplicate genes are common in plants with polyploid ancestry, and 15:1 ratios are frequent in crops such as wheat.
Dominant and recessive epistasis: 13:3
Sometimes the dominant allele of one gene and the recessive genotype of the other both produce the same phenotype. In chickens, C is required for color, and a dominant inhibitor I suppresses color. Only iiC_ birds are colored. Crossing two white breeds (white Leghorn, IICC, and white Wyandotte, iicc) gives white F1 (IiCc) and an F2 of 13 white (9 I_C_ + 3 I_cc + 1 iicc) : 3 colored (iiC_).
Duplicate genes with cumulative effect: 9:6:1
Fruit shape in another summer squash cross gives 9 disc (A_B_) : 6 sphere (A_bb or aaB_) : 1 long (aabb). Here a dominant allele at either locus has the same effect and the effects add: two loci with dominant alleles give disc, one gives sphere, and none gives long. Strictly this is gene interaction with additive effects rather than masking, but it is usually taught alongside epistatic ratios.
| Ratio | Name | Classes merged | Pathway logic | Example |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 9:3:3:1 | No epistasis (or novel phenotypes) | None | Independent effects, or two genes jointly shaping one trait | Pea seed shape and color; chicken comb |
| 9:3:4 | Recessive epistasis | aaB_ + aabb | aa blocks a step needed before B can show | Labrador coat, albino mice, Bombay phenotype |
| 12:3:1 | Dominant epistasis | A_B_ + A_bb | Dominant A blocks or overrides the pathway | Summer squash fruit color |
| 9:7 | Duplicate recessive (complementary genes) | A_bb + aaB_ + aabb | Two required steps in series | Sweet pea flower color |
| 15:1 | Duplicate dominant | All but aabb | Either of two redundant genes suffices | Shepherd's purse capsule shape |
| 13:3 | Dominant and recessive | A_B_ + A_bb + aabb | Dominant inhibitor plus a required gene | White Leghorn × white Wyandotte chickens |
| 9:6:1 | Duplicate genes with cumulative effect | A_bb + aaB_ | Each dominant allele adds to the phenotype | Summer squash fruit shape |
Epistasis is masking of one locus by another, and it changes how the nine, three, three and one classes are grouped rather than changing their frequencies. Learn the six modified ratios with their pathway logic: 9:3:4 (recessive epistasis), 12:3:1 (dominant epistasis), 9:7 (two steps in series), 15:1 (redundant genes), 13:3 (dominant inhibitor) and 9:6:1 (additive duplicate genes). Divide the data by one sixteenth of the total to recognize the ratio.
Section 4Penetrance, expressivity and the environment
Same genotype, different phenotypes
Mendel's traits behaved as if each genotype produced exactly one phenotype. Many genes are less predictable. Two people can carry the identical disease allele, yet one is severely affected, one mildly, and one not at all. Geneticists describe this variability with two terms that students often confuse: penetrance and expressivity.
Penetrance
Penetrance is the percentage of individuals with a particular genotype who show the expected phenotype at all. It answers a yes or no question across a group: does the person with the genotype have the trait? If 80 of 100 people carrying a dominant allele show the trait, penetrance is 80 percent. When every individual with the genotype shows the phenotype, the allele is fully penetrant; otherwise it shows incomplete (or reduced) penetrance. Incompletely penetrant dominant traits can appear to skip a generation: an unaffected parent may transmit the allele to an affected child, creating a pedigree that looks recessive at first glance.
Familiar examples include polydactyly (extra fingers or toes), which in some families shows clearly reduced penetrance, and inherited cancer predispositions. Women who carry a harmful BRCA1 variant have a lifetime breast cancer risk commonly cited at about 55 to 70 percent, far above the population risk of roughly 12 to 13 percent, but not 100 percent. Retinoblastoma, caused by RB1 mutations, shows about 90 percent penetrance in carriers of typical mutations.
Penetrance is often age dependent. Huntington disease alleles with 40 or more CAG repeats are essentially fully penetrant over a normal lifespan, but the probability of having symptoms rises with age, so a 25 year old carrier usually shows no signs. When counseling relatives, geneticists use age specific penetrance curves rather than a single number.
Expressivity
Expressivity is the degree or intensity with which a trait is expressed in those individuals who do show it. It answers a "how much" question about each affected person. An allele with variable expressivity produces a range of severity. Neurofibromatosis type 1 (NF1) is the standard example: almost all carriers show some sign by adulthood (penetrance near 100 percent), but one affected person may have only a few café au lait spots while a relative has hundreds of neurofibromas, learning difficulties and skeletal problems. Marfan syndrome likewise ranges from mild tall stature and joint laxity to life threatening aortic dilation within the same family.
Why penetrance and expressivity vary
Variation in penetrance and expressivity has three main sources. Modifier genes elsewhere in the genome alter the effect of the primary gene; differences in genetic background are why a mutation can produce a severe phenotype in one inbred mouse strain and a mild one in another. The environment, including diet, temperature, drugs, infections and toxins, changes how gene products work or how much they are needed. And chance events during development, such as which cells happen to acquire a second hit in a tumor suppressor gene or random variation in gene expression, can make even genetically identical twins differ.
Environmental effects on gene expression
Some of the clearest examples involve temperature. Himalayan rabbits and Siamese cats carry temperature sensitive alleles of the tyrosinase gene. The enzyme works at the cooler temperatures of the ears, nose, paws and tail, but is inactive at core body temperature, so pigment forms only at the extremities. Shave a patch of a Himalayan rabbit's back and keep an ice pack on it, and the new fur grows in dark. The genotype has not changed; its expression depends on the temperature.
Human disease offers equally clear cases. Phenylketonuria (PKU) results from homozygosity for loss of function alleles of phenylalanine hydroxylase. On an ordinary diet, phenylalanine accumulates and causes severe intellectual disability; on a low phenylalanine diet begun in the newborn period, affected children develop with normal or near normal intelligence. Newborn screening exists precisely so that the environment can be changed early enough to alter the phenotype. Lactase persistence and lactose intolerance, G6PD deficiency with fava bean exposure, and the effect of smoking on lung disease in people with alpha 1 antitrypsin deficiency are further gene by environment examples.
Plants show strong environmental effects too. Hydrangea flower color depends on soil pH, which controls how much aluminum is available to bind the pigment: acidic soil gives blue flowers and alkaline soil pink ones, in plants of the same genotype.
Phenocopies and norms of reaction
A phenocopy is a phenotype produced by environmental factors that mimics a phenotype normally produced by a specific genotype. Phenocopies are not inherited. Thalidomide, a sedative given to pregnant women around 1960, caused limb malformations that resembled those of rare inherited syndromes such as Roberts syndrome. Heat shock of Drosophila pupae can produce wing defects that look like specific mutations. In a pedigree, a phenocopy can mislead an analyst into seeing an inherited trait where there is none, or into assigning the wrong genotype.
A norm of reaction is the range of phenotypes a single genotype produces across a range of environments. It is usually drawn as a graph with environment on the horizontal axis and phenotype on the vertical axis, one line per genotype. When the lines are parallel, genotype and environment act additively; when they cross, the best genotype in one environment is not the best in another, a genotype by environment interaction. Classic studies of Drosophila eye facet number at different temperatures showed that genotypes respond to the same environmental change by different amounts, and studies of yarrow clones grown at different elevations showed that the ranking of genotypes can even reverse from one environment to another. Norms of reaction are a reminder that a phenotype belongs to a genotype in an environment, never to a genotype alone.
| Term | Question it answers | Measured as | Example |
|---|---|---|---|
| Penetrance | Does a person with the genotype show the trait? | Percent of carriers affected | BRCA1 breast cancer, polydactyly |
| Age dependent penetrance | By what age does the trait appear? | Percent affected at each age | Huntington disease |
| Expressivity | How severe is the trait in affected people? | Range of severity | Neurofibromatosis type 1, Marfan syndrome |
| Temperature sensitive allele | Does the gene product work at this temperature? | Phenotype at permissive versus restrictive temperature | Siamese cat and Himalayan rabbit coat |
| Phenocopy | Is this genetic or environmental? | Environmentally caused mimic of a mutant phenotype | Thalidomide limb defects |
| Norm of reaction | How does one genotype respond across environments? | Graph of phenotype against environment | Plant height at different elevations |
Penetrance is the percentage of carriers who show a trait; expressivity is how strongly it shows in those who do. Both are shaped by modifier genes, environment and chance. Temperature sensitive alleles, diet treatable disorders like PKU, phenocopies and norms of reaction all show that phenotype depends on genotype and environment together, and risk calculations must multiply transmission probabilities by penetrance.
Section 5Complementation tests
The question complementation answers
Suppose a geneticist screens thousands of fruit flies and recovers ten independent recessive mutants that all have white eyes, or a plant breeder finds five dwarf lines, or a clinic sees several families with the same recessive form of deafness. A basic question comes first: are these mutations in the same gene or in different genes? The phenotype alone cannot say, because, as Section 3 showed, mutations that block different steps of one pathway produce the same phenotype. The complementation test answers the question with a single cross.
How the test works
Cross two homozygous recessive mutants that have the same phenotype, and examine the F1:
- If the F1 is wild type, the mutations complement each other, and they are in different genes. Each parent was homozygous mutant for a different gene and supplied a working copy of the gene the other lacked. Mutant 1 is a1a1 BB, mutant 2 is AA b2b2, and the F1, Aa1 Bb2, has one working copy of each gene.
- If the F1 is mutant, the mutations fail to complement, and they are (with rare exceptions) in the same gene. The F1 carries two different mutant alleles of one gene, a1a2, and has no working copy.
The logic depends on the mutations being recessive loss of function alleles. In the F1 the two mutations sit on different homologs, a configuration called trans. Seymour Benzer, working on bacteriophage T4 in the 1950s, formalized this as the cis trans test and used the word cistron for a unit of function defined by complementation. A cistron corresponds, in nearly all cases, to what we now call a gene.
Notice how closely this mirrors the 9:7 ratio of Section 3. Two white sweet pea strains crossed to give purple F1 plants: that is complementation, and it told Bateson and Punnett that the strains carried mutations in different genes, C and P.
Complementation groups
With many mutants, every pair is crossed and the results are arranged in a complementation matrix. Mutants that fail to complement one another are placed in the same complementation group, and each group corresponds to one gene. The number of groups is therefore an estimate of the number of genes in which mutations can produce the phenotype. Complementation analysis of yeast cell division cycle (cdc) mutants, many of them temperature sensitive, identified dozens of genes needed for cell cycle progression, work honored with a Nobel Prize in 2001. Similar analyses defined the genes of the T4 phage rII region, the yeast mating pathway and many metabolic pathways.
| Mutant | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | − | + | − | + | + |
| 2 | − | + | + | − | |
| 3 | − | + | + | ||
| 4 | − | + | |||
| 5 | − |
The matrix above is the same data in the conventional half matrix form. The diagonal is always −, because a mutant crossed with itself cannot complement.
Complementation in human families
Humans cannot be crossed deliberately, but nature sometimes performs the test. Congenital deafness is often autosomal recessive, and mutations in well over 50 different genes can cause it. Deaf people frequently marry one another, and the outcomes are informative. When two deaf parents with recessive deafness have only deaf children, they likely carry mutations in the same gene. When two deaf parents have children who all hear normally, the parents' mutations must be in different genes, and each child is heterozygous at both loci. The same reasoning applies to recessive forms of blindness such as retinitis pigmentosa, which can be caused by mutations in dozens of genes. Clinicians call this phenomenon locus heterogeneity: the same phenotype arising from mutations at different loci. Complementation can also be tested in cultured cells by fusing cells from two patients; if the hybrid cell recovers normal function, the patients have defects in different genes. This was how the complementation groups of xeroderma pigmentosum, a DNA repair disorder, were defined.
Limits and exceptions
- Dominant mutations cannot be tested this way. The F1 will show the mutant phenotype whether or not the mutations are in the same gene, because one dominant allele is enough. Complementation tests require recessive mutations.
- Intragenic (interallelic) complementation is a rare exception in which two mutations in the same gene complement. It occurs when the gene product is a multimer: two differently defective subunits can sometimes assemble into a partly functional protein. The partial activity is usually weaker than wild type, a useful clue.
- Nonallelic noncomplementation is the opposite exception: mutations in two different genes fail to complement, typically because their products physically interact, so being heterozygous for both is enough to reduce function below a threshold.
- Polar mutations in bacterial operons can block expression of downstream genes in the same transcript, making mutations in separate genes appear to fail to complement.
- Complementation is not recombination. Complementation is assessed in the F1 and asks about function. Recombination between two mutations is assessed in the next generation and asks about physical position (Chapter 4). Two mutations in one gene can recombine to give wild type gametes at low frequency, yet still fail to complement.
| F1 result | Interpretation | Usual explanation | Exceptions to keep in mind |
|---|---|---|---|
| Wild type | Complementation | Mutations in different genes | Intragenic complementation (same gene, multimeric product) |
| Mutant | No complementation | Mutations in the same gene | Nonallelic noncomplementation; polar effects; a dominant mutation in either parent |
A complementation test crosses two recessive mutants with the same phenotype. A wild type F1 means the mutations complement and lie in different genes; a mutant F1 means they fail to complement and lie in the same gene. Mutants that fail to complement form a complementation group, one per gene. The test works only for recessive mutations, and intragenic complementation and nonallelic noncomplementation are rare exceptions.
The chapter in one breath
- Dominance describes the heterozygote's phenotype: complete, incomplete (intermediate, 1:2:1) or codominant (both products visible, as in MN and AB blood types).
- The level of analysis matters: the sickle cell allele is recessive for disease, incompletely dominant for cell shape and codominant for the hemoglobin proteins.
- Multiple alleles exist in populations; n alleles give n(n + 1)/2 genotypes. ABO combines dominance of IA and IB over i with codominance of IA and IB.
- A recessive lethal with a visible heterozygous effect gives 2:1 (yellow mice, Manx cats); combined with a second gene, ratios fall in twelfths, such as 6:3:2:1.
- Late acting dominant lethals like Huntington disease persist because they act after reproduction; conditional lethals depend on the environment.
- Gene interaction can produce novel phenotypes in a 9:3:3:1 ratio, as in chicken comb shape.
- Epistasis is masking of one locus by another and regroups the sixteenths: 9:3:4, 12:3:1, 9:7, 15:1, 13:3 and 9:6:1.
- Epistatic ratios make sense as pathways: early blocks mask later steps, steps in series give 9:7, and redundant genes give 15:1.
- Penetrance is the percent of carriers who show a trait; expressivity is the severity among those who do.
- Environment changes phenotype: temperature sensitive tyrosinase in Siamese cats, diet in PKU, soil pH in hydrangeas; phenocopies mimic genetic traits, and norms of reaction chart one genotype across environments.
- The complementation test asks whether two recessive mutations are in the same gene: wild type F1 means different genes, mutant F1 means the same gene.
Words worth knowing
| Term | What it means |
|---|---|
| ABO blood group | A human blood group determined by three main alleles, IA, IB and i, of a glycosyltransferase gene that modifies the H antigen. |
| Allelic series | A set of multiple alleles of one gene, often arranged in order of dominance. |
| Bombay phenotype | A rare hh genotype that prevents H antigen formation, so no A or B antigen can be made regardless of ABO genotype. |
| Cis trans test | Benzer's name for the complementation test, comparing two mutations on the same homolog (cis) with mutations on different homologs (trans). |
| Cistron | A unit of genetic function defined by the cis trans test; essentially a gene. |
| Codominance | A relationship in which the heterozygote shows the phenotypes of both alleles. |
| Complementation | Restoration of the wild type phenotype when two recessive mutations in different genes are combined in one individual. |
| Complementation group | A set of mutations that fail to complement one another and therefore lie in the same gene. |
| Complete dominance | A relationship in which the heterozygote is indistinguishable from the dominant homozygote. |
| Conditional lethal | An allele that kills only under certain conditions, such as a high (restrictive) temperature. |
| Dominant lethal | An allele that causes death even in a single copy; it persists only if it acts after reproduction. |
| Dominant epistasis | Masking of one gene by a dominant allele at another gene, typically giving 12:3:1. |
| Duplicate recessive epistasis | Two genes in series where a recessive genotype at either gives the mutant phenotype, giving 9:7; also called complementary gene action. |
| Epistasis | An interaction in which the genotype at one locus masks or modifies the expression of another locus. |
| Expressivity | The degree to which a trait is expressed in individuals who show it. |
| Gene interaction | Any situation in which two or more genes together determine a single phenotype. |
| Haplosufficient | Describes a gene for which one functional copy produces enough product for a normal phenotype. |
| Hypostatic | Describes a gene whose expression is masked by another, epistatic gene. |
| Incomplete dominance | A relationship in which the heterozygote phenotype is intermediate between the two homozygotes. |
| Incomplete penetrance | A situation in which some individuals with a genotype do not show the expected phenotype. |
| Intragenic complementation | Rare complementation between two mutations in the same gene, usually when the protein is a multimer. |
| Lethal allele | An allele that causes death of the organism, usually before reproductive age. |
| Locus heterogeneity | The production of the same phenotype by mutations in different genes. |
| Modifier gene | A gene that alters the phenotypic effect of another gene. |
| Multiple alleles | The presence of three or more alleles of a gene in a population. |
| Norm of reaction | The range of phenotypes produced by one genotype across a range of environments. |
| Penetrance | The percentage of individuals with a given genotype who express the expected phenotype. |
| Phenocopy | An environmentally caused phenotype that mimics one produced by a particular genotype. |
| Recessive epistasis | Masking of one gene by the homozygous recessive genotype at another gene, typically giving 9:3:4. |
| Recessive lethal | An allele that causes death only when homozygous. |
| Temperature sensitive allele | An allele whose product functions at a permissive temperature but not at a restrictive one. |
Check yourself
Sex Linkage and Extranuclear Inheritance
Mendel's peas gave the same results no matter which parent carried which allele, but many real traits refuse to behave that way. A son inherits color blindness from his mother, and a deletion on chromosome 15 causes one disease when it comes from the father and another when it comes from the mother. This chapter explains why the sex of the parent, and the sex of the child, can change the outcome of a cross.
By the end of this chapter you can
- Compare chromosomal, genic and environmental sex determination systems, including XX/XY, XX/XO, ZZ/ZW, haplodiploidy and temperature dependent sex determination.
- Explain how SRY directs testis development in mammals and how the X to autosome ratio sets sex in Drosophila.
- Predict the results of reciprocal crosses for X linked genes and explain why Morgan and Bridges took them as proof that genes lie on chromosomes.
- Recognize X linked recessive, X linked dominant and Y linked patterns in a pedigree and calculate carrier and recurrence risks.
- Describe three strategies of dosage compensation and the molecular steps of X inactivation, including the role of XIST.
- Distinguish sex influenced and sex limited traits from sex linked traits and solve crosses involving them.
- Explain maternal inheritance of mitochondrial and chloroplast DNA, including heteroplasmy, the bottleneck and the threshold effect.
- Contrast maternal effect with maternal inheritance using snail shell coiling.
- Explain genomic imprinting and use it to account for Prader Willi and Angelman syndromes.
Section 1Sex determination systems
In most animals and in a minority of flowering plants, individuals come in two sexes that make different gametes: females make large, nutrient rich eggs and males make small, mobile sperm or pollen. Sex determination is the mechanism that decides which developmental path an embryo takes. It matters here because when sex is chromosomal, the chromosomes that decide sex also carry ordinary genes whose inheritance is tied to sex.
Chromosomal sex determination
In chromosomal systems, the two sexes differ in their sex chromosomes, and every other chromosome is an autosome. The sex that carries two different sex chromosomes makes two kinds of gametes and is called the heterogametic sex; the sex with two matching sex chromosomes makes one kind of gamete and is the homogametic sex.
- XX/XY. Females are XX (homogametic) and males are XY (heterogametic). This is the system of mammals, of Drosophila and of a few dioecious plants such as white campion. Because each sperm carries either an X or a Y, the father's gamete decides the sex of each child, and the expected sex ratio is 1:1.
- XX/XO. Females are XX and males have a single X and no partner chromosome (written XO, where O means absence). Many grasshoppers and crickets use this system. Males make two kinds of sperm, those with an X and those with no sex chromosome. The nematode Caenorhabditis elegans is a variant: XX individuals are self fertilizing hermaphrodites and XO individuals are males.
- ZZ/ZW. Here the female is heterogametic (ZW) and the male is homogametic (ZZ). Birds, butterflies and moths, and some fish and reptiles use it. The letters Z and W are used precisely so that no one confuses this system with XX/XY. In birds, the egg (not the sperm) decides the sex of the offspring. Evidence suggests that two doses of the Z linked gene DMRT1 push the bird gonad toward a testis.
Haplodiploidy
Bees, wasps and ants (the order Hymenoptera) have no sex chromosomes at all. Fertilized eggs develop into diploid females and unfertilized eggs develop into haploid males, a system called haplodiploidy. A queen honeybee controls whether each egg she lays is fertilized, and so its sex. Because a male is haploid, he makes sperm by mitosis, and every sperm he produces is genetically identical to every other.
In many hymenopterans the real switch is a single locus called complementary sex determiner (csd). Individuals heterozygous at csd become female; individuals that are hemizygous (haploid) become male. Inbreeding produces some eggs homozygous at csd, which develop as sterile diploid males.
Mammals: SRY decides
The study of people with unusual numbers of sex chromosomes showed that in humans it is the presence of a Y chromosome, not the number of X chromosomes, that makes an embryo male. A person with 45,X (one X, no second sex chromosome) has Turner syndrome and develops as a female, usually with short stature and ovaries that fail early. A person with 47,XXY has Klinefelter syndrome and develops as a male, typically tall with small testes and reduced fertility. People with 47,XXX are female and those with 47,XYY are male.
The critical gene on the Y is SRY (sex determining region Y), located on the short arm near the boundary of the pseudoautosomal region. SRY encodes a transcription factor with an HMG box, a DNA binding domain that bends DNA. In the bipotential gonad of a six to seven week embryo, SRY switches on the autosomal gene SOX9. SOX9 makes gonad cells become Sertoli cells, which secrete anti Müllerian hormone to remove the female duct system, while Leydig cells make testosterone to masculinize the rest of the body. Without SRY, the gonad follows the ovarian pathway, supported by genes such as WNT4, RSPO1 and FOXL2.
Two rare conditions confirm SRY's role. In XX males, an abnormal crossover during the father's meiosis has carried SRY from the Y onto the X, so the child has two X chromosomes and testes. In XY females (Swyer syndrome in some cases), the Y is present but SRY is deleted or carries a loss of function mutation, and the gonads develop as nonfunctional streaks.
The pseudoautosomal regions
The human X and Y are very different in size and gene content: the X carries roughly 800 to 900 protein coding genes while the Y carries only a few dozen. Yet in male meiosis the X and Y must pair and segregate. They do so through short regions of shared sequence at their tips, the pseudoautosomal regions (PAR1 at the end of the short arms and PAR2 at the end of the long arms). In male meiosis at least one crossover occurs in PAR1, which is why genes there, such as SHOX, are inherited as though they were autosomal. Outside the PARs, the male specific region of the Y does not recombine and passes intact from father to son.
Drosophila: the X to autosome ratio
Fruit flies have XX females and XY males, but their sex is decided differently. In flies the Y carries no sex determining gene; instead, sex depends on the ratio of X chromosomes to sets of autosomes, the X:A ratio. Calvin Bridges worked this out in the 1920s by studying flies with unusual chromosome sets. A ratio of 1.0 or higher produces a female, 0.5 or lower produces a male, and values in between produce intersexes. Molecularly, a double dose of X linked signal genes switches on Sex lethal (Sxl), which starts a cascade of alternative RNA splicing (Sxl to transformer to doublesex) that produces female development. The Y is still needed in male flies for fertility, because it carries genes for sperm motility, but an XO fly is a sterile male and an XXY fly is a fertile female.
| Fly chromosomes | X:A ratio | Sexual phenotype |
|---|---|---|
| XX; AA | 2/2 = 1.0 | Female |
| XXY; AA | 2/2 = 1.0 | Female (fertile; the Y does not make it male) |
| XXX; AA | 3/2 = 1.5 | Metafemale (weak, usually dies) |
| XX; AAA | 2/3 = 0.67 | Intersex |
| XY; AA | 1/2 = 0.5 | Male |
| XO; AA | 1/2 = 0.5 | Male (sterile, because Y fertility genes are missing) |
| XY; AAA | 1/3 = 0.33 | Metamale (weak, sterile) |
Environmental sex determination
In some animals, sex is not decided by genotype at all. Many turtles, all crocodilians and some lizards show temperature dependent sex determination (TSD): the temperature at which an egg incubates during a sensitive window of development decides the sex. In many turtles warm nests produce females and cool nests produce males; in the American alligator the pattern is reversed, with cool incubation giving females. Temperature acts partly through aromatase, the enzyme that converts testosterone to estrogen. Some fish, such as clownfish, even change sex as adults in response to social cues.
Sex can be set by chromosomes, by ploidy or by the environment. In mammals a single Y gene, SRY, starts testis development, so the Y decides maleness; in flies the X:A ratio decides and the Y matters only for fertility; in birds the female is the heterogametic sex; and in bees haploid eggs become males. Knowing which sex is heterogametic is the first step in solving any cross involving sex chromosomes.
Section 2X linked inheritance and pedigrees
Genes on the X chromosome are X linked. A male has one X, so for X linked genes he is neither homozygous nor heterozygous but hemizygous: whatever allele his single X carries is expressed. A female has two X chromosomes and can be homozygous or heterozygous, just as for autosomal genes. This asymmetry gives X linked traits their signature: results that change when the sexes of the parents are swapped.
Morgan's white eyed fly
In 1910 Thomas Hunt Morgan found a single male fruit fly with white eyes in a bottle of normal, red eyed flies. He crossed it to a red eyed female. All the F1 flies had red eyes, so white was recessive. When he intercrossed the F1, the F2 contained 3 red to 1 white, a Mendelian ratio, but with a twist: every white eyed fly was male. Half the F2 males had white eyes and none of the females did.
Morgan proposed that the gene lies on the X and that the Y has no copy. Using the convention X+ for the wild type (red) allele and Xw for white, the original male was XwY and the female X+X+. The F1 females were X+Xw and the F1 males X+Y. In the F2, daughters received X+ from their father and so were all red eyed, while sons received an X from their heterozygous mother and were X+Y or XwY in equal numbers.
The decisive test was the reciprocal cross: a white eyed female (XwXw) crossed to a red eyed male (X+Y). For an autosomal gene the reciprocal cross gives the same result as the original. Here it did not. All F1 daughters were red eyed (X+Xw) and all F1 sons were white eyed (XwY). This pattern, in which sons resemble their mothers and daughters resemble their fathers, is called crisscross inheritance. Intercrossing these F1 flies gives an F2 of 1 red female : 1 white female : 1 red male : 1 white male.
Bridges and nondisjunction: proof of the chromosome theory
Morgan's student Calvin Bridges pushed the argument to its conclusion. When he crossed white eyed females to red eyed males, about 1 in 2,000 offspring broke the crisscross rule: a few daughters were white eyed and a few sons were red eyed. Bridges predicted that these exceptions came from nondisjunction, the failure of the two X chromosomes to separate in the mother's meiosis. An egg carrying both Xw chromosomes, fertilized by a Y bearing sperm, would give an XwXwY fly: female (X:A = 1.0) and white eyed. An egg with no X, fertilized by an X+ sperm, would give an X+O fly: a red eyed, sterile male. Under the microscope, the exceptional females had a Y and the exceptional males lacked one, exactly as predicted: the most convincing proof yet that genes are carried on chromosomes.
Reading X linked recessive pedigrees
In human families we cannot set up crosses, so we read pedigrees. An X linked recessive trait leaves a characteristic set of fingerprints:
- Many more males than females are affected. A male needs only one copy of the allele; a female needs two. If the allele frequency is q, the expected frequency of affected males is q and of affected females is q2. For red green color vision defects, which affect about 8 percent of males of northern European ancestry, the expected frequency in females is about 0.082 = 0.0064, or roughly 0.6 percent, close to what is observed.
- No male to male transmission. A father gives his X only to daughters and his Y to sons, so an affected father cannot pass the trait to his sons.
- All daughters of an affected male are carriers. Each daughter receives her father's only X.
- The trait often skips a generation, passing from an affected grandfather through a carrier daughter to an affected grandson.
- Sons of carrier mothers have a 1/2 chance of being affected, and daughters of carrier mothers have a 1/2 chance of being carriers.
- An affected female usually has an affected father and a mother who is a carrier or affected.
X linked dominant and Y linked patterns
An X linked dominant trait appears in anyone with at least one copy of the allele. Its pedigree features are different: an affected father passes the trait to all of his daughters and none of his sons, and an affected heterozygous mother passes it to half of her children of either sex. Because females have two chances to inherit the allele, affected females outnumber affected males, often about two to one. Examples include X linked hypophosphatemic rickets, in which a defect in the PHEX gene causes the kidney to waste phosphate, and incontinentia pigmenti and Rett syndrome, in which the mutation is usually lethal or far more severe in hemizygous males, so most patients are female.
Y linked (holandric) traits pass only from father to son, to every son, and never to daughters. Nearly all known Y linked traits concern male fertility, such as deletions that block sperm production.
| Pattern | Who is affected | Transmission clues | Examples |
|---|---|---|---|
| Autosomal recessive | Both sexes equally | Affected children of unaffected parents; consanguinity raises risk | Cystic fibrosis, sickle cell disease |
| Autosomal dominant | Both sexes equally | Every affected person has an affected parent; male to male transmission occurs | Huntington disease, achondroplasia |
| X linked recessive | Mostly males | No male to male transmission; all daughters of affected males are carriers; skips generations | Hemophilia A and B, Duchenne muscular dystrophy, red green color blindness, G6PD deficiency |
| X linked dominant | Females about twice as often as males | Affected father to all daughters, no sons; affected mother to half of all children | Hypophosphatemic rickets, incontinentia pigmenti |
| Y linked | Males only | Father to all sons; never to daughters | Y microdeletions causing azoospermia |
Males are hemizygous for X linked genes, so reciprocal crosses give different results and recessive X linked traits show up mainly in males. In pedigrees, look for the absence of male to male transmission and for carrier daughters of affected men; an X linked dominant trait goes from an affected father to every daughter and no son. Bridges' nondisjunction exceptions tied these patterns to visible chromosomes and proved that genes ride on them.
Section 3Dosage compensation and X inactivation
Gene dosage matters. Extra or missing copies of an autosome are usually lethal or cause serious disease because hundreds of genes are suddenly expressed at the wrong level. Yet in XX/XY species, females have two copies of every X linked gene and males have one, with no harm to either sex. The reason is dosage compensation, a set of mechanisms that equalize the expression of X linked genes between the sexes. Remarkably, three well studied animals solve the problem in three different ways.
| Organism | Strategy | Molecular machinery |
|---|---|---|
| Mammals | Silence one X in every female cell | XIST RNA coats the future inactive X; Polycomb complexes add H3K27 methylation; DNA methylation locks it in |
| Drosophila | Double transcription of the single X in males | Male specific lethal (MSL) complex with roX RNAs; MOF acetylates histone H4 at lysine 16, opening chromatin |
| C. elegans | Halve transcription of each X in hermaphrodites | Dosage compensation complex related to condensin binds both X chromosomes and compacts them |
Barr bodies and the Lyon hypothesis
In 1949, Murray Barr and Ewart Bertram noticed a small, darkly staining mass at the edge of the nucleus in nerve cells of female cats that was missing in males. This Barr body turned out to be a condensed, transcriptionally silent X chromosome, a form of facultative heterochromatin. In 1961 Mary Lyon proposed what is now called the Lyon hypothesis:
- In each somatic cell of a female mammal, one X chromosome is inactivated and becomes a Barr body.
- Inactivation happens early in embryonic development.
- In the embryo proper, the choice of which X to silence, maternal or paternal, is random and is made independently in each cell.
- Once made, the choice is stable and clonally inherited: all descendants of a cell keep the same X inactive.
A female mammal is therefore a mosaic of two cell populations, one expressing her maternal X and one expressing her paternal X. The rule extends to people with extra X chromosomes: cells keep exactly one X active and inactivate all the others, so the number of Barr bodies equals the number of X chromosomes minus one (the n minus 1 rule).
How an X is silenced
X inactivation is controlled by a region of the X called the X inactivation center (XIC). Its key gene is XIST (X inactive specific transcript), which encodes a long noncoding RNA of about 17,000 nucleotides that is never translated. The process can be pictured in steps:
- Counting. The cell senses how many X chromosomes it has relative to its autosome sets. If there is more than one X, inactivation proceeds.
- Choice. One X is chosen to stay active. On the future inactive X, XIST is switched on; on the future active X, XIST is kept off. In mice, an antisense transcript called Tsix, made from the opposite DNA strand across Xist, helps repress Xist on the active X.
- Spreading. XIST RNA coats the chromosome that makes it, working only in cis (on its own chromosome). It spreads outward from the XIC, using repetitive sequences such as LINE elements as way stations.
- Silencing and maintenance. XIST recruits proteins that remove active histone marks and add repressive ones, especially trimethylation of histone H3 at lysine 27 by Polycomb repressive complex 2. The inactive X gains the histone variant macroH2A, its CpG island promoters become methylated, and it replicates late in S phase. DNA methylation makes the silent state heritable through cell division.
In the germ line the process is reversed. In the developing oocyte, the inactive X is reactivated so that each egg carries a working X. In mouse extraembryonic tissues and in all tissues of marsupials, inactivation is imprinted: the paternal X is always the one silenced.
Escape from inactivation
Inactivation is not complete. In humans about 15 percent of X linked genes escape inactivation and are expressed from both X chromosomes, and another 10 percent or so escape in some individuals or tissues. The escapees include genes in the pseudoautosomal regions, which have partners on the Y and so are present in two active copies in both sexes. Escape explains a puzzle: if one X is inactivated anyway, why are 45,X and 47,XXY not harmless? The answer is that people with Turner syndrome have only one copy of the escape genes instead of two, and people with Klinefelter syndrome have an extra copy. Loss of one copy of the pseudoautosomal gene SHOX, for example, accounts for much of the short stature in Turner syndrome.
Visible mosaics
The most famous mosaic is the calico or tortoiseshell cat. An X linked gene, Orange, has an allele XO that makes orange fur and an allele Xo that allows black fur. A heterozygous female (XOXo) has patches of orange where the Xo chromosome was inactivated and patches of black where XO was inactivated. White spotting from an unrelated autosomal gene adds the white areas of a calico. Because the patches depend on two different X chromosomes, calico cats are nearly always female. The rare male calico is usually XXY, and like an XXY man, he is sterile.
Human females show the same mosaicism, though usually less visibly. Women heterozygous for X linked anhidrotic ectodermal dysplasia have patches of skin without sweat glands, mapped by spraying the skin with a starch iodine indicator. Women heterozygous for G6PD deficiency have two populations of red cells, one normal and one deficient. Because inactivation is random, the proportion of cells using each X varies from woman to woman. When most cells happen to inactivate the normal X, called skewed X inactivation, a carrier can show symptoms. Such women are called manifesting heterozygotes; for example, some carriers of Duchenne muscular dystrophy develop muscle weakness or heart muscle disease.
Dosage compensation equalizes X linked gene expression between the sexes: mammals silence one X in females, flies double the male X, and worms halve each X in hermaphrodites. In mammals, XIST RNA coats the chosen X in cis and recruits repressive chromatin marks; the choice is random and clonally inherited, making every female a mosaic. About 15 percent of human X genes escape inactivation, which is why X aneuploidies still have effects.
Section 4Sex influenced and sex limited traits
Not every trait that differs between males and females is caused by a gene on a sex chromosome. Many autosomal genes are expressed differently in the two sexes because males and females have different hormonal environments. Two categories are worth distinguishing, because they produce patterns that can be mistaken for sex linkage.
Sex influenced traits
In a sex influenced trait, both sexes can express the trait, but the heterozygote's phenotype depends on its sex: the allele behaves as dominant in one sex and recessive in the other. Homozygotes have the same phenotype in both sexes.
The standard example is horns in certain sheep breeds. Let H be the allele for horns and h the allele for no horns. HH sheep of both sexes are horned and hh sheep of both sexes are hornless. Hh rams are horned, while Hh ewes are hornless. In effect H is dominant in males and recessive in females, a difference driven by testosterone. Beards in goats follow the same logic. Pattern baldness is often taught the same way, dominant in men and recessive in women. In reality many genes contribute, including variants near the X linked androgen receptor gene, so treat the one gene model as a practice simplification.
Sex limited traits
In a sex limited trait, the phenotype is expressed in only one sex, although both sexes carry and transmit the genes. Milk yield in cattle is the classic example: bulls carry genes that influence milk production and pass them to their daughters, but bulls themselves give no milk. Breeders judge a bull by his daughters' yields. Other examples include genes affecting egg production in hens, the timing of puberty in boys with familial male limited precocious puberty (an autosomal dominant activating mutation in the luteinizing hormone receptor that has no effect in carrier females), and the cock feathering trait of chickens.
In chickens, males usually have long, curved, pointed tail and neck feathers (cock feathering) and females have short, rounded feathers (hen feathering). An autosomal allele H produces hen feathering in both sexes. Females are hen feathered no matter what their genotype is, so the trait of cock feathering is limited to hh males.
| Genotype | Sheep horns, male | Sheep horns, female | Chicken plumage, male | Chicken plumage, female |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| HH | Horned | Horned | Hen feathered | Hen feathered |
| Hh | Horned | Hornless | Hen feathered | Hen feathered |
| hh | Hornless | Hornless | Cock feathered | Hen feathered |
| Type | Sex influenced: heterozygote differs by sex | Sex limited: one phenotype appears only in males | ||
Telling them apart from sex linkage
Sex influenced traits can mimic X linkage in a single generation. Cross a hornless ram (hh) to a horned ewe (HH): every lamb is Hh, so sons are horned like their mother and daughters hornless like their father, which looks like crisscross inheritance. Two tests reveal the truth. An autosomal gene can pass from father to son, which an X linked gene cannot, and the F2 of a sex influenced gene shows 3:1 in one sex and 1:3 in the other.
Sex influenced and sex limited traits are controlled by autosomal genes whose expression depends on the sex of the individual, usually through hormones. In sex influenced traits the heterozygote differs between the sexes; in sex limited traits one phenotype appears in only one sex. Father to son transmission and sex specific F2 ratios of 3:1 and 1:3 distinguish them from X linkage.
Section 5Mitochondrial and chloroplast inheritance, maternal effect and genomic imprinting
This section covers situations in which the two parents do not contribute equally. In extranuclear inheritance, genes in mitochondria or chloroplasts come mostly from one parent. In maternal effect, the mother's nuclear genotype, not the offspring's, decides the offspring's phenotype. In genomic imprinting, a gene inherited from one parent is silenced. They are easily confused, so learn to tell them apart.
The mitochondrial genome
Mitochondria descend from bacteria that were engulfed by an ancestral cell more than a billion and a half years ago, and they still carry a small genome of their own. The human mitochondrial DNA (mtDNA) is a circular molecule of 16,569 base pairs containing 37 genes: 13 encode polypeptides of the oxidative phosphorylation system (subunits of complexes I, III, IV and ATP synthase, but none of complex II), 22 encode transfer RNAs and 2 encode ribosomal RNAs. The genome is compact, with almost no noncoding DNA except the D loop control region, and it uses a slightly different genetic code (for example, UGA codes for tryptophan instead of stop). The other 1,000 or more proteins that a mitochondrion needs are encoded in the nucleus, made in the cytosol and imported. For that reason, many mitochondrial diseases are inherited in ordinary Mendelian patterns.
A cell holds hundreds to thousands of copies of mtDNA. Its mutation rate is much higher than that of nuclear DNA, and with no recombination this makes mtDNA useful for tracing maternal ancestry.
Maternal inheritance, heteroplasmy and the threshold
In humans and most animals, mtDNA is inherited from the mother. An egg contains roughly 100,000 or more copies of mtDNA, while the few mitochondria in the sperm midpiece are tagged with ubiquitin and destroyed in the early embryo. A mother with an mtDNA mutation therefore can pass it to all of her children, sons and daughters alike, but an affected father passes it to none.
When all mtDNA copies in a cell are identical, the cell is homoplasmic; when a cell has a mixture of normal and mutant copies, it is heteroplasmic. Three ideas explain why mitochondrial diseases are so variable, even among siblings:
- The bottleneck. During oogenesis, only a small number of mtDNA molecules from each primordial germ cell repopulate the mature egg. Random sampling means a heteroplasmic mother can produce eggs with very different proportions of mutant mtDNA, so one child may be severely affected and another barely at all.
- Replicative segregation. When a cell divides, its mitochondria are distributed to daughter cells at random, so the proportion of mutant mtDNA drifts between cell lineages and tissues over a lifetime.
- The threshold effect. A tissue shows dysfunction only when the fraction of mutant mtDNA exceeds a threshold, often 60 to 90 percent depending on the mutation. Tissues with high energy demand, such as brain, retina, skeletal muscle and heart, reach their limits first.
| Disorder | Typical mtDNA change | Main features |
|---|---|---|
| Leber hereditary optic neuropathy (LHON) | Point mutations in complex I genes, most often m.11778G>A in MT-ND4; usually homoplasmic | Sudden painless loss of central vision in young adults; incomplete penetrance and more males affected |
| MELAS | m.3243A>G in the tRNA for leucine; heteroplasmic | Mitochondrial encephalomyopathy, lactic acidosis and strokelike episodes |
| MERRF | m.8344A>G in the tRNA for lysine; heteroplasmic | Myoclonic epilepsy with ragged red fibers in muscle biopsy |
Chloroplast inheritance
Chloroplasts also carry their own DNA, typically a circle of 120,000 to 160,000 base pairs with roughly 100 to 130 genes for photosynthesis proteins, ribosomal RNAs and transfer RNAs. In 1909 Carl Correns studied the four o'clock plant Mirabilis jalapa, whose branches can be green, white (lacking chlorophyll) or variegated. He found that the phenotype of seedlings depended only on the branch that bore the seed, the female parent, and not at all on the pollen source. Seeds from green branches gave green seedlings, seeds from white branches gave white seedlings (which die once their seed reserves run out), and seeds from variegated branches gave a mix of green, white and variegated seedlings. The variegated branches carried a mixture of normal and defective plastids, and the egg cells received different mixtures, the plant equivalent of heteroplasmy.
Maternal effect
A maternal effect is not the same as maternal inheritance. In a maternal effect, the gene is an ordinary nuclear gene that follows Mendel's laws, but the offspring's phenotype is decided by the mother's genotype, because the mother loads the egg with mRNA and proteins made from her own genes before fertilization. Those products direct the earliest stages of development, before the embryo's own genes are switched on.
The classic example is the direction of shell coiling in the pond snail Lymnaea peregra. The allele D for right handed (dextral) coiling is dominant to d for left handed (sinistral) coiling, but the direction is set by the orientation of the spindle in the first cleavage divisions, which depends on products the mother deposited in the egg. Snails are hermaphrodites, so a single snail can be crossed or self fertilized. The key results are:
- A dd female crossed to a DD male gives F1 offspring that are all Dd, yet all are sinistral, because their mother is dd.
- Selfing the F1 gives F2 offspring in a ratio of 1 DD : 2 Dd : 1 dd, but all are dextral, because their mother (an F1 snail) is Dd.
- Selfing each F2 snail reveals the 3:1 ratio one generation late: the offspring of DD and Dd F2 snails are dextral and the offspring of dd F2 snails are sinistral. So 3/4 of F2 snails produce dextral broods and 1/4 produce sinistral broods.
Maternal effect genes are central to early development. In Drosophila, the mother deposits bicoid mRNA at the front end of the egg. Its protein gradient specifies head and thorax, and a homozygous mutant mother lays eggs that develop without heads even when the embryo carries a normal paternal allele.
Genomic imprinting
For most genes, the copy from the mother and the copy from the father are expressed equally. For a few hundred mammalian genes (estimates for humans run from about 100 to more than 200), expression depends on the parent of origin: one copy is silenced according to which parent it came from. This is genomic imprinting. An imprinted gene is "maternally imprinted" if the maternal copy is silenced (so only the paternal copy is expressed) and "paternally imprinted" if the paternal copy is silenced. Because these terms are easy to flip, "paternally expressed" or "maternally expressed" is clearer.
Imprints are set by DNA methylation at imprinting control regions (ICRs) during gamete formation. In the primordial germ cells of the embryo, old imprints are erased, and new ones are written according to the sex of the individual: a male writes paternal imprints on every chromosome he will pass on, and a female writes maternal imprints. After fertilization, imprinted methylation is protected from the wave of demethylation that resets most of the genome, and it is maintained in somatic cells for life.
The Igf2 and H19 genes on mouse chromosome 7 (human 11p15) show how an imprint works. Igf2 encodes insulin like growth factor 2, a fetal growth factor, and is expressed only from the paternal chromosome. H19, a noncoding RNA gene, is expressed only from the maternal chromosome. Between them lies an ICR. On the maternal chromosome the ICR is unmethylated and binds the insulator protein CTCF, which blocks shared downstream enhancers from reaching Igf2, so the enhancers activate H19 instead. On the paternal chromosome the ICR is methylated, CTCF cannot bind, the enhancers reach Igf2, and methylation spreading into the H19 promoter silences it. A mouse that inherits a disrupted Igf2 gene from its father is small, but one that inherits the same disrupted gene from its mother is normal, because the maternal copy was silent anyway.
Prader Willi and Angelman syndromes
The clearest human example of imprinting is a cluster of genes on chromosome 15q11 to q13. Some genes in the region, including the small nucleolar RNA cluster SNORD116, are expressed only from the paternal chromosome; one gene, UBE3A, is expressed only from the maternal chromosome in neurons. The same deletion of about 5 million base pairs therefore causes two different disorders depending on its parent of origin:
- Prader Willi syndrome results from loss of the paternal contribution: poor muscle tone and feeding problems in infancy, followed by insatiable appetite and obesity, short stature, small hands and feet, hypogonadism and mild to moderate intellectual disability. About 70 percent of cases are paternal deletions and most of the rest are maternal uniparental disomy, in which the child received two copies of chromosome 15 from the mother and none from the father.
- Angelman syndrome results from loss of the maternal contribution: severe intellectual disability, absent speech, seizures, a jerky gait and a frequently happy demeanor with easily provoked laughter. About 70 percent are maternal deletions; others arise from paternal uniparental disomy, imprinting defects or point mutations in the maternal UBE3A.
Imprinting defects at 11p15 cause Beckwith Wiedemann syndrome (overgrowth and embryonal tumor risk, often from excess IGF2) and its mirror image, Silver Russell syndrome (growth restriction). The parental conflict hypothesis proposes that imprinting evolved as a tug of war over fetal growth: paternally expressed genes such as Igf2 tend to promote it and maternally expressed genes tend to restrain it.
| Pattern | Where the gene is | What decides the phenotype | Signature in crosses |
|---|---|---|---|
| Maternal (organelle) inheritance | mtDNA or cpDNA | The organelle genomes in the egg | Affected mother passes trait to all children; affected father to none; variable because of heteroplasmy |
| Maternal effect | Nucleus, normal Mendelian gene | The mother's nuclear genotype | Reciprocal crosses differ; Mendelian ratios appear one generation late |
| Genomic imprinting | Nucleus | Which parent passed on the active copy | Same mutation causes disease only when inherited from one parent; can be silent for generations |
| X linked recessive | X chromosome | The offspring's own genotype and sex | Mostly males affected; no father to son transmission |
Organelle genomes are usually inherited from the mother, and heteroplasmy, the bottleneck and the threshold effect make mitochondrial disease highly variable. A maternal effect gene is Mendelian, but its products in the egg set the offspring's phenotype, so ratios appear one generation late. Imprinting silences one parental copy through germ line DNA methylation, which is why a single deletion of 15q11 to q13 causes Prader Willi syndrome when paternal and Angelman syndrome when maternal.
The chapter in one breath
- Sex can be determined by sex chromosomes (XX/XY, XX/XO, ZZ/ZW), by ploidy in haplodiploid insects, or by the environment, as in temperature dependent sex determination.
- In mammals the Y gene SRY starts testis development; in Drosophila the X:A ratio sets sex.
- Males are hemizygous for X linked genes, so reciprocal crosses differ and recessive X linked traits appear mainly in males.
- X linked recessive pedigrees show no father to son transmission and carrier daughters of affected men.
- Dosage compensation silences one X in female mammals, doubles the X in male flies and halves both X chromosomes in worm hermaphrodites.
- XIST RNA coats the future inactive X in cis; random, clonally stable inactivation makes every female mammal a mosaic, and the number of Barr bodies is the number of X chromosomes minus one.
- Sex influenced traits differ between the sexes only in heterozygotes; sex limited traits appear in only one sex; both are autosomal.
- mtDNA (16,569 bp, 37 genes) is inherited maternally; heteroplasmy, the bottleneck and the threshold effect make mitochondrial disease variable.
- In a maternal effect the mother's nuclear genotype sets the offspring's phenotype, so Mendelian ratios show up a generation late, as in snail coiling.
- Genomic imprinting silences one parental copy by germ line methylation; loss of paternal 15q11 to q13 causes Prader Willi syndrome and loss of maternal UBE3A causes Angelman syndrome.
Words worth knowing
| Term | What it means |
|---|---|
| Heterogametic sex | The sex with two different sex chromosomes (XY males in mammals, ZW females in birds), which makes two kinds of gametes. |
| Temperature dependent sex determination | Sex decided by the incubation temperature of the egg rather than by genotype, as in many turtles and all crocodilians. |
| SRY | The Y chromosome gene encoding an HMG box transcription factor that starts testis development in mammals. |
| X:A ratio | The ratio of X chromosomes to sets of autosomes, which determines sex in Drosophila. |
| Pseudoautosomal region | A region at the tips of the X and Y that is shared by both, pairs and crosses over in male meiosis, and is inherited like an autosome. |
| Hemizygous | Having only one copy of a gene, as males do for most X linked genes. |
| Y linked (holandric) | Describes a gene on the male specific part of the Y, passed from father to every son. |
| Crisscross inheritance | The pattern in which sons show the mother's phenotype and daughters the father's, typical of X linked recessive genes. |
| Nondisjunction | Failure of homologous chromosomes or sister chromatids to separate during cell division, producing gametes with an extra or missing chromosome. |
| Dosage compensation | Any mechanism that equalizes the expression of X linked genes between the sexes. |
| Barr body | The condensed, inactive X chromosome seen at the edge of the nucleus in cells of female mammals. |
| Lyon hypothesis | The proposal that one X in each female somatic cell is inactivated early, at random and permanently for that cell lineage. |
| XIST | A long noncoding RNA made by the future inactive X that coats that chromosome and recruits silencing proteins. |
| Manifesting heterozygote | A female carrier of an X linked recessive allele who shows symptoms, often because of skewed X inactivation. |
| Sex influenced trait | An autosomal trait whose heterozygote phenotype differs between the sexes, as with horns in some sheep breeds. |
| Sex limited trait | An autosomal trait expressed in only one sex, such as milk production or cock feathering. |
| Maternal inheritance | Inheritance of organelle genes through the egg cytoplasm, so traits pass from mother to all offspring. |
| Heteroplasmy | The presence of more than one type of mitochondrial or chloroplast genome in the same cell or individual. |
| Maternal effect | Determination of an offspring's phenotype by the mother's nuclear genotype through products she places in the egg. |
| Genomic imprinting | Parent of origin specific silencing of a gene, set by DNA methylation in the germ line. |
| Uniparental disomy | Inheritance of both copies of a chromosome, or part of one, from a single parent. |
Check yourself
Linkage and Genetic Mapping
Mendel's second law says that genes assort independently, but a human cell has about 20,000 genes and only 23 pairs of chromosomes, so most genes must share a chromosome with hundreds of others. Genes that travel together break Mendel's ratios in a way that turns out to be enormously useful: how often they are separated tells us how far apart they are. This chapter shows how to turn counts of offspring into maps of chromosomes, from fruit flies to the human disease genes found by following families.
By the end of this chapter you can
- Explain linkage and distinguish genes in coupling (cis) from genes in repulsion (trans).
- Describe how crossing over between nonsister chromatids at the four strand stage produces recombinant gametes, and why recombination frequency cannot exceed 50 percent.
- Calculate recombination frequency from testcross data and convert it to map units (centimorgans).
- Use a chi square test to decide whether two genes assort independently.
- Analyze a three point testcross to determine gene order and the distances between genes.
- Calculate the coefficient of coincidence and interference, and convert recombination frequencies to map distances with the Haldane and Kosambi mapping functions.
- Calculate and interpret a LOD score for linkage in human pedigrees.
- Compare molecular markers (RFLPs, microsatellites and SNPs) and explain how they made human gene mapping possible.
Section 1Linkage and crossing over
Independent assortment works because nonhomologous chromosomes line up independently at metaphase I. Two genes on different chromosomes therefore sort independently. Two genes on the same chromosome are physically connected, and unless something breaks that connection, the alleles that entered meiosis together on one chromosome will leave together in the same gamete. Genes that tend to be inherited together because they lie near each other on a chromosome are linked, and a group of genes that are all linked to one another is a linkage group. In a well mapped species the number of linkage groups equals the haploid chromosome number: four in Drosophila melanogaster, ten in maize, and 23 in humans (counting the X; 24 if the Y is counted separately).
The first hints
The earliest sign of linkage came in 1905, when William Bateson, Edith Saunders and Reginald Punnett crossed sweet peas differing in flower color (purple, dominant, versus red) and pollen shape (long, dominant, versus round). The F2 did not give 9:3:3:1. Instead, the two parental combinations, purple long and red round, were much more common than expected, and the new combinations, purple round and red long, were rarer. Bateson and Punnett called this "coupling," but they had no chromosomal explanation. In 1911 Thomas Hunt Morgan, studying X linked genes in Drosophila such as white eyes and miniature wings, saw the same excess of parental combinations and proposed the explanation we still use: the genes lie on the same chromosome, and the new combinations arise when homologous chromosomes exchange segments during meiosis. He called the exchange crossing over, and he suggested that the farther apart two genes are, the more often a crossover will fall between them.
Parental and recombinant gametes
Consider an individual heterozygous for two linked genes, with A and B on one homolog and a and b on the other. Its gametes fall into two classes:
- Parental (nonrecombinant) gametes carry the same allele combinations that the individual received from its parents: AB and ab.
- Recombinant gametes carry new combinations: Ab and aB.
The arrangement of alleles on the two homologs is called the linkage phase. When the two dominant alleles are on one chromosome and the two recessive alleles on the other (AB/ab), the genes are in coupling, also called the cis configuration. When each chromosome carries one dominant and one recessive allele (Ab/aB), the genes are in repulsion, or the trans configuration. The phase determines which gametes are parental. For a repulsion heterozygote, Ab and aB are the parental gametes and AB and ab are the recombinants. Students often forget this, so always identify the phase before labeling classes.
The slash notation is worth learning. Writing AB/ab means one homolog carries A and B and the other carries a and b. Writing the genotype as AaBb tells you only that the individual is a double heterozygote and says nothing about phase.
Crossing over happens at the four strand stage
Crossing over takes place in prophase I of meiosis, after DNA replication, when homologous chromosomes are tightly paired by the synaptonemal complex. The process begins when the protein Spo11 makes deliberate double strand breaks in the DNA; some of these breaks are repaired using a nonsister chromatid as a template and resolved as crossovers, which reciprocally exchange the chromosome arms beyond the break. When the homologs begin to separate in diplotene, the crossover sites remain visible as chiasmata, X shaped connections that hold the homologs together until anaphase I. Each pair of homologs normally forms at least one crossover, the obligate crossover, which is necessary for the pair to orient and segregate properly. Failure of crossing over raises the risk of nondisjunction.
Three facts follow from the timing. First, crossing over involves two of the four chromatids at any one site, so one crossover between two genes yields two recombinant and two parental chromatids. Second, for that reason the frequency of recombinant gametes is half the frequency of meioses in which a crossover occurs in the interval. Third, because a crossover can also involve different pairs of chromatids at different sites, double crossovers can restore the parental combination of outside markers, a point we will return to in Section 3.
Proof that crossing over is physical exchange
In 1931 Harriet Creighton and Barbara McClintock in maize, and independently Curt Stern in Drosophila, showed that genetic recombination is accompanied by physical exchange of chromosome parts. Creighton and McClintock used a maize chromosome 9 that carried two visible landmarks, a dark knob at one end and an extra piece of another chromosome at the other, along with alleles for kernel color and starch type. Plants that were recombinant for the alleles had also exchanged the landmarks, exactly as the crossing over model predicts. Genetic maps were from then on understood as maps of real physical objects.
Complete and incomplete linkage
If two genes are so close together that a crossover essentially never occurs between them, or if the species does not cross over in one sex, linkage is complete and only parental gametes are made. Drosophila males have no meiotic crossing over at all, and neither do females of the silkworm moth. More often linkage is incomplete: parental gametes are in the majority but some recombinants appear. The best way to see the difference is a testcross to a homozygous recessive, in which each offspring's phenotype directly reveals the gamete it received from the heterozygous parent.
| Situation (testcross of AaBb to aabb) | Gametes from the heterozygote | Testcross phenotype ratio |
|---|---|---|
| Genes on different chromosomes (independent assortment) | AB, Ab, aB, ab each 25 percent | 1 : 1 : 1 : 1 |
| Same chromosome, complete linkage, coupling (AB/ab) | AB and ab, 50 percent each | 1 : 1, parental types only |
| Same chromosome, incomplete linkage, coupling | AB and ab more than 25 percent each; Ab and aB fewer | Two large parental classes, two small recombinant classes |
| Same chromosome, incomplete linkage, repulsion (Ab/aB) | Ab and aB more than 25 percent each; AB and ab fewer | The large classes are Ab and aB |
| Same chromosome but far apart (50 cM or more) | All four near 25 percent | About 1 : 1 : 1 : 1; looks unlinked |
Linked genes travel together because they share a chromosome. Crossing over between nonsister chromatids in prophase I, visible as chiasmata, exchanges chromosome segments and creates recombinant gametes. Because one crossover affects only two of the four chromatids, recombinants make up at most half of the products. Always determine the linkage phase, coupling or repulsion, before deciding which offspring are parental and which are recombinant.
Section 2Recombination frequency and map units
In 1911 Alfred Sturtevant, then an undergraduate in Morgan's laboratory, realized that the frequency of recombination between linked genes could serve as a measure of the distance between them. That night, as he later recalled, he neglected his homework and produced the first genetic map, ordering five X linked genes in Drosophila. The idea rests on a simple assumption: crossovers occur more or less at random along a chromosome, so the chance that one falls between two genes is proportional to the distance separating them.
Calculating recombination frequency
The recombination frequency (RF) between two genes is the proportion of gametes, or of testcross progeny, that are recombinant:
RF = number of recombinant offspring ÷ total number of offspring
One percent recombination defines one map unit (m.u.), also called a centimorgan (cM) in honor of Morgan. So genes with 8 percent recombination are 8 map units apart. One hundred centimorgans make one Morgan, a unit used mainly in mapping functions.
Why recombination frequency cannot exceed 50 percent
As two genes get farther apart, more than one crossover can occur between them. Each crossover switches which homolog the chromatid is copying, so an odd number of crossovers on a chromatid between two genes gives a recombinant, and an even number (two, four and so on) restores the parental combination. When genes are very far apart, crossovers are so frequent that the chance of an odd number approaches the chance of an even number, and recombinants approach, but never exceed, 50 percent. That is exactly the value for genes on different chromosomes. So:
- An RF near 50 percent means the genes are either on different chromosomes or far apart on the same chromosome. Such genes are syntenic (on the same chromosome) but genetically unlinked.
- RF underestimates distance once double crossovers become common, roughly above 10 to 15 map units, because double crossovers between two markers are counted as parentals.
- Map distances are therefore best measured over short intervals and added up. Added in this way, a chromosome's total map length can be much longer than 50 cM. The Drosophila X chromosome is about 66 cM long, and a large human chromosome such as chromosome 1 is more than 250 cM long.
Testing for linkage with chi square
Data from real crosses never match expectations exactly, so we need a way to decide whether a deviation from 1:1:1:1 in a testcross is due to chance or to linkage. The chi square test compares observed numbers (O) with the numbers expected (E) under a null hypothesis; for linkage questions the null hypothesis is that the genes assort independently. The statistic is
χ2 = Σ (O − E)2 / E
summed over all classes. The degrees of freedom are the number of classes minus one. The calculated value is compared with a critical value from a chi square table at the chosen significance level, usually P = 0.05. If the calculated value is larger than the critical value, the deviation is too large to blame on chance and the null hypothesis is rejected.
| Degrees of freedom | Critical χ2 at P = 0.05 | Critical χ2 at P = 0.01 |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | 3.841 | 6.635 |
| 2 | 5.991 | 9.210 |
| 3 | 7.815 | 11.345 |
| 4 | 9.488 | 13.277 |
Genetic distance versus physical distance
Map units measure crossover frequency, not DNA length, and the two do not convert at a fixed rate. Averaged over the human genome, about 1 cM corresponds to roughly 1 million base pairs (1 Mb), but in baker's yeast, which has a tiny genome and very high crossover rates, 1 cM is only about 3,000 base pairs. Even within one genome, the relationship varies widely:
- Hotspots and coldspots. In humans and mice, most crossovers cluster in short hotspots one or two thousand base pairs long, many of them marked by binding sites for the protein PRDM9, which places histone marks that attract Spo11. Regions near centromeres and in heterochromatin have very little crossing over, so genes there look closer on the genetic map than they really are.
- Sex differences. The human female map is roughly 1.6 times longer than the male map, meaning women make more crossovers per meiosis. In Drosophila the difference is absolute: males make none.
- Structural changes. In an individual heterozygous for an inversion, crossovers within the inverted region produce unbalanced gametes that are not recovered, so recombination appears suppressed (Chapter 6).
Despite these quirks, the order of genes on a genetic map matches their physical order on the chromosome. Only the spacing differs.
Recombination frequency, the fraction of offspring that are recombinant, measures distance: 1 percent recombination equals 1 map unit or centimorgan. It cannot exceed 50 percent, and it underestimates large distances because double crossovers go unseen, so maps are built by adding short intervals. A chi square test against the 1:1:1:1 expectation tells whether a departure from independent assortment is real. Genetic distance tracks gene order faithfully but its relation to base pairs varies with hotspots, sex and region.
Section 3Three point crosses and gene order
Mapping genes two at a time works, but it is slow and it leaves the order of genes uncertain when distances are similar. If A and B are 10 map units apart and B and C are 4 apart, C could lie between A and B or outside them. A three point testcross solves both problems at once. A female (or other individual) heterozygous for three linked genes is crossed to a tester that is homozygous recessive for all three. Every offspring then reveals, gene by gene, which alleles were on the chromatid it received, and a single cross gives the order of the genes, the two distances and a direct count of double crossovers.
The eight classes
A trihybrid makes 23 = 8 kinds of gametes, so a three point testcross gives eight phenotypic classes. They pair up into four reciprocal pairs, and the pairs come in characteristic sizes:
- Parental (noncrossover) classes: the two largest classes, carrying the allele combinations of the two chromosomes in the heterozygote.
- Single crossover classes in region I: a pair produced by a crossover between the first and middle genes.
- Single crossover classes in region II: a pair produced by a crossover between the middle and last genes.
- Double crossover (DCO) classes: the two smallest classes, produced by one crossover in each region. Since the probability of two independent events is the product of their probabilities, double crossovers are rarer than either kind of single crossover.
Each reciprocal pair should contain roughly equal numbers, because each crossover produces both reciprocal products. If the numbers in a pair are wildly different, suspect reduced viability of one phenotype.
Finding the middle gene
The key insight of three point mapping is that a double crossover swaps only the middle gene relative to the two outside genes. Compare a parental class with a double crossover class that shares the same alleles at two genes: the one gene that differs is the gene in the middle. Once the middle gene is known, rewrite every class in the correct order, and the single crossover classes sort themselves into region I and region II.
Calculating the distances
The distance between two adjacent genes is the frequency of all offspring recombinant in that interval. Double crossovers are recombinant in both intervals, so they must be added to each:
- Distance in region I = (single crossovers in region I + double crossovers) ÷ total
- Distance in region II = (single crossovers in region II + double crossovers) ÷ total
The distance between the two outside genes is the sum of the two intervals. If you instead calculate it directly by counting only offspring recombinant for the two outside genes, you miss the double crossovers, which look parental for those genes. The direct value is smaller than the sum by exactly twice the DCO frequency, the numerical proof that two point mapping over long distances underestimates the truth.
| Phenotype of progeny (alleles from trihybrid) | Number | Class |
|---|---|---|
| + + c | 405 | Parental |
| a b + | 401 | Parental |
| + b + | 58 | Single crossover, region I (a to c) |
| a + c | 56 | Single crossover, region I (a to c) |
| + b c | 38 | Single crossover, region II (c to b) |
| a + + | 36 | Single crossover, region II (c to b) |
| + + + | 3 | Double crossover |
| a b c | 3 | Double crossover |
| Total | 1,000 |
A systematic routine
- Pair up the eight classes as reciprocals and add each pair.
- Call the largest pair parental and the smallest pair double crossovers.
- Find the middle gene by comparing the parentals with the DCOs.
- Rewrite all classes in the correct gene order.
- Assign the remaining two pairs to region I or region II.
- Compute each interval, remembering to add the DCOs to both.
- Check that the outer distance equals the sum of the intervals, then compute interference (Section 4).
A three point testcross gives eight classes: two large parental classes, two pairs of single crossovers and two rare double crossovers. The gene that differs between the parental and the matching double crossover class is the middle gene. Each interval distance counts its single crossovers plus the double crossovers, and the outside distance is the sum of the two intervals, which is always larger than a direct two point estimate.
Section 4Interference, coefficient of coincidence and mapping functions
Expected versus observed double crossovers
If crossovers in two adjacent regions occurred independently, the probability of a double crossover would equal the product of the two single interval recombination frequencies. In the three point example, that expectation is 0.12 × 0.08 = 0.0096, or 9.6 double crossovers per 1,000 offspring. Only 6 were observed. Fewer double crossovers than expected is the usual finding, and it means that one crossover reduces the chance of another nearby. This phenomenon is called crossover interference (or chiasma interference).
Interference is measured in two related ways:
- The coefficient of coincidence (c.o.c.) is the ratio of observed to expected double crossovers: c.o.c. = observed DCO ÷ expected DCO.
- Interference (I) is its complement: I = 1 − c.o.c.
| Value of c.o.c. | Interference I | Meaning |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | 1 | Complete interference: no double crossovers at all in the interval |
| Between 0 and 1 | Between 0 and 1 | Positive interference: fewer DCOs than expected; the common case |
| 1 | 0 | No interference: crossovers occur independently |
| Greater than 1 | Negative | Negative interference: more DCOs than expected; seen in some fungi, bacteriophages and very short intervals |
Interference is strongest over short distances and fades as intervals get longer. In Drosophila and in humans, two crossovers almost never occur within about 10 cM of each other on the same chromatid pair. The mechanism is still being worked out, but the leading models propose that the formation of one crossover sends a signal, possibly mechanical stress relieved along the chromosome axis, that inhibits others nearby. Most organisms have two classes of crossovers: an interfering class, which accounts for the majority, and a smaller noninterfering class made by a different resolution pathway. Interference also helps ensure that each chromosome pair gets its obligate crossover without wasting crossovers close together.
Mapping functions
Because double crossovers hide, recombination frequency is a biased estimate of true map distance, especially above 10 to 15 cM. A mapping function is a formula that converts an observed recombination frequency (r) into an estimated map distance (d) by correcting for undetected multiple crossovers.
Haldane's mapping function assumes no interference: crossovers fall at random, so the number per chromatid in an interval follows a Poisson distribution. If d is the map distance in Morgans, the mean number of crossovers per meiosis in the interval is 2d (each crossover involves only two of the four chromatids). The probability of no crossover is e−2d, and every meiosis with at least one crossover produces 50 percent recombinant chromatids on average. Therefore
r = ½(1 − e−2d), and rearranged, d = −½ ln(1 − 2r)
As d becomes large, e−2d approaches zero and r approaches 1/2, which is why recombination frequency levels off at 50 percent.
Kosambi's mapping function allows for interference that is strong over short distances and weakens with distance, which fits most real data better:
d = ¼ ln[(1 + 2r) ÷ (1 − 2r)]
For small values of r, both functions give almost exactly d = r; they diverge as r grows. Human linkage maps are usually reported in Kosambi or Haldane centimorgans, and the choice should always be stated.
Expected double crossovers equal the product of the two interval frequencies times the number of offspring. The coefficient of coincidence (observed ÷ expected) is usually less than 1, and interference (1 − c.o.c.) is positive because one crossover inhibits others nearby. Mapping functions correct recombination frequencies for unseen multiple crossovers: Haldane's assumes no interference, d = −½ ln(1 − 2r), while Kosambi's allows for it.
Section 5Mapping in humans: LOD scores and molecular markers
Humans cannot be testcrossed, families are small, and for most of the twentieth century there were few genes whose alleles could be followed through a family. Human gene mapping became practical when two things came together: a statistical method for combining evidence from many small families, and DNA molecular markers, harmless sequence differences scattered by the hundreds of thousands across the genome.
Informative meioses and phase
Linkage can be measured only in meioses from a parent who is heterozygous at both loci: the disease gene and the marker. Such a meiosis is informative. To count recombinants we also need to know the phase, which marker allele sits on the same chromosome as the disease allele. In a phase known family, the grandparents' genotypes reveal the phase. In a phase unknown family, both phases must be considered, which weakens the evidence from each child.
The LOD score
In 1955 Newton Morton introduced the LOD score (logarithm of the odds) to weigh the evidence for linkage. For a chosen recombination fraction θ (theta, the human geneticist's symbol for RF), the LOD score compares the probability of the observed family data if the loci are linked at θ with the probability if they are unlinked (θ = 0.5):
LOD(θ) = log10 [ L(θ) ÷ L(0.5) ]
For phase known meioses with R recombinants and NR nonrecombinants, L(θ) = θR(1 − θ)NR and L(0.5) = 0.5R + NR. LOD scores are calculated for a series of θ values, and the value of θ that gives the highest LOD is the best estimate of the recombination fraction. Because logarithms of independent likelihoods add, LOD scores from different families can simply be summed at each θ, which is the method's great strength.
The conventional thresholds are:
- LOD of 3 or more (odds of 1,000 to 1 in favor of linkage) is accepted as evidence of linkage. The bar is high because any two loci picked at random are unlikely to be linked; with that low prior probability, a LOD of 3 corresponds to roughly a 5 percent chance that the linkage is false.
- LOD of −2 or less (odds of 100 to 1 against) excludes linkage at that θ.
- Values between −2 and 3 are inconclusive; more families are needed.
For phase unknown families, the likelihood is averaged over the two possible phases, each with probability 1/2. For example, for a father whose phase is unknown and whose children show R of one kind and NR of the other, L(θ) = ½[θR(1 − θ)NR + θNR(1 − θ)R]. In practice, computer programs calculate LOD scores for complex pedigrees, taking account of penetrance, missing individuals and marker allele frequencies.
Molecular markers
A good marker is polymorphic (many people are heterozygous, so meioses are informative), common across the genome, easy to type and inherited codominantly, so both alleles are visible. Several generations of markers have been used:
| Marker | What varies | How it is detected | Strengths and limits |
|---|---|---|---|
| RFLP (restriction fragment length polymorphism) | A base change that creates or destroys a restriction enzyme site | Digestion and Southern blot, later PCR plus digestion | First DNA markers (1980); usually only two alleles, so often uninformative |
| VNTR (minisatellite) | Number of tandem copies of a repeat unit of about 10 to 60 base pairs | Southern blot or PCR | Highly polymorphic; used in early DNA fingerprinting; unevenly spread |
| Microsatellite (STR) | Number of copies of a 1 to 6 base pair repeat, such as (CA)n | PCR and fragment sizing by electrophoresis | Many alleles, very informative, found every few tens of kilobases; the workhorse of 1990s linkage maps and forensic identification |
| SNP (single nucleotide polymorphism) | One base pair difference | DNA microarrays or sequencing | Usually two alleles each, but millions exist, about 1 per 1,000 base pairs between two genomes; typed by the hundreds of thousands at once |
Markers transformed medical genetics through positional cloning: find a marker linked to the disease, narrow the interval with more markers and more families, then search the interval for the gene. Huntington disease was linked to a marker on chromosome 4 in 1983, using one of the first RFLPs, and the gene itself, HTT, was identified ten years later. Cystic fibrosis was mapped to chromosome 7 and its gene, CFTR, cloned in 1989. Today whole genome sequencing often finds rare disease genes directly, but linkage still narrows the search.
Linkage disequilibrium and association studies
Linkage analysis in families follows a handful of meioses. Population studies take advantage of thousands of past meioses. When a new mutation arises, it sits on a particular chromosome with a particular set of nearby marker alleles, a haplotype. Over many generations, recombination breaks the association with distant markers, but very close markers can remain associated for thousands of years. This nonrandom association of alleles at nearby loci is called linkage disequilibrium. Genome wide association studies (GWAS) type hundreds of thousands of SNPs in thousands of cases and controls and look for SNPs whose allele frequencies differ; because of linkage disequilibrium, a SNP that is not itself causal can flag a nearby causal variant. GWAS has found thousands of common variants with small effects on traits such as height, type 2 diabetes and coronary disease, complementing family linkage studies, which are best at finding rare variants of large effect.
Human linkage is measured in pedigrees by counting recombinants in informative meioses and summarizing the evidence as a LOD score, the log10 of the odds of linkage at θ versus no linkage. Scores from families add; 3 or more establishes linkage and −2 or less excludes it. Polymorphic DNA markers, from RFLPs to microsatellites to SNPs, made mapping human disease genes routine, and linkage disequilibrium extends the method to whole populations in association studies.
The chapter in one breath
- Genes on the same chromosome are linked and tend to be inherited together; the number of linkage groups equals the haploid chromosome number.
- The linkage phase, coupling (AB/ab) or repulsion (Ab/aB), decides which gametes are parental and which are recombinant.
- Crossing over between nonsister chromatids in prophase I, seen as chiasmata, creates recombinants; one crossover affects two of four chromatids.
- Recombination frequency = recombinants ÷ total; 1 percent equals 1 map unit or centimorgan, and RF never exceeds 50 percent.
- A chi square test against 1:1:1:1 (3 degrees of freedom, critical value 7.815) tests for independent assortment.
- In a three point testcross, the parental classes are largest, the double crossovers smallest, and the gene that differs between them is in the middle.
- Interval distances include the double crossovers; the outside distance is the sum of the intervals and exceeds any direct two point estimate.
- Coefficient of coincidence = observed ÷ expected DCOs; interference = 1 − c.o.c., usually positive.
- Mapping functions correct for hidden crossovers: Haldane, d = −½ ln(1 − 2r), assumes no interference; Kosambi allows for it.
- Human linkage is assessed with the LOD score; LOD 3 or more supports linkage, −2 or less excludes it, and scores add across families.
- Molecular markers (RFLPs, microsatellites, SNPs) and linkage disequilibrium made positional cloning and genome wide association studies possible.
Words worth knowing
| Term | What it means |
|---|---|
| Linkage | The tendency of genes close together on the same chromosome to be inherited together. |
| Linkage group | A set of genes that are all linked to one another; in a well mapped species, one per chromosome. |
| Coupling (cis) | The arrangement in which the two dominant alleles of a double heterozygote are on one homolog and the two recessives on the other (AB/ab). |
| Repulsion (trans) | The arrangement in which each homolog carries one dominant and one recessive allele (Ab/aB). |
| Parental gamete | A gamete carrying the same combination of linked alleles that the individual inherited from one parent. |
| Recombinant gamete | A gamete carrying a new combination of alleles produced by crossing over or independent assortment. |
| Crossing over | Reciprocal exchange of segments between nonsister chromatids of homologous chromosomes during prophase I. |
| Chiasma | The visible X shaped connection between homologs at the site of a crossover (plural chiasmata). |
| Synaptonemal complex | The protein structure that holds homologous chromosomes closely paired during prophase I. |
| Recombination frequency | The proportion of progeny or gametes that are recombinant for two genes; symbol RF or θ. |
| Map unit (centimorgan) | The genetic distance giving 1 percent recombination between two genes. |
| Syntenic | Located on the same chromosome, whether or not the genes show measurable linkage. |
| Testcross | A cross to a homozygous recessive individual, so that progeny phenotypes reveal the gametes of the other parent. |
| Chi square test | A statistical test that compares observed with expected numbers to judge whether a deviation is due to chance. |
| Three point testcross | A testcross of an individual heterozygous for three linked genes, used to find gene order and two distances at once. |
| Double crossover | Two crossovers in adjacent intervals on the same chromatid pair, which swap the middle gene relative to the outside genes. |
| Coefficient of coincidence | The ratio of observed to expected double crossovers. |
| Interference | The reduction in the chance of a second crossover near a first one; equal to 1 minus the coefficient of coincidence. |
| Mapping function | A formula that converts recombination frequency to map distance by correcting for undetected multiple crossovers. |
| Informative meiosis | A meiosis in a parent heterozygous at both loci, in which recombinants can be recognized. |
| LOD score | The base 10 logarithm of the odds that two loci are linked at a given recombination fraction rather than unlinked. |
| Microsatellite | A short tandem repeat of a 1 to 6 base pair unit whose copy number varies, making a highly polymorphic marker. |
| Single nucleotide polymorphism | A position in the genome where people differ by a single base; the most common type of marker. |
| Positional cloning | Finding a gene by first mapping it near linked markers and then searching that region of DNA. |
| Linkage disequilibrium | The nonrandom association of alleles at nearby loci in a population. |
Check yourself
Bacterial and Viral Genetics
Bacteria and viruses have no meiosis, yet they exchange genes constantly, and that exchange is why antibiotic resistance spreads through a hospital in months and why a new influenza strain can appear almost overnight. The same tiny genomes gave geneticists their sharpest tools: billions of offspring in a single tube, selection for one rare recombinant among millions, and maps fine enough to resolve neighboring base pairs. This chapter shows how bacteria and phages move DNA, how each route of transfer becomes a mapping method, and how viral genomes, including retroviruses, are built and copied.
By the end of this chapter you can
- Describe the organization of a bacterial nucleoid and the main classes of plasmids, and write bacterial genotypes and phenotypes in standard notation.
- Explain how auxotrophs, resistance mutants and conditional mutants are isolated by replica plating, and how the fluctuation test showed that mutations arise before selection.
- Distinguish F−, F+, Hfr and F′ cells and predict the outcome of each mating.
- Build a circular gene map from interrupted mating data collected with several Hfr strains.
- Compare transformation, generalized transduction and specialized transduction, and use cotransformation and cotransduction frequencies to order genes and estimate distances.
- Contrast the lytic and lysogenic cycles and calculate recombination frequencies from phage crosses scored by plaque type.
- Explain Benzer's rII analysis, separating the complementation test from the recombination test, and order mutations by deletion mapping.
- Classify viruses by genome type with the Baltimore scheme and trace the retrovirus life cycle from reverse transcription to integration.
Section 1Bacterial genomes, plasmids and mutants
Why bacteria are such powerful genetic organisms
A culture of Escherichia coli in rich medium doubles about every 20 minutes, so a single cell becomes more than a billion cells overnight. Bacteria are haploid, which means every mutation shows its phenotype at once, with no dominant allele hiding a recessive one. And because you can spread a hundred million cells on one Petri plate and allow only a rare type to grow, you can find events that happen once in a million or once in a billion cells.
The bacterial chromosome
Most bacteria carry a single, circular, double stranded DNA chromosome. The E. coli K-12 chromosome is about 4.6 million base pairs (4.6 Mb) and encodes roughly 4,300 genes. It is compacted into an irregular region called the nucleoid. There is no nuclear membrane. Compaction comes from negative supercoiling, introduced by DNA gyrase (a type II topoisomerase), and from nucleoid associated proteins such as HU, H-NS and IHF that bend and bridge DNA.
Bacterial genomes are gene dense: about 88 percent of the E. coli chromosome codes for protein, introns are essentially absent, and functionally related genes are often clustered into operons that are transcribed as one messenger RNA. Replication begins at a single origin, oriC, and proceeds in both directions until the two forks meet in the terminus region opposite the origin.
Plasmids
Plasmids are small DNA molecules, usually circular and double stranded, that replicate independently of the chromosome. Each has its own origin of replication, which also sets its copy number: some plasmids are kept at one or two copies per cell under tight control, while others reach dozens or hundreds. Plasmids are generally not essential for growth under ordinary conditions, but the genes they carry can be decisive when conditions change. An episome is a plasmid that can either replicate on its own or integrate into the chromosome; the F factor is the classic example.
| Plasmid class | What it carries | Why it matters |
|---|---|---|
| F (fertility) factor | About 100 kb; tra genes for the sex pilus and DNA transfer, an origin of transfer (oriT) | Makes a cell a donor in conjugation; can integrate to form an Hfr strain |
| R (resistance) plasmids | One or more antibiotic resistance genes, often on transposons, plus transfer genes | Spread multidrug resistance between cells and even between species |
| Col plasmids | Genes for colicins (proteins that kill related strains) and immunity to them | Competition among bacteria |
| Virulence plasmids | Toxins, adhesins, secretion systems | Turn a harmless strain into a pathogen (for example, enterotoxigenic E. coli) |
Notation for genotypes and phenotypes
Bacterial geneticists use a compact notation. Genotypes are written as three lowercase italic letters followed by an uppercase letter for the specific gene: leuA, lacZ, trpE. A superscript plus means the wild type allele (leu+, able to make leucine) and a superscript minus means a mutant allele (leu−, unable to make leucine). strr means streptomycin resistant. Phenotypes are written in roman type with the first letter capitalized: Leu+, Lac−, Strr.
Kinds of bacterial mutants
A prototroph is a wild type strain that grows on minimal medium: water, salts, a carbon source such as glucose and nothing else. From those raw materials it builds every amino acid, nucleotide and vitamin it needs. An auxotroph has lost the ability to make one or more of these and grows only if the missing nutrient is supplied. A his− auxotroph, for example, grows on minimal medium plus histidine but not on minimal medium alone. Complete medium contains everything, so both prototrophs and auxotrophs grow on it.
- Nutritional (auxotrophic) mutants cannot synthesize a nutrient.
- Carbon source mutants cannot use a particular sugar; a Lac− mutant cannot grow when lactose is the only carbon source.
- Resistance mutants survive an antibiotic or a phage that kills the wild type.
- Conditional mutants show the mutant phenotype only under restrictive conditions. A temperature sensitive mutant makes a protein that works at 30 °C (permissive) but unfolds at 42 °C (restrictive). They let geneticists study essential genes.
Finding mutants: selection, screening and replica plating
Resistance mutants are easy to find by direct selection: spread 108 cells on a plate containing the antibiotic, and only resistant cells form colonies. Auxotrophs are harder, because the mutant grows on fewer media than the wild type, not more. Joshua and Esther Lederberg solved this in 1952 with replica plating. Cells are spread on a complete medium master plate, giving a few hundred colonies. A sterile velvet pad pressed onto the master picks up cells from every colony and can then print that exact pattern onto a series of fresh plates. Any colony present on the master and on complete medium but absent from minimal medium is an auxotroph, and its position tells you where to pick it from the master. Printing onto minimal medium supplemented with single nutrients then identifies exactly which nutrient it needs.
Do mutations arise before or after selection? The fluctuation test
In the early 1940s it was an open question whether phage T1 caused resistance in the few cells that survived it, or whether resistant mutants arose spontaneously and the phage merely revealed them. Salvador Luria and Max Delbrück answered with the fluctuation test (1943). They grew many small, independent cultures from a few cells each, then plated each entire culture with phage.
The logic is simple. If the phage induced resistance at the moment of plating, every culture would have about the same small chance per cell, and the counts would vary little from culture to culture, like samples from one flask. If mutations arose at random during growth, a mutation early in the history of one culture would leave a huge resistant clone (a "jackpot"), while most cultures would have few or none. The independent cultures showed enormous fluctuation, with many zeros and a few jackpots, while the samples from the single flask were uniform. Mutations are spontaneous and random; selection only reveals them.
Bacteria are haploid, fast and countable, with one circular chromosome in a nucleoid plus optional plasmids that carry fertility, resistance, toxin or degradative genes. Auxotrophs, resistance and conditional mutants are found by selection and by replica plating, and the fluctuation test proved that mutations arise at random before selection rather than in response to it.
Section 2Conjugation and mapping by interrupted mating
The discovery of gene exchange
In 1946 Joshua Lederberg and Edward Tatum mixed two E. coli auxotrophs. One strain was met− bio− thr+ leu+; the other was met+ bio+ thr− leu−. Neither grew on minimal medium alone, but the mixture produced prototrophic colonies at about 1 in 107 cells. Double reversion could not explain them. Bernard Davis then placed the two strains on opposite sides of a U-tube separated by a filter that let medium and large molecules through but not cells. No prototrophs formed, showing that exchange required cell to cell contact. This contact dependent transfer is conjugation.
The F factor and the three mating types
Conjugation depends on the F (fertility) factor, a plasmid of about 100 kb. A cell carrying F is F+; a cell lacking it is F−. The tra genes of F encode the sex pilus, which pulls an F− cell close, plus the transfer machinery. Transfer begins when a relaxase nicks one strand at the origin of transfer (oriT). That single strand, 5′ end first, threads into the recipient while the donor replaces it by rolling circle replication; the recipient synthesizes the complementary strand. The result of an F+ × F− mating is two F+ cells. F spreads rapidly, yet F+ cells rarely transfer chromosomal genes.
About once in 104 to 105 F+ cells, the F factor integrates into the chromosome by recombination between short homologous sequences (often insertion sequences) on F and on the chromosome. The result is an Hfr (high frequency of recombination) cell. When an Hfr cell conjugates, transfer still starts at oriT, but now the strand that follows is chromosomal DNA. Genes beside the integration site enter first, then genes farther away, in a fixed order and direction set by where and in which orientation F inserted. Transferring the entire 4.6 Mb chromosome takes about 100 minutes at 37 °C, and the mating pair almost always breaks apart before that. The part of F that lies behind oriT is transferred last, so the recipient of an Hfr mating nearly always remains F−.
Occasionally F excises from the Hfr chromosome imprecisely and carries a piece of neighboring chromosome with it. This plasmid is an F′ (F prime) factor. An F′ transfers efficiently like F, and the recipient becomes a partial diploid, or merozygote, carrying two copies of the captured genes.
| Donor | State of F | What is transferred | Recipient afterward | Frequency of chromosomal recombinants |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| F+ | Free plasmid | The F plasmid only | Becomes F+ | Very low (about 10−7, from rare Hfr cells in the culture) |
| Hfr | Integrated in the chromosome | Chromosomal genes in fixed order from oriT; rarely all of F | Usually stays F− | High for early genes, falling for later genes |
| F′ | Free plasmid carrying some chromosomal genes | F plus the captured genes | Becomes F′, a partial diploid | Captured genes transferred at high frequency |
Recombination in the recipient
The donor fragment that enters the recipient is linear and cannot replicate on its own. To be inherited, its genes must be recombined into the recipient's circular chromosome, and that requires an even number of crossovers, at least two, one on each side of the gene. A single crossover would open the circle into a linear molecule that cannot survive. The donor genes that do not recombine in are degraded. The recipient therefore needs a functional RecA protein.
Interrupted mating
In the mid 1950s Élie Wollman and François Jacob turned the ordered transfer of Hfr strains into a mapping method. They mixed an Hfr strain sensitive to streptomycin (strs) with an F− recipient that carried several auxotrophic markers and was streptomycin resistant (strr). At intervals they removed samples and broke the mating pairs apart in a kitchen blender, then plated the cells on media containing streptomycin to kill the donors (counterselection) and lacking a particular nutrient to select for recipients that had received a donor allele.
Each donor gene first appeared among recombinants at a characteristic time of entry, and the frequency of recombinants for that gene then rose to a plateau. Genes that entered early reached higher plateaus than genes that entered late, because the longer the transfer runs, the more likely the pair is to break apart spontaneously. This decline is called the gradient of transfer. The time of entry measures position: the E. coli chromosome is mapped in minutes, from 0 to 100, with the thr locus placed at 0. One minute corresponds to roughly 46 kb.
Building a circular map from several Hfr strains
Different Hfr strains have F inserted at different places and in different orientations, so each transfers the chromosome starting from a different point and in one of two directions. No single Hfr can map the whole chromosome, because pairs break apart long before 100 minutes. But the orders from several strains overlap, and when you align them the only arrangement consistent with all of them is a circle.
| Strain | First gene (min) | Second (min) | Third (min) | Fourth (min) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Hfr 1 | a (5) | b (20) | c (27) | d (43) |
| Hfr 2 | h (5) | a (20) | b (35) | c (42) |
| Hfr 3 | e (5) | d (17) | c (33) | b (40) |
| Hfr 4 | g (10) | h (20) | a (35) | b (50) |
| Hfr 5 | f (9) | e (20) | d (32) | c (48) |
Conjugation moves DNA through direct contact, driven by the F factor. F+ cells transfer only F; Hfr cells, with F integrated, transfer chromosomal genes linearly from oriT in a fixed order; F′ plasmids carry a few chromosomal genes and create partial diploids. Interrupted mating converts the order and time of entry into a map in minutes, and overlapping Hfr orders reveal a circular chromosome of 100 minutes.
Section 3Transformation and transduction
Transformation: taking up naked DNA
Transformation is the uptake of free DNA from the surroundings and its incorporation into the recipient's genome. It was the first form of bacterial gene transfer discovered. In 1928 Frederick Griffith found that heat killed virulent (smooth, encapsulated) Streptococcus pneumoniae could convert living harmless (rough) cells into virulent ones inside a mouse. In 1944 Oswald Avery, Colin MacLeod and Maclyn McCarty purified the "transforming principle" and showed that it was destroyed by DNase but not by protease or RNase. That experiment identified DNA as the genetic material.
Some species are naturally competent: they switch on a set of genes, usually in response to crowding or stress, that builds a DNA uptake machine. Streptococcus pneumoniae, Bacillus subtilis and Neisseria gonorrhoeae are classic examples. One strand of bound DNA enters and pairs with the homologous region of the chromosome with the help of RecA, forming a heteroduplex, and mismatch repair or the next round of replication resolves it into one recipient chromosome and one transformed chromosome. Because the entering strand is linear, at least two crossovers are again needed, one on each side of the marker.
E. coli is not naturally competent, so laboratories make it artificially competent, either by chilling cells in calcium chloride and giving a brief heat shock, or by electroporation, a short high voltage pulse that opens transient pores.
Mapping by cotransformation
A transforming fragment is only a small piece of the chromosome, typically a few tens of kilobases. Two genes can be transferred together on one fragment, an event called cotransformation, only if they lie close together. The frequency of cotransformation therefore measures linkage: the closer two genes, the more often they travel together. Two tests are used.
- Compare double transformants with the product of single rates. If genes a and b are far apart, a cell must take up two separate fragments, and the double transformation frequency is roughly the product of the single frequencies. If they are close, double transformants are far more common than that product.
- Order three genes by pairwise cotransformation. The two genes that are cotransformed least often are the outside genes; the third lies between them.
Transduction: phages as couriers
Transduction is gene transfer from one bacterium to another carried inside a phage particle. Zinder and Lederberg discovered it in 1952 with phage P22 in Salmonella: transfer crossed a U-tube filter and resisted DNase. There are two types, and they differ in what the phage packages.
Generalized transduction
In generalized transduction, any part of the host chromosome can be transferred. Phages such as P1 (E. coli) and P22 (Salmonella) degrade the host chromosome into fragments during a lytic infection and package DNA into heads by a headful mechanism: they fill the head with as much DNA as fits. Occasionally, about once in every thousand or so particles, a head is filled with a piece of host DNA instead of phage DNA. Such a transducing particle contains no phage genes. It injects its bacterial DNA into the next cell it infects, and that cell survives because no phage genes enter. If the donor fragment recombines into the recipient chromosome by two crossovers, the result is a stable transductant (complete transduction). A fragment that persists without recombining or replicating gives abortive transduction.
A P1 head holds about 100 kb, roughly 2 percent of the E. coli chromosome, or about 2 minutes of the map. Two genes can be cotransduced only if they lie within that distance, and the closer they are, the more often they are.
Specialized transduction
In specialized transduction, only genes next to a prophage's integration site can be transferred. The classic example is phage lambda (λ), which integrates at a single att site between the gal and bio genes of E. coli. When a lysogen is induced, the prophage normally excises precisely. Rarely (about once in 105 to 106 excisions), the excision cut is in the wrong place, and the circle that loops out contains some host DNA on one side (gal or bio) and lacks a corresponding piece of phage DNA on the other. The resulting particle, written λdgal (defective, carrying gal) or λdbio, can inject the host gene into a new cell. A lysate that contains such particles transduces gal or bio at high frequency, but never transduces genes elsewhere on the chromosome.
Mapping by cotransduction
Cotransduction frequency is used exactly like cotransformation. You select for one donor marker and score how many of the selected transductants also inherited a second, unselected marker. Close genes are cotransduced often; genes more than one transducing fragment apart are never cotransduced. For P1, Wu derived a useful approximation relating cotransduction frequency C to map distance d (in minutes) when the fragment length L is 2 minutes:
C = (1 − d / L)3
Three factor transduction crosses resolve gene order without any distance formula. Select for one marker and score the other two among the transductants. The class that requires four crossovers rather than two will be by far the rarest, and it identifies which gene is in the middle.
| Feature | Conjugation | Transformation | Generalized transduction | Specialized transduction |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Vehicle | Direct contact through a pilus | Free DNA in the medium | Phage head (P1, P22) | Phage (lambda) |
| Blocked by DNase? | No | Yes | No | No |
| Needs cell contact? | Yes | No | No | No |
| Amount transferred | Up to the whole chromosome | Usually tens of kb | About 100 kb (2 min) for P1 | A few genes next to att |
| Which genes | Any, in order from oriT | Any | Any | Only those beside the prophage site |
| Mapping measure | Time of entry (minutes) | Cotransformation frequency | Cotransduction frequency | Not used for mapping |
Transformation moves naked DNA (DNase sensitive) and is mapped by cotransformation. Generalized transduction packages a random host fragment of about 2 map minutes by headful packaging, and cotransduction frequency measures closeness; the rarest class in a three factor cross marks the middle gene. Specialized transduction arises from faulty prophage excision and moves only genes beside the attachment site.
Section 4Bacteriophage genetics and fine structure mapping
Phage life cycles
Bacteriophages (phages) are viruses that infect bacteria. A phage such as T4 has a protein head holding its double stranded DNA genome (about 169 kb) and a tail that attaches to receptors on the cell surface and injects the DNA. In the lytic cycle, the phage takes over the cell: early genes shut down host functions and degrade host DNA, middle and late genes replicate phage DNA and build heads and tails, the DNA is packaged, and a lysozyme-like enzyme bursts the cell. At 37 °C, a T4 infection lasts about 25 minutes and releases a burst of roughly 100 to 200 new phages.
Temperate phages such as lambda can choose. After infection, lambda either enters the lytic cycle or enters the lysogenic cycle, in which its 48.5 kb genome integrates into the host chromosome at att by site specific recombination, catalyzed by phage integrase. The integrated DNA is a prophage, and the host cell, now a lysogen, divides normally and copies the prophage along with its own DNA. The lambda cI repressor keeps the lytic genes silent and also makes the lysogen immune to superinfection by another lambda. When the host DNA is damaged (for example by ultraviolet light), activated RecA stimulates self cleavage of the cI repressor, the prophage excises (integrase plus excisionase), and the lytic cycle begins: this is induction.
Plaques: how phage genetics is scored
Phages are counted by the plaque assay. Phages are mixed with a large excess of bacteria in soft agar and poured over a plate. Bacteria grow into a cloudy lawn, but wherever a single phage infected a cell, successive rounds of infection and lysis clear a small circular zone, a plaque. Each plaque comes from one phage, so plaques measure the titer:
titer (plaque forming units per mL) = number of plaques / (volume plated in mL × dilution)
Phage mutants change plaque appearance or host range. Rapid lysis (r) mutants of T2 and T4 make large, sharp edged plaques, while wild type (r+) makes small, fuzzy plaques. Host range (h) mutants can infect bacterial strains that resist the wild type. Phage crosses use mixed infection: each cell receives both genotypes, which recombine as they replicate.
Benzer and the fine structure of the rII region
In the 1950s, Seymour Benzer asked how finely recombination could divide a gene. He used the rII mutants of phage T4. The trick was a pair of hosts:
- On E. coli B, rII mutants grow well and form large r plaques.
- On E. coli K12(λ), a strain lysogenic for lambda, rII mutants cannot grow at all, while wild type T4 grows normally.
That asymmetry created an extraordinarily sensitive selection. After a cross between two rII mutants, plating on K12(λ) reveals only the rare wild type recombinants, while plating on B counts every progeny phage. Because one plate can hold progeny from a whole lysate, Benzer could detect one wild type recombinant among hundreds of millions of progeny, enough to measure recombination between mutations only one or a few base pairs apart.
Two different tests: complementation and recombination
Benzer used two tests that are easy to confuse, so keep them separate.
The complementation test asks whether two mutations are in the same functional unit. Cells of K12(λ) are coinfected with two rII mutants. If the two mutations are in different genes, each phage supplies the product the other lacks, the infection succeeds and the culture lyses: they complement. If both mutations are in the same gene, neither phage makes a working product and nothing happens. This is a trans test (the mutations are on different DNA molecules). Its control is the cis arrangement (both mutations on one molecule, the other molecule wild type), which always gives wild type function. Benzer called the unit defined by the cis-trans test a cistron, and found that the rII region contains two: rIIA and rIIB.
The recombination test asks whether two mutations are at different sites, and how far apart. Cells of E. coli B (on which all rII mutants grow) are coinfected, the progeny are collected, and the lysate is plated on both hosts. Wild type recombinants are one of two reciprocal products; the other (the double mutant) cannot be seen on K12(λ), so the frequency of wild type is doubled:
RF = 2 × (titer on K12(λ)) / (titer on B)
Mutations at the identical site never give wild type recombinants, and mutations in the same cistron can still recombine if they are at different sites.
| Question | Complementation (cis-trans) test | Recombination test |
|---|---|---|
| What it asks | Are the two mutations in the same gene? | Are the two mutations at different sites, and how far apart? |
| Host for infection | K12(λ), restrictive | B, permissive; progeny then plated on both hosts |
| Positive result | Lysis (growth) means different genes | Wild type plaques on K12(λ) mean different sites |
| Depends on recombination? | No: protein products work together in one cell | Yes: needs a crossover between the two sites |
| Unit defined | Cistron (gene) | Site (as small as one base pair) |
Deletion mapping
Rather than crossing thousands of mutants pairwise, Benzer used deletion mutants, which are recognizable because they never revert. A point mutation crossed with a deletion can give wild type recombinants only if the point mutation lies outside the deleted segment; if the site is missing from the deletion phage, there is no wild type copy of that stretch to recombine in. A panel of overlapping deletions therefore divides the region into segments, and a single spot test against the panel assigns each new mutation to a segment. Fine mapping by recombination is then needed only among the few mutations within that segment.
What the rII work showed
Benzer mapped more than 2,000 rII mutations to about 300 sites. Recombination could separate mutations at neighboring sites, so the gene is not indivisible: the units of mutation and recombination are much smaller than the gene, ultimately single base pairs. He also found mutational hotspots. The map was linear, like DNA.
Phages grow lytically or, if temperate, integrate as prophages under repressor control. Phage genotypes are scored by plaque type, and recombination frequency in a mixed infection equals recombinant plaques over total. Benzer's rII system separated two questions: complementation (same gene or not, the cis-trans test) and recombination (same site or not), and deletion mapping showed that a gene is a linear array of hundreds of separable sites.
Section 5Viral genomes and retroviruses
What a virus is, genetically
A virus is a genome wrapped in a protein coat (the capsid), sometimes surrounded by a lipid envelope taken from the host membrane. Viruses have no ribosomes of their own, but their genomes vary enormously. Viral genomes can be DNA or RNA, single stranded or double stranded, linear or circular, in one piece or split into segments. They range from about 2 kb to more than a megabase.
The Baltimore classification
David Baltimore grouped viruses by the route their genome takes to messenger RNA (mRNA, defined as the plus strand), which predicts which enzymes each virus must carry.
| Class | Genome | Route to mRNA | Examples |
|---|---|---|---|
| I | Double stranded DNA | Transcribed like host genes (usually in the nucleus) | Herpesviruses, adenoviruses, poxviruses, papillomaviruses, phage T4 |
| II | Single stranded DNA | Converted to dsDNA, then transcribed | Parvoviruses, phage ΦX174 |
| III | Double stranded RNA | Viral RNA dependent RNA polymerase copies the minus strand | Rotavirus, reoviruses |
| IV | Single stranded RNA, plus sense | Genome itself serves as mRNA | Poliovirus, rhinoviruses, coronaviruses, hepatitis C, Zika |
| V | Single stranded RNA, minus sense | Packaged viral polymerase copies the genome into mRNA | Influenza, measles, mumps, rabies, Ebola, RSV |
| VI | Single stranded RNA, plus sense, with a DNA intermediate | Reverse transcribed to DNA, integrated, then transcribed | Retroviruses: HIV, HTLV-1, Rous sarcoma virus |
| VII | Partly double stranded DNA, with an RNA intermediate | Transcribed to a pregenomic RNA that is reverse transcribed | Hepatitis B virus |
Note that the naked genome of a plus strand RNA virus is infectious by itself, because host ribosomes can translate it directly, whereas minus strand and double stranded RNA viruses must carry their polymerase inside the virion. RNA dependent RNA polymerases and reverse transcriptases generally lack proofreading, so RNA viruses mutate far faster than DNA organisms, roughly 10−4 to 10−5 errors per nucleotide per replication compared with about 10−9 to 10−10 for cellular DNA replication. Coronaviruses (about 30 kb) are an exception: they encode a proofreading exonuclease.
Viral recombination and reassortment
Viruses exchange genes in two ways. When two related viruses infect the same cell, their polymerases can switch templates, producing recombinant genomes. Viruses with segmented genomes can also swap whole segments, a process called reassortment. Influenza A has eight minus strand RNA segments, including the ones encoding the surface proteins hemagglutinin (HA) and neuraminidase (NA). Point mutations in HA and NA cause antigenic drift (hence yearly vaccines); reassortment between, say, human and avian strains gives a new HA or NA, antigenic shift, the source of pandemics.
The retrovirus genome
Retroviruses reverse the usual flow of genetic information: their RNA genome is copied into DNA, which integrates permanently into the host chromosome. Each virion carries two copies of a plus strand RNA genome of about 7 to 10 kb (HIV-1 is about 9.7 kb), so retroviruses are effectively diploid. Every retrovirus has three core genes:
- gag (group specific antigen): structural proteins of the matrix, capsid and nucleocapsid.
- pol: the enzymes reverse transcriptase, integrase and protease.
- env: the envelope glycoproteins that bind receptors and fuse membranes (gp120 and gp41 in HIV).
HIV also carries regulatory and accessory genes such as tat, rev and nef.
The retroviral life cycle
- Entry. Env binds the receptor (CD4 plus the coreceptor CCR5 or CXCR4 for HIV), the envelope fuses with the cell membrane, and the core enters the cytoplasm.
- Reverse transcription. Reverse transcriptase, an RNA dependent and DNA dependent DNA polymerase with an RNase H domain that degrades the RNA in RNA DNA hybrids, makes a double stranded DNA copy of the genome. It is primed by a host transfer RNA (tRNALys3 for HIV). Two template "jumps" generate identical long terminal repeats (LTRs) at the two ends of the DNA. Switching between the two RNA copies also causes recombination.
- Integration. The viral DNA enters the nucleus, and integrase cuts the host DNA with a staggered cut and joins the viral ends to it. Repair of the gaps creates a short target site duplication (5 bp for HIV) flanking the provirus. The provirus is now a permanent part of that cell's genome and of all its descendants.
- Expression. Host RNA polymerase II transcribes the provirus from a promoter in the 5′ LTR; the 3′ LTR supplies the polyadenylation signal. Spliced transcripts make Env; full length RNA makes Gag and Gag-Pol and serves as new genome.
- Assembly and maturation. Two genome RNAs, Gag and Gag-Pol assemble at the membrane and bud off with an envelope. The viral protease then cleaves the polyproteins into mature proteins, converting the particle into an infectious virion.
Retroviruses, oncogenes and our own genome
Retroviruses gave cancer genetics its first oncogene. Rous sarcoma virus, which causes tumors in chickens, carries v-src, a gene that the virus captured long ago from a normal chicken gene, c-src, a proto-oncogene that encodes a tyrosine kinase. The viral copy is mutated and overexpressed, so it drives uncontrolled growth. Other retroviruses carry no oncogene but cause cancer by insertional activation, integrating beside a proto-oncogene such as MYC so that the strong LTR promoter or enhancer drives it.
When a retrovirus infects a germ line cell, the provirus can be inherited like any other gene. About 8 percent of the human genome consists of such endogenous retroviruses, almost all inactivated by mutation. Related LTR retrotransposons move within the genome by the same copy, reverse transcribe and integrate mechanism.
Viral genomes come in every chemical form, and the Baltimore classes sort them by their route to mRNA. RNA viruses mutate fast because their polymerases do not proofread, and segmented viruses such as influenza reassort. Retroviruses carry two plus strand RNA genomes with gag, pol and env; reverse transcriptase makes DNA flanked by LTRs, and integrase inserts it as a permanent provirus, a mechanism exploited by cancer causing viruses, by retrotransposons and by gene therapy vectors.
The chapter in one breath
- Bacteria are haploid with one circular chromosome in a nucleoid; plasmids such as F, R and Col replicate independently and carry optional but often decisive genes.
- Auxotrophs need a supplement that prototrophs make for themselves; replica plating finds them, and the fluctuation test showed that mutations arise randomly before selection.
- In conjugation, F+ cells transfer only F; Hfr cells transfer chromosome in a fixed order from oriT; F′ cells create partial diploids.
- Interrupted mating maps genes by time of entry in minutes; overlapping Hfr orders reveal a 100 minute circular map.
- Transformation moves free DNA (DNase sensitive); cotransformation frequency measures linkage.
- Generalized transduction packages any host fragment of about 2 minutes; cotransduction frequency and the rarest class of a three factor cross give distance and order.
- Phages grow lytically or, if temperate, as prophages held silent by repressor; phage crosses are scored by plaque phenotypes.
- Benzer's rII work separated the complementation (cis-trans) test from the recombination test and used deletion mapping to show that a gene contains hundreds of separable sites.
- The Baltimore classes sort viruses by route to mRNA; RNA viruses mutate fast, and segmented viruses reassort.
- Retroviruses reverse transcribe their RNA to DNA with LTRs and integrate as a provirus, the basis of HIV therapy, viral oncogenes and endogenous retroviruses.
Words worth knowing
| Term | What it means |
|---|---|
| Nucleoid | The region of a bacterial cell that holds the compacted chromosome, with no surrounding membrane. |
| Plasmid | A small, usually circular DNA molecule that replicates independently of the chromosome. |
| Prototroph | A wild type strain that grows on minimal medium because it makes all its own building blocks. |
| Auxotroph | A mutant that cannot make a required nutrient and grows only when it is supplied. |
| Replica plating | Transferring colonies from a master plate to other media with a velvet pad, preserving their positions. |
| Fluctuation test | Luria and Delbrück's comparison of independent cultures that showed mutations arise before selection. |
| Conjugation | Transfer of DNA from donor to recipient bacterium through direct cell contact. |
| F factor | The fertility plasmid that encodes the sex pilus and transfer machinery. |
| Hfr strain | A donor with F integrated into its chromosome, which transfers chromosomal genes in a fixed order. |
| F′ factor | An F plasmid that has picked up a segment of chromosomal DNA during excision. |
| Transformation | Uptake and incorporation of free DNA from the environment. |
| Generalized transduction | Phage mediated transfer of any part of the host genome packaged in place of phage DNA. |
| Specialized transduction | Transfer of only the host genes beside a prophage, after faulty excision. |
| Cotransduction frequency | The fraction of transductants for one marker that also inherited a second marker. |
| Lytic cycle | Phage infection that ends with the cell bursting and releasing new phages. |
| Lysogeny | A state in which a temperate phage genome is integrated as a prophage and kept silent. |
| Prophage | A phage genome integrated into the host chromosome. |
| Cistron | The unit of function defined by the cis-trans complementation test; a gene. |
| Complementation | Restoration of wild type function when two mutant genomes are in one cell, showing the mutations are in different genes. |
| Deletion mapping | Locating point mutations by testing whether they can recombine with a panel of deletions. |
| Baltimore classification | A scheme that groups viruses into seven classes by how their genome produces mRNA. |
| Reassortment | Exchange of whole genome segments between viruses infecting one cell. |
| Reverse transcriptase | A viral enzyme that makes DNA from an RNA template. |
| Provirus | Retroviral DNA integrated into a host chromosome. |
| Long terminal repeat (LTR) | A repeated sequence at each end of retroviral DNA containing the promoter and polyadenylation signals. |
Check yourself
Chromosome Mutations
A single base change can alter one protein, but a chromosome mutation can add, remove or rearrange hundreds of genes at once. These large scale changes cause about half of early miscarriages, Down syndrome and many developmental disorders, drive certain leukemias, and built some of the most important crops on Earth. This chapter shows how chromosomes are described, how they break and rejoin, how whole chromosomes or whole sets are gained or lost, and what each change does in meiosis and in the clinic.
By the end of this chapter you can
- Classify chromosomes by centromere position, describe telomeres and banding, and read standard karyotype notation.
- Distinguish deletions, duplications, inversions and translocations, and explain how each pairs in meiosis.
- Predict the products of a crossover within a paracentric or pericentric inversion loop.
- Explain alternate and adjacent segregation in a reciprocal translocation heterozygote and the risks of a Robertsonian translocation.
- Define aneuploidy terms and trace nondisjunction in meiosis I and meiosis II, using markers to tell which division failed.
- Describe the major human aneuploidies, the maternal age effect, mosaicism and uniparental disomy.
- Compare autopolyploidy and allopolyploidy, calculate gamete ratios in tetraploids and explain why triploids are sterile.
- Relate microdeletion syndromes, cancer translocations such as the Philadelphia chromosome, and gene amplification to disease and therapy.
Section 1Chromosome structure and karyotypes
Parts of a chromosome
Every eukaryotic chromosome is one long DNA molecule packaged with proteins into chromatin. After replication, and until anaphase, each chromosome consists of two identical sister chromatids held together at the centromere. Three elements are essential for a chromosome to be copied and passed on faithfully:
- Origins of replication, many per chromosome, so that a long molecule can be copied in the hours of S phase.
- A centromere, where the kinetochore assembles and attaches to spindle microtubules. Human centromeres are built on long arrays of a 171 bp repeat called alpha satellite DNA, but they are defined epigenetically by nucleosomes containing the histone H3 variant CENP-A.
- Two telomeres, the protective ends. Human telomeres are thousands of tandem copies of TTAGGG bound by the shelterin protein complex. Telomeres keep chromosome ends from being mistaken for broken DNA and joined together.
The importance of these elements explains much of this chapter. A chromosome fragment with no centromere (acentric) cannot attach to the spindle and is lost at division. A chromosome with two centromeres (dicentric) may be pulled toward both poles and break. A broken end without a telomere is "sticky" and tends to fuse with other broken ends, which is how many rearrangements form.
Centromere position and chromosome shape
The centromere divides a chromosome into two arms. By convention the short arm is p (for petit) and the long arm is q. Chromosomes are classified by where the centromere lies, which is measured by the arm ratio (q length divided by p length) or the centromeric index (p length divided by total length).
| Type | Centromere position | Arm ratio q/p (approximate) | Human examples |
|---|---|---|---|
| Metacentric | Near the middle; arms about equal | 1.0 to 1.7 | Chromosomes 1, 3, 16, 19, 20 |
| Submetacentric | Off center; clearly shorter p arm | 1.7 to 3.0 | Chromosomes 2, 4 to 12, 17, 18, X |
| Acrocentric | Very near one end; tiny p arm, often with satellites | Above 3.0 | Chromosomes 13, 14, 15, 21, 22 (and Y is nearly acrocentric) |
| Telocentric | At the very end; no p arm | No p arm | None in normal humans; common in mice |
The tiny short arms of the five human acrocentric chromosomes carry the tandem ribosomal RNA genes, the nucleolus organizer regions. Because the same genes are repeated on all five, losing the short arms of two of them, as happens in a Robertsonian translocation, has no effect on the person.
Making and reading a karyotype
A karyotype is the complete set of chromosomes of a cell, arranged in pairs by size, centromere position and banding pattern. Dividing cells (commonly cultured white blood cells, amniocytes or bone marrow) are treated with a spindle poison such as colchicine or colcemid, which arrests them in metaphase when chromosomes are most condensed. A hypotonic solution swells the cells, they are fixed and dropped onto slides, and the chromosomes are stained.
The standard stain is G-banding: a brief trypsin treatment followed by Giemsa dye. Dark G bands tend to be AT rich, gene poor and late replicating; light bands are GC rich and gene dense. Each chromosome has a reproducible pattern of about 400 to 550 bands per haploid set in a routine preparation, and up to about 850 in high resolution prometaphase spreads. Bands are numbered outward from the centromere: 7q31.2 means chromosome 7, long arm, region 3, band 1, sub-band 2.
A band at routine resolution contains roughly 5 to 10 Mb of DNA, so a G-banded karyotype detects gains, losses and rearrangements of about that size or larger. Molecular methods see far smaller changes:
- Fluorescence in situ hybridization (FISH) uses a fluorescent DNA probe for a specific region. The number and location of signals reveal deletions, duplications and translocations, even in nondividing (interphase) cells.
- Spectral karyotyping paints each chromosome a different color, making complex translocations obvious.
- Chromosomal microarray compares the amount of patient DNA with a reference at hundreds of thousands of points across the genome. It detects copy number variants as small as about 50 to 100 kb, but it cannot detect balanced rearrangements, which change position without changing amount.
Karyotype notation
The international system for human cytogenomic nomenclature (ISCN) writes the total chromosome number, then the sex chromosomes, then any abnormality. A normal female is 46,XX and a normal male 46,XY. A plus or minus sign before a chromosome number means a whole extra or missing chromosome. Structural changes use abbreviations followed by the chromosome(s) in one set of parentheses and the breakpoints in the next.
A functional chromosome needs replication origins, one centromere and two telomeres. Chromosomes are described by centromere position (metacentric, submetacentric, acrocentric, telocentric) and by G-band patterns numbered from the centromere along the p and q arms. A banded karyotype sees changes of several megabases; FISH and chromosomal microarray detect much smaller changes, and ISCN notation records the result.
Section 2Deletions, duplications, inversions and translocations
How rearrangements arise
Structural rearrangements begin with double strand breaks, caused by ionizing radiation, some chemicals, replication errors or the cell's own programmed cuts. If the broken ends are rejoined wrongly, or if crossing over occurs between similar sequences at the wrong positions (nonallelic homologous recombination), the gene order changes. Repeated sequences, such as segmental duplications and transposable elements, are hotspots because they provide misleading homology.
| Rearrangement | Change in gene order (normal: A B C • D E F G) | Pairing in a heterozygote | Main genetic consequence |
|---|---|---|---|
| Deletion | A B C • D G (E F lost) | Unpaired loop on the normal homolog | Loss of genes; haploinsufficiency; pseudodominance |
| Duplication | A B C • D E F E F G | Unpaired loop on the duplicated homolog | Extra dose of genes; raw material for new genes |
| Paracentric inversion | A B C • D F E G | Inversion loop not including the centromere | Crossover in loop gives dicentric and acentric products |
| Pericentric inversion | A E D • C B F G | Inversion loop including the centromere | Crossover in loop gives duplication plus deficiency products |
| Reciprocal translocation | Segments exchanged between nonhomologous chromosomes | Cross shaped quadrivalent | Semisterility; unbalanced gametes from adjacent segregation |
| Robertsonian translocation | Long arms of two acrocentrics fused | Trivalent | 45 chromosomes; risk of trisomic offspring |
Deletions
A deletion (deficiency) removes a segment, either from the end (terminal) or from within (interstitial). In a deletion heterozygote, the normal homolog has nothing to pair with across the missing region, so it buckles out as a deletion loop during synapsis, visible in Drosophila polytene chromosomes. Two genetic effects reveal deletions. First, a deletion uncovers recessive alleles on the other homolog: a recessive allele opposite a deletion is expressed, a phenomenon called pseudodominance, which makes deletions excellent tools for mapping genes to small regions (just as Benzer used them in phage). Second, many genes are haploinsufficient: one copy does not make enough product for a normal phenotype. Large deletions are usually lethal when homozygous and often harmful when heterozygous. Deletion of part of the short arm of human chromosome 5 causes cri du chat syndrome, named for the high pitched, catlike cry of affected infants, together with intellectual disability and a small head.
Duplications
A duplication repeats a segment. In a tandem duplication the copies are adjacent and in the same orientation; in a reverse duplication they are in opposite orientation; a duplicated segment may also be inserted elsewhere. Duplications commonly arise by unequal crossing over between misaligned repeats, which creates a duplication on one chromatid and a reciprocal deletion on the other.
The Bar mutation of Drosophila is the classic case. Bar is a tandem duplication of a small region of the X chromosome that reduces the number of facets in the eye. Females with one Bar region on each X (B/B) have four copies of the region and small eyes, but females with a triple copy on one X and a single copy on the other (double Bar over wild type) also have four copies and even smaller eyes. Same dose, different phenotype: the arrangement mattered, an example of a position effect.
Duplications are also the raw material of evolution. Once a gene is duplicated, one copy can keep the original function while the other accumulates mutations and may gain a new role. The globin genes, olfactory receptor genes and Hox clusters are families that arose this way.
Inversions
An inversion cuts out a segment and reinserts it in reverse. If the segment does not include the centromere, it is a paracentric inversion; if it does, it is a pericentric inversion, which can change the arm ratio and therefore the shape of the chromosome. An inversion homozygote usually has a normal phenotype, because no genes are lost or gained, unless a breakpoint disrupts a gene or moves it next to heterochromatin. The genetic action happens in heterozygotes. To pair gene for gene, one homolog must twist into an inversion loop.
A single crossover within the loop produces unbalanced chromatids:
- In a paracentric inversion heterozygote, the crossover produces a dicentric chromatid (two centromeres) and an acentric fragment (none). At anaphase I the dicentric stretches between the poles as a dicentric bridge and breaks, while the acentric fragment is lost. Both recombinant products are missing genes.
- In a pericentric inversion heterozygote, each recombinant chromatid has one centromere but carries a duplication of one end and a deficiency of the other.
In both cases the two nonrecombinant chromatids (one normal, one inverted) are balanced. Gametes carrying the unbalanced recombinant chromatids are inviable in plants or give inviable zygotes in animals, so recombinant progeny are not recovered for genes within the inversion. Inversions therefore act as crossover suppressors, keeping groups of alleles together. Geneticists exploit this in Drosophila balancer chromosomes, which carry multiple overlapping inversions, a dominant visible marker and a recessive lethal, to maintain a mutation in a stock without it being lost by recombination.
Translocations
A translocation moves a segment to a nonhomologous chromosome. In a reciprocal translocation, two nonhomologous chromosomes exchange segments. A carrier with a balanced reciprocal translocation has all its genes, usually in normal amounts, and is typically healthy. In meiosis, however, the two normal and two translocated chromosomes pair as a cross shaped quadrivalent, and how the four chromosomes segregate determines whether gametes are balanced:
- Alternate segregation: the two normal chromosomes go to one pole and the two translocated chromosomes to the other. Both gametes are balanced (one normal, one balanced carrier).
- Adjacent-1 segregation: each pole receives one normal and one translocated chromosome, with nonhomologous centromeres going together. Both gametes are unbalanced, carrying a duplication of one segment and a deficiency of another.
- Adjacent-2 segregation: homologous centromeres go to the same pole. Both gametes are unbalanced; this is rarer.
Because adjacent and alternate segregation occur at similar frequencies in many plants, a translocation heterozygote is often semisterile, with about half its pollen or ovules aborted. In humans, balanced translocation carriers may have recurrent miscarriages or a child with an unbalanced karyotype. Translocations also produce pseudolinkage: genes near the breakpoints on the two different chromosomes behave as if linked, because only the alternate segregation products survive.
Robertsonian translocations
A Robertsonian translocation fuses the long arms of two acrocentric chromosomes at or near their centromeres, and the two tiny short arms are lost. The carrier has 45 chromosomes but is healthy, because the lost short arms carry only redundant ribosomal RNA genes. About 1 in 1,000 people carry one; rob(13;14) and rob(14;21) are the most common. The danger is to offspring.
Deletions remove genes, cause pseudodominance and reveal haploinsufficiency; duplications add dosage and fuel gene family evolution. Inversions are balanced but suppress recovery of recombinants because a crossover in the loop gives dicentric and acentric (paracentric) or duplication plus deficiency (pericentric) products. Reciprocal translocations cause semisterility through adjacent segregation, and Robertsonian translocations, though harmless to carriers, raise the risk of trisomic offspring.
Section 3Aneuploidy and nondisjunction
Terms for changes in chromosome number
Changes in chromosome number come in two kinds. Euploidy changes involve whole sets (the subject of Section 4). Aneuploidy is the gain or loss of individual chromosomes, so that the number is not an exact multiple of the haploid number. Using 2n for the normal diploid number:
- Nullisomy (2n − 2): both members of a pair missing.
- Monosomy (2n − 1): one chromosome missing, for example 45,X.
- Trisomy (2n + 1): one extra chromosome, for example 47,XX,+21.
- Tetrasomy (2n + 2): two extra copies of the same chromosome.
- Double trisomy (2n + 1 + 1): one extra copy each of two different chromosomes.
Aneuploidy is usually far more harmful than polyploidy, even though it changes fewer genes. The reason is gene balance: many proteins work in complexes or pathways whose parts must be made in the right proportions. Adding a whole set keeps every ratio at 1:1; adding one chromosome raises the dose of hundreds of genes by 50 percent relative to all the others. In humans, every autosomal monosomy and most autosomal trisomies are lethal before birth.
Nondisjunction
Most aneuploidy arises from nondisjunction, the failure of chromosomes to separate properly. In meiosis I nondisjunction, a pair of homologs goes to the same pole; in meiosis II nondisjunction, a pair of sister chromatids goes to the same pole. The two produce different gamete sets:
- After nondisjunction in meiosis I, all four products are abnormal: two are n + 1, carrying one copy of each homolog, and two are n − 1.
- After nondisjunction in meiosis II (in one of the two secondary cells), half the products are abnormal: one n + 1 carrying two copies of the same chromatid, one n − 1 and two normal.
That difference is the key to working out where nondisjunction occurred. If an extra chromosome carries two different alleles from one parent (both of that parent's homologs), the error was in meiosis I. If it carries two identical copies of one parental homolog, the error was most likely in meiosis II. (Crossing over complicates this for loci far from the centromere, so markers near the centromere give the cleanest answer.) Related mechanisms include anaphase lag, in which a chromosome is left behind and lost, and premature separation of sister chromatids in meiosis I.
Human aneuploidies
Only three autosomal trisomies commonly survive to birth, those of chromosomes 21, 18 and 13, which are among the most gene poor autosomes. Sex chromosome aneuploidies are far better tolerated, for two reasons: all X chromosomes beyond one are inactivated (Chapter 3), and the Y carries few genes.
| Condition | Karyotype | Approximate frequency at birth | Main features |
|---|---|---|---|
| Down syndrome | 47,+21 | 1 in 700 | Intellectual disability, characteristic facial features, heart defects (especially atrioventricular septal defect), hypotonia, increased leukemia and early Alzheimer disease risk |
| Edwards syndrome | 47,+18 | 1 in 5,000 | Growth restriction, clenched hands with overlapping fingers, rocker bottom feet, heart defects; most die in the first year |
| Patau syndrome | 47,+13 | 1 in 10,000 to 16,000 | Cleft lip and palate, polydactyly, holoprosencephaly, heart defects; most die in the first year |
| Turner syndrome | 45,X (about half of cases; others mosaic or structural) | 1 in 2,500 females | Short stature, ovarian failure, webbed neck, coarctation of the aorta; normal intelligence |
| Klinefelter syndrome | 47,XXY | 1 in 500 to 1,000 males | Tall stature, small testes, infertility, gynecomastia; often undiagnosed until adulthood |
| Triple X | 47,XXX | 1 in 1,000 females | Often tall; usually fertile; mild learning differences in some |
| 47,XYY | 47,XYY | 1 in 1,000 males | Often tall; usually fertile; mild learning differences in some |
About 95 percent of Down syndrome is free trisomy 21, and in roughly 90 percent of these the extra chromosome comes from the mother, most often from a meiosis I error. About 3 to 4 percent of cases are due to a Robertsonian translocation (Section 2), which matters because it can recur in a family, and 1 to 2 percent are mosaic. The risk of free trisomy rises steeply with maternal age: approximately 1 in 1,250 births at age 25, 1 in 1,000 at 30, 1 in 350 at 35, 1 in 100 at 40 and 1 in 30 at 45. A leading explanation is that human oocytes begin meiosis I before birth and remain arrested for decades; the cohesin complexes that hold homologs and sisters together slowly deteriorate, and with fewer or poorly placed crossovers, homologs separate prematurely or not at all.
Mosaicism and uniparental disomy
Nondisjunction in a mitotic division after fertilization produces a mosaic, a person with two or more cell lines of different karyotype, such as 46,XX/47,XX,+21. Mosaics are usually more mildly affected than full trisomics, in proportion to how many cells, and which tissues, are abnormal. Mosaicism confined to the placenta can confuse prenatal tests that sample chorionic villi.
A trisomic embryo can sometimes "rescue" itself by losing one of the three copies in an early mitosis. If the lost copy is the one from the parent who contributed only one, the embryo ends up with both copies from the same parent, which is uniparental disomy (UPD). UPD is harmless for most chromosomes but causes disease when the region contains imprinted genes, or when the doubled chromosome carries a recessive mutation (isodisomy). Maternal UPD of chromosome 15 causes about a quarter of cases of Prader Willi syndrome, because the paternally expressed genes in 15q11-q13 are missing.
Aneuploidy adds or removes single chromosomes and disrupts gene balance, so it is usually severe. Nondisjunction in meiosis I puts both homologs into one gamete and leaves all four products abnormal; in meiosis II it puts two identical sisters together and leaves half normal. Only trisomies 13, 18 and 21 and the sex chromosome aneuploidies are common at birth; trisomy risk rises with maternal age, and mitotic errors give mosaics or uniparental disomy.
Section 4Polyploidy
Whole extra sets
Polyploids carry more than two complete chromosome sets. Geneticists use x for the number of chromosomes in one basic set and n for the number in a gamete. In a diploid these are the same, but in polyploids they differ. Bread wheat, for instance, is 2n = 6x = 42: each body cell has six sets of 7 chromosomes, and each gamete (n) has 21. Triploids (3x), tetraploids (4x), hexaploids (6x) and octoploids (8x) are all known.
Polyploidy is common in plants (most flowering plant lineages have undergone at least one whole genome duplication in their history) and in some fish, amphibians and insects, but rare in mammals. Plants tolerate it better for several reasons: many reproduce asexually or self fertilize, they lack chromosomal sex determination that would be upset by extra sets, and their development is more flexible. Polyploid plants often have larger cells and larger organs (fruits, flowers, leaves), the "gigas" effect, which made them attractive in agriculture.
Autopolyploidy
An autopolyploid has multiple sets from the same species. It can arise when a diploid gamete (from a failure of meiosis) fuses with a normal gamete, giving a triploid, or with another diploid gamete, giving a tetraploid. In the laboratory, colchicine, which binds tubulin and prevents spindle formation, blocks anaphase so that the chromosomes of a dividing cell are not separated, doubling the chromosome number in that cell and its descendants.
Autotetraploids are fertile but segregate in unusual ratios, because each chromosome has four homologs that can pair as a quadrivalent or as two bivalents, and any two of the four go to each gamete. Triploids are almost always highly sterile. With three homologs for each chromosome, one pole gets two and the other one, at random for each chromosome type. A gamete is balanced only if it receives exactly one copy of every chromosome (n = x) or two copies of every chromosome (2x). Seedless watermelons and the Cavendish banana (a triploid, 2n = 3x = 33) owe their seedlessness to this sterility.
Allopolyploidy
An allopolyploid combines chromosome sets from different species. A hybrid between two diploid species is usually sterile: its two sets are not homologous, so the chromosomes cannot pair and meiosis produces unbalanced gametes. If the hybrid's chromosome number doubles, however, every chromosome now has a partner, meiosis proceeds normally, and the result is a fertile amphidiploid (also called an allotetraploid). Because it cannot produce fertile offspring with either parent species, it is, in effect, a new species formed in a single generation.
The first deliberately made example was Georgii Karpechenko's 1928 cross of radish (Raphanus, 2n = 18) with cabbage (Brassica, 2n = 18). The F1 had 9 radish and 9 cabbage chromosomes and was sterile; a rare doubled form with 36 chromosomes was fertile. (Unfortunately for gardeners, it had the root of a cabbage and the leaves of a radish.)
Polyploidy in crops and in animals
Many crops are polyploid, and their histories can be read in their genomes. Bread wheat (Triticum aestivum) arose from two hybridizations: a diploid AA wheat crossed with a BB goat grass to form tetraploid AABB (the ancestor of durum wheat), which later crossed with a third species, DD goat grass, giving hexaploid AABBDD. Plant breeders have made new allopolyploids too, such as triticale, a wheat by rye hybrid doubled with colchicine.
| Crop | Chromosome constitution | Type |
|---|---|---|
| Banana (Cavendish) | 2n = 3x = 33 | Autotriploid, seedless |
| Seedless watermelon | 2n = 3x = 33, from a tetraploid by diploid cross | Autotriploid, seedless |
| Potato (common) | 2n = 4x = 48 | Autotetraploid |
| Durum (pasta) wheat | 2n = 4x = 28, AABB | Allotetraploid |
| Bread wheat | 2n = 6x = 42, AABBDD | Allohexaploid |
| Upland cotton | 2n = 4x = 52 | Allotetraploid |
| Cultivated strawberry | 2n = 8x = 56 | Allooctoploid |
In animals, whole genome duplication occurred twice early in vertebrate evolution, which is why we have four Hox clusters where an insect has one, and again in the ancestors of teleost fish and of salmon. Living polyploid animals include some frogs, lizards and fish, often reproducing asexually. In humans, triploidy (69 chromosomes) occurs in about 1 to 2 percent of conceptions, usually from fertilization of an egg by two sperm, and almost all are miscarried. Many human tissues contain endopolyploid cells, in which DNA has replicated without division: liver cells are often tetraploid, and megakaryocytes reach 16n or more. The giant polytene chromosomes of Drosophila salivary glands are an extreme case, with about 1,000 aligned copies of each chromatid, which makes deletions and inversions directly visible.
Polyploids carry extra whole sets, which preserves gene balance and is well tolerated in plants. Autopolyploids come from one species and show unusual segregation (35:1 after selfing AAaa) or, if triploid, near total sterility. Allopolyploids combine sets from two species; doubling a sterile hybrid gives a fertile new species, the origin of bread wheat, cotton and strawberries.
Section 5Chromosome mutations in human disease and cancer
How common are chromosome abnormalities?
Chromosome errors are strikingly common at conception and much rarer at birth, because most are lethal. About half of first trimester miscarriages are chromosomally abnormal. Among these, autosomal trisomies make up roughly half (trisomy 16, never seen at birth, is the single most common), followed by 45,X and triploidy. Among liveborn infants, about 1 in 150 (roughly 0.6 percent) has a chromosome abnormality, divided among aneuploidies, balanced rearrangements and unbalanced structural changes.
Microdeletion and microduplication syndromes
Some deletions are too small to see on a routine karyotype (under about 5 Mb) yet remove a group of neighboring genes, causing a recognizable contiguous gene syndrome. Many recur because they are flanked by low copy repeats that promote nonallelic homologous recombination; the same mechanism produces reciprocal duplications. They are diagnosed by FISH or chromosomal microarray.
| Syndrome | Region | Key gene(s) | Main features |
|---|---|---|---|
| 22q11.2 deletion (DiGeorge, velocardiofacial) | 22q11.2, about 3 Mb | TBX1 | Conotruncal heart defects, thymic hypoplasia with T cell deficiency, hypocalcemia from absent parathyroids, cleft palate, learning and psychiatric problems; about 1 in 4,000 births |
| Williams syndrome | 7q11.23 | ELN (elastin) | Supravalvular aortic stenosis, hypercalcemia, very sociable personality, intellectual disability |
| Prader Willi / Angelman | 15q11-q13 | Imprinted genes (SNRPN cluster; UBE3A) | Paternal deletion gives Prader Willi (hypotonia, then hyperphagia); maternal deletion gives Angelman (seizures, absent speech, happy demeanor) |
| Cri du chat | 5p15 | Several | High pitched cry, microcephaly, intellectual disability |
| Wolf Hirschhorn | 4p16.3 | Several | "Greek warrior helmet" facial appearance, seizures, growth delay |
| Smith Magenis | 17p11.2 | RAI1 | Sleep disturbance, self injurious behavior, intellectual disability |
Chromosome changes in cancer
Cancer cells are genetically unstable, and chromosome mutations are among their most characteristic features. Most solid tumors are aneuploid, often with dozens of numerical and structural changes. But some cancers are driven by one specific rearrangement, and those have taught us how chromosome mutations activate genes. Rearrangements cause cancer in three main ways.
- Fusion genes. A translocation joins parts of two genes into a new gene encoding a hybrid protein with abnormal activity.
- Promoter or enhancer swapping. A translocation moves a proto-oncogene next to a strongly active regulatory region, so it is overexpressed even though its protein is normal.
- Copy number change. Amplification of an oncogene raises its dose, and deletion removes a tumor suppressor gene.
The first consistent cancer rearrangement found was the Philadelphia chromosome, a small chromosome 22 seen in about 95 percent of cases of chronic myeloid leukemia (CML). It results from the reciprocal translocation t(9;22)(q34;q11). The breakpoints fall within the ABL1 gene on 9q34 and the BCR gene on 22q11, and the derivative chromosome 22 carries a BCR-ABL1 fusion gene. Its protein is a tyrosine kinase that is always switched on, driving proliferation of myeloid cells. That discovery led to imatinib, a drug that blocks the ATP binding site of the BCR-ABL1 kinase and transformed CML from a fatal disease into a manageable one.
| Rearrangement | Genes involved | Mechanism | Cancer and therapy note |
|---|---|---|---|
| t(9;22)(q34;q11) | BCR-ABL1 | Fusion tyrosine kinase | Chronic myeloid leukemia, some acute lymphoblastic leukemia; tyrosine kinase inhibitors such as imatinib |
| t(8;14)(q24;q32) | MYC and immunoglobulin heavy chain (IGH) | MYC overexpressed by immunoglobulin enhancer | Burkitt lymphoma |
| t(14;18)(q32;q21) | IGH and BCL2 | Antiapoptotic BCL2 overexpressed | Follicular lymphoma |
| t(15;17)(q24;q21) | PML-RARA | Fusion that blocks differentiation | Acute promyelocytic leukemia; all trans retinoic acid and arsenic trioxide |
| t(11;22)(q24;q12) | EWSR1-FLI1 | Fusion transcription factor | Ewing sarcoma |
| Amplification of 17q12 | ERBB2 (HER2) | Increased copy number of a growth factor receptor | About 15 to 20 percent of breast cancers; trastuzumab |
| Amplification of 2p24 | MYCN | Increased copy number | Neuroblastoma, marks a poor prognosis |
| Deletion of 13q14 | RB1 | Loss of a tumor suppressor | Retinoblastoma |
Amplified genes appear cytologically in two forms: double minutes, small paired acentric chromatin bodies, and homogeneously staining regions, long stretches of a chromosome that lack normal bands because they consist of repeated copies of the amplicon. Some tumors also show chromothripsis, in which one or a few chromosomes shatter into many pieces in a single catastrophic event and are stitched back together in random order.
Chromosome abnormalities are common in early pregnancy loss and occur in about 1 in 150 births. Small recurrent deletions mediated by flanking repeats cause contiguous gene syndromes such as 22q11.2 deletion and Williams syndrome. In cancer, translocations create fusion genes (BCR-ABL1, PML-RARA) or place oncogenes under strong enhancers (MYC in Burkitt lymphoma), amplification raises oncogene dose and deletion removes tumor suppressors, and each of these changes can guide diagnosis and therapy.
The chapter in one breath
- A working chromosome needs replication origins, one centromere and two telomeres; acentric fragments are lost and dicentrics break.
- Chromosomes are metacentric, submetacentric, acrocentric or telocentric, and G-bands are numbered outward from the centromere on the p and q arms.
- A banded karyotype sees changes of several megabases; FISH and chromosomal microarray detect much smaller ones, but a microarray misses balanced rearrangements.
- Deletions cause pseudodominance and haploinsufficiency; duplications add dose and arise by unequal crossing over.
- A crossover within a paracentric inversion loop gives a dicentric bridge and an acentric fragment; within a pericentric inversion it gives duplication plus deficiency products, so inversions suppress recombinant offspring.
- Reciprocal translocation heterozygotes form quadrivalents; adjacent segregation gives unbalanced gametes and semisterility.
- Robertsonian translocation carriers have 45 chromosomes and are healthy but can have children with translocation Down syndrome.
- Nondisjunction in meiosis I makes all four gametes abnormal; in meiosis II, half; markers near the centromere reveal which division failed.
- Trisomies 21, 18 and 13 and the sex chromosome aneuploidies survive to birth; trisomy risk rises with maternal age.
- Autopolyploids segregate in odd ratios and triploids are nearly sterile; allopolyploids formed by doubling a hybrid are fertile new species such as bread wheat.
- Cancer rearrangements create fusion genes such as BCR-ABL1, drive oncogenes with strong enhancers, amplify oncogenes and delete tumor suppressors.
Words worth knowing
| Term | What it means |
|---|---|
| Centromere | The constricted region where sister chromatids are joined and the kinetochore attaches to the spindle. |
| Telomere | The repeated DNA and protein cap at each chromosome end that prevents end fusion. |
| Acrocentric | A chromosome with its centromere very close to one end, giving a tiny short arm. |
| Karyotype | The complete chromosome set of a cell, arranged in pairs by size, shape and banding. |
| G-banding | Trypsin plus Giemsa staining that gives each chromosome a reproducible pattern of light and dark bands. |
| FISH | Fluorescence in situ hybridization: locating a DNA sequence on chromosomes or in nuclei with a fluorescent probe. |
| Chromosomal microarray | A genome wide test that detects gains and losses of DNA (copy number variants) as small as tens of kilobases. |
| Deletion | Loss of a chromosome segment. |
| Pseudodominance | Expression of a recessive allele because the homologous region on the other chromosome is deleted. |
| Haploinsufficiency | A situation in which one working copy of a gene does not give a normal phenotype. |
| Duplication | Repetition of a chromosome segment. |
| Unequal crossing over | Crossing over between misaligned repeats, producing a duplication and a reciprocal deletion. |
| Position effect | A change in gene expression caused by a change in a gene's chromosomal location or arrangement. |
| Paracentric inversion | An inversion that does not include the centromere. |
| Pericentric inversion | An inversion that includes the centromere. |
| Dicentric bridge | A chromatid with two centromeres stretched between the poles at anaphase. |
| Reciprocal translocation | Exchange of segments between two nonhomologous chromosomes. |
| Adjacent segregation | Segregation from a translocation quadrivalent that gives gametes with a duplication and a deficiency. |
| Robertsonian translocation | Fusion of the long arms of two acrocentric chromosomes, leaving 45 chromosomes. |
| Aneuploidy | Gain or loss of one or a few chromosomes rather than whole sets. |
| Nondisjunction | Failure of homologs (meiosis I) or sister chromatids (meiosis II or mitosis) to separate. |
| Trisomy | Presence of three copies of one chromosome (2n + 1). |
| Monosomy | Presence of only one copy of a chromosome (2n − 1). |
| Mosaicism | Presence of two or more genetically different cell lines in one individual. |
| Uniparental disomy | Inheritance of both copies of a chromosome from the same parent. |
| Polyploidy | Possession of more than two complete chromosome sets. |
| Autopolyploid | A polyploid whose sets all come from one species. |
| Allopolyploid | A polyploid that combines chromosome sets from different species. |
| Colchicine | A drug that blocks spindle formation, used to arrest cells in metaphase and to double chromosome number. |
| Philadelphia chromosome | The shortened chromosome 22 from t(9;22) that carries the BCR-ABL1 fusion gene. |
| Gene amplification | An increase in the number of copies of a chromosome region, often containing an oncogene. |
| Microdeletion syndrome | A disorder caused by a deletion too small to see on a routine karyotype that removes several adjacent genes. |
Check yourself
DNA Replication, Recombination, Mutation and Repair
Each dividing cell copies billions of base pairs with fewer than one error per billion, and repairs thousands of DNA injuries every day. When copying, recombination or repair goes wrong, the result is a mutation, the raw material of evolution and the root of many inherited diseases and cancers. This chapter shows how the molecular machinery works and, just as important, how geneticists reasoned their way to knowing it.
By the end of this chapter you can
- Explain how the Meselson and Stahl experiment proved semiconservative replication and predict band patterns for any number of generations.
- Name the enzymes at a bacterial replication fork (helicase, primase, DNA polymerase III, DNA polymerase I, ligase, gyrase) and explain why one strand is made as Okazaki fragments.
- Describe origin licensing, the eukaryotic polymerases and the end replication problem, and explain how telomerase solves it.
- Trace the double-strand break repair model of homologous recombination from resection to Holliday junction resolution and explain gene conversion.
- Classify mutations as transitions, transversions, missense, nonsense, silent or frameshift, and connect each class to the chemical or replication event that causes it.
- Calculate a mutation rate from fluctuation test data and explain what the Luria and Delbrück experiment showed.
- Compare direct reversal, base excision, nucleotide excision, mismatch and double-strand break repair, and link each to a human disease.
- Describe the major classes of transposable elements and explain how a target site duplication forms.
Section 1Semiconservative replication and its enzymes
Three models and one decisive experiment
Watson and Crick noted in 1953 that base pairing suggests a copying mechanism. Semiconservative replication predicts that each daughter molecule keeps one old strand and gains one new strand. Two alternatives were also on the table. In conservative replication the parental duplex would stay intact and a wholly new duplex would be built beside it. In dispersive replication each strand of every daughter molecule would be a patchwork of old and new segments.
In 1958 Matthew Meselson and Franklin Stahl distinguished these models with a density label. They grew Escherichia coli for many generations in medium whose only nitrogen source was the heavy isotope 15N, so every DNA molecule was "heavy." They then moved the cells to medium containing ordinary 14N and took samples after each round of division. DNA from each sample was spun in a cesium chloride (CsCl) density gradient, where molecules settle into a band at the position matching their own buoyant density. Heavy DNA bands lower in the tube, light DNA higher, and a hybrid of one heavy and one light strand exactly in between.
After one generation in 14N, all the DNA formed a single band at the hybrid position. That result alone ruled out conservative replication, which would have given one heavy and one light band. After two generations they saw two bands of equal intensity, one hybrid and one light. A dispersive mechanism would have produced a single band that drifted steadily lighter, never a discrete light band, so the second generation ruled out dispersive replication. Only the semiconservative model predicts both observations.
Origins, forks and the direction of synthesis
Replication begins at specific sites called origins of replication. The circular E. coli chromosome, about 4.6 million base pairs (4.6 Mb), has a single origin named oriC, about 245 bp long. It contains repeated 9 bp binding sites for the initiator protein DnaA and a cluster of AT-rich 13 bp repeats. DnaA bound to ATP wraps the origin DNA and melts the AT-rich region, which opens easily because A:T pairs have only two hydrogen bonds. The helicase loader DnaC then places two hexameric DnaB helicases on the single strands, one facing each direction. Replication is therefore bidirectional: two replication forks move away from the origin around the circle until they meet roughly opposite, in a terminus region flanked by Ter sites bound by the Tus protein, which act as one-way traps for forks. Because the replicating circle looks like the Greek letter theta, this is called theta replication; some plasmids and phages instead use rolling circle replication.
Every DNA polymerase obeys two rules that shape the fork. First, it adds nucleotides only to a free 3'-OH, so synthesis always runs 5' to 3' and the template is read 3' to 5'. Second, no DNA polymerase can start a chain from nothing; it needs a primer. In cells the primer is a short stretch of RNA, about 10 nucleotides in bacteria, laid down by primase (DnaG in E. coli). Each dNTP is joined by its innermost phosphate, releasing pyrophosphate.
Because the two strands of the helix are antiparallel, these rules force an asymmetry. On one template the fork opens in the same direction that the polymerase travels, so a single primer is enough and the new strand, the leading strand, grows continuously toward the fork. On the other template the polymerase must move away from the fork. That strand, the lagging strand, is made discontinuously as a series of short pieces, each started by its own primer. These pieces are Okazaki fragments, about 1,000 to 2,000 nucleotides long in bacteria and only 100 to 200 nucleotides in eukaryotes.
The cast of enzymes at the fork
Unwinding the helix creates two problems. The separated strands want to snap back together, and the duplex ahead of the fork becomes overwound. Single-strand binding proteins (SSB) coat exposed single strands, keeping them extended and protected. DNA gyrase, a type II topoisomerase, works ahead of the fork, cutting both strands, passing a segment of duplex through the break and resealing it to introduce negative supercoils that relieve the strain. When replication of the circle is finished, the two daughter circles are interlocked like chain links, and topoisomerase IV separates (decatenates) them.
The main replicative enzyme in E. coli is DNA polymerase III holoenzyme, a multi-subunit machine. Its alpha subunit performs polymerization; its epsilon subunit is a 3' to 5' exonuclease that removes a mismatched nucleotide just added, a process called proofreading; and its beta clamp, a ring that encircles the DNA, holds the polymerase on the template so it can add thousands of nucleotides without falling off. This property, called processivity, lets pol III synthesize at about 1,000 nucleotides per second. A clamp loader complex opens the beta ring and closes it around each primer. One holoenzyme replicates both strands, the lagging template looping out so both cores move together (the trombone model).
DNA polymerase I finishes the lagging strand. It has a 5' to 3' exonuclease activity that removes the RNA primer of the fragment ahead while its polymerase activity fills the gap with DNA, a combined process called nick translation. Finally, DNA ligase seals the remaining nick by forming the last phosphodiester bond. Bacterial ligase uses NAD+; eukaryotic ligases use ATP.
| Protein (E. coli) | Job at the fork | Eukaryotic counterpart |
|---|---|---|
| DnaA | Binds oriC and melts the AT-rich region | Origin recognition complex (ORC) |
| DnaB helicase (loaded by DnaC) | Unwinds the duplex at the fork | CMG helicase (Cdc45, MCM2 to 7, GINS) |
| SSB | Coats and protects single strands | RPA |
| DNA gyrase, topoisomerase IV | Relieve supercoiling; separate daughter circles | Topoisomerases I and II |
| Primase (DnaG) | Synthesizes short RNA primers | Pol α-primase (RNA plus short DNA primer) |
| DNA pol III holoenzyme | Main synthesis of both strands; 3' to 5' proofreading | Pol ε (leading), pol δ (lagging) |
| Beta clamp and clamp loader | Keep polymerase on DNA (processivity) | PCNA and RFC |
| DNA pol I | Removes RNA primers (5' to 3' exonuclease) and fills gaps | RNase H and FEN1 remove primers; pol δ fills |
| DNA ligase (NAD+) | Seals nicks between fragments | DNA ligase I (ATP) |
Fidelity: three layers of accuracy
Replication is astonishingly accurate, and the accuracy comes in layers. Base selection by the polymerase active site, which fits only a correctly shaped Watson and Crick pair, gives roughly one error per 104 to 105 nucleotides. Proofreading by the 3' to 5' exonuclease improves this about 100-fold, to roughly 10-7. Mismatch repair (Section 5) catches most of the remaining errors after the fork has passed, bringing the final rate to about one error per 109 to 1010 nucleotides replicated.
Replication is semiconservative, as Meselson and Stahl showed with density labeling. Because polymerases need a primer and extend only 3' ends, a fork has a continuous leading strand and a discontinuous lagging strand built from primed Okazaki fragments. Helicase, SSB, gyrase, primase, pol III, pol I and ligase each solve one problem, and base selection, proofreading and mismatch repair together hold the error rate near one in a billion.
Section 2Replication in eukaryotes and telomeres
Many origins, licensed once per cycle
Eukaryotic chromosomes are linear, far larger than bacterial chromosomes, packaged in chromatin, and replicated by forks that move more slowly, roughly 50 nucleotides per second compared with about 1,000 in E. coli. A single origin per chromosome would never finish in time, so each chromosome uses many origins. The stretch of DNA replicated from one origin is a replicon. Yeast origins are short defined sequences called autonomously replicating sequences (ARS); human origins lack a simple consensus, and tens of thousands fire in each S phase.
A genome with thousands of origins faces a bookkeeping problem: every segment must be copied exactly once per cell cycle. Over-replication creates extra copies of genes and broken chromosomes. Cells solve this by separating two steps in time. During G1, when cyclin-dependent kinase (CDK) activity is low, the origin recognition complex (ORC) binds origins and, with the helpers Cdc6 and Cdt1, loads inactive double rings of the MCM2 to 7 helicase. This loaded pre-replicative complex marks the origin as licensed. When S phase begins, rising CDK and the kinase DDK (Dbf4-dependent kinase) activate licensed origins by recruiting Cdc45 and the GINS complex, which together with MCM form the active CMG helicase. The same high CDK activity that fires origins also prevents new licensing (Cdc6 is degraded or exported and Cdt1 is inhibited by the protein geminin), so no origin can be loaded again until the cell passes through mitosis and returns to G1. Active euchromatin generally replicates early in S phase and heterochromatin late.
Eukaryotic polymerases and lagging strand maturation
Eukaryotes divide the work among several polymerases. Pol α-primase starts every chain: its primase subunit makes about 10 nucleotides of RNA and pol α then adds about 20 nucleotides of DNA. Pol α lacks proofreading and has low processivity, so it is quickly replaced. Pol ε synthesizes most of the leading strand and pol δ most of the lagging strand; both proofread. The ring-shaped clamp PCNA (proliferating cell nuclear antigen), loaded by RFC, plays the role of the bacterial beta clamp. Because eukaryotic polymerases lack the 5' to 3' exonuclease of bacterial pol I, primers are removed differently: pol δ runs into the previous fragment and displaces its 5' end as a single-stranded flap, which the flap endonuclease FEN1 cuts off (with help from RNase H, which degrades RNA in RNA:DNA hybrids). DNA ligase I then seals the nick. Mitochondrial DNA is copied by pol γ.
Chromatin must also be copied. Nucleosomes ahead of the fork are disassembled and parental histones are passed to both daughter duplexes, while new histones are deposited by the chaperone CAF-1, which is recruited to PCNA. Parental histones keep their chemical marks, which helps pass on gene activity patterns (Chapter 9).
| Feature | Bacteria (E. coli) | Eukaryotes |
|---|---|---|
| Chromosome form | One circular chromosome | Several linear chromosomes in chromatin |
| Origins | One (oriC) | Thousands; licensed in G1, fired in S |
| Fork speed | About 1,000 nt per second | About 50 nt per second |
| Okazaki fragment length | 1,000 to 2,000 nt | 100 to 200 nt |
| Main polymerases | Pol III (both strands), pol I (primer replacement) | Pol α-primase (start), pol ε (leading), pol δ (lagging) |
| Sliding clamp | Beta clamp | PCNA |
| Primer removal | Pol I 5' to 3' exonuclease | RNase H and FEN1 flap removal |
| Ends | No ends to protect | Telomeres maintained by telomerase |
The end replication problem
Linear chromosomes have a weakness that circular ones do not. At the very end of a chromosome, the lagging strand template has no place for a final primer that can be replaced with DNA: when the last RNA primer is removed, nothing upstream can supply a 3'-OH to fill the gap. In addition, nucleases process the ends to leave a single-stranded overhang. The result is that each daughter molecule would be a little shorter than its parent, and after enough divisions genes near the ends would be lost. This is the end replication problem.
Chromosome ends are protected by telomeres, long arrays of a short repeat. In humans and all other vertebrates the repeat is 5'-TTAGGG-3' on the strand running 5' to 3' toward the chromosome end, repeated to a total length of roughly 10 to 15 kb at birth. The G-rich strand ends in a 3' single-stranded overhang of about 50 to 300 nucleotides. That overhang tucks back and invades the double-stranded repeats to form a protective lasso called the t-loop, held in place by a six-protein complex called shelterin (including TRF1, TRF2 and POT1). The t-loop hides the end so the cell does not mistake it for a broken chromosome and try to repair it by joining chromosomes together.
Telomerase
The enzyme that restores telomere length is telomerase, discovered by Elizabeth Blackburn and Carol Greider in the ciliate Tetrahymena. Telomerase is a ribonucleoprotein with two essential parts: a protein subunit, TERT (telomerase reverse transcriptase), and an RNA, TERC (also called TR), which carries a short template complementary to the telomere repeat. In humans the template region reads 3'-CAAUCCCAAUC-5'. Telomerase binds the 3' overhang so that the end of the DNA pairs with the 3' part of the template, then TERT copies the rest of the template, adding one GGTTAG unit (completing a TTAGGG repeat). It then slides forward and repeats. Telomerase is thus a reverse transcriptase carrying its own template. Once the G-rich strand has been lengthened, pol α-primase fills in the complementary C-rich strand by ordinary lagging strand synthesis.
Telomeres, aging and cancer
Most human somatic cells express little or no TERT, so their telomeres shorten by roughly 50 to 200 bp with each division. When telomeres become critically short, the exposed ends trigger a DNA damage response and the cells enter permanent growth arrest, called replicative senescence. This is the molecular basis of the Hayflick limit, the observation that normal human fibroblasts divide only about 40 to 60 times in culture. Germ cells and many stem cells do express telomerase. About 85 to 90 percent of human cancers reactivate telomerase, often through mutations in the TERT promoter, and most of the rest maintain telomeres by recombination between telomeres, a pathway called alternative lengthening of telomeres (ALT). Inherited telomerase defects cause dyskeratosis congenita, with bone marrow failure.
Eukaryotes copy large linear genomes from thousands of origins that are licensed with MCM helicases in G1 and fired once in S phase, using pol α-primase to start, pol ε and pol δ to elongate, PCNA as the clamp and FEN1 plus ligase I to finish. Linear ends cannot be fully copied, so telomeres of TTAGGG repeats buffer the loss and telomerase, a reverse transcriptase with its own RNA template, restores them in germ cells, stem cells and most cancers.
Section 3Homologous recombination
What recombination is for
Homologous recombination is the exchange of genetic information between two DNA molecules that share a long stretch of identical or nearly identical sequence. You already know one of its products: the crossovers between homologous chromosomes in meiosis that reshuffle alleles and that geneticists use to build linkage maps (Chapter 4). Its most ancient job, though, is repair. A double-strand break severs a chromosome completely, and the only way to restore the lost or damaged sequence without error is to copy it from an intact homologous template, usually the sister chromatid after replication or the homolog in meiosis. It also restarts collapsed forks and, in bacteria, integrates DNA brought in by transformation, transduction and conjugation (Chapter 5).
Homologous recombination should be distinguished from two other kinds of DNA rearrangement. Site-specific recombination joins two short, specific sequences recognized by a dedicated enzyme (phage lambda integration, or Cre recombinase acting on loxP sites). Transposition moves a mobile element into a new site that needs no homology at all (Section 5). Only homologous recombination depends on base pairing between long matching sequences.
The Holliday model and the Holliday junction
In 1964 Robin Holliday proposed that single-strand nicks at the same position in two homologous duplexes let the nicked strands swap partners, each pairing with the complementary strand of the other duplex. The result is a four-armed, cross-shaped structure now called a Holliday junction. Wherever a strand from one parent pairs with a strand from the other, the duplex is a heteroduplex; if the two parents differ at a site in that region, the heteroduplex contains a mismatch. The junction can slide along the DNA, a process called branch migration, lengthening the heteroduplex. Finally, the junction is cut by a resolvase. A Holliday junction can be cut in either of two planes. Cutting the two strands that were exchanged restores the original partners at flanking markers, a noncrossover that leaves only a patch of heteroduplex. Cutting the two strands that were not exchanged joins the left part of one chromosome to the right part of the other, a crossover.
The double-strand break repair model
Yeast experiments later showed that meiotic recombination begins with a double-strand break and that the broken chromosome receives information. The resulting double-strand break repair (DSBR) model is now the textbook framework. Its steps are:
- Break. In meiosis, the topoisomerase-like protein Spo11 cuts both strands deliberately at hundreds of sites; in mitotic cells breaks come from radiation, chemicals or collapsed forks.
- Resection. Nucleases (the MRN complex with CtIP, then Exo1 and Dna2 in eukaryotes) degrade the 5' ends on both sides of the break, leaving long 3' single-stranded tails. RPA coats the tails at first.
- Strand invasion. The recombinase Rad51 (and in meiosis also its relative Dmc1) replaces RPA, forming a helical nucleoprotein filament on a 3' tail. Loading Rad51 requires the mediator protein BRCA2. The filament finds a matching sequence and invades it, displacing one strand as a D-loop.
- Synthesis. A DNA polymerase extends the invading 3' end, using the homolog as template. This copies any sequence lost at the break.
- Second end capture. The enlarged D-loop pairs with the other 3' tail, which is also extended. Ligation of the ends produces two Holliday junctions, a double Holliday junction.
- Resolution. The two junctions are cut by resolvases or, in somatic cells, dissolved by a helicase and topoisomerase complex. If the two junctions are cut in the same orientation the outcome is a noncrossover; if they are cut in opposite orientations the outcome is a crossover.
Many breaks never form a double Holliday junction. In synthesis-dependent strand annealing (SDSA), the invading strand is extended, released from the D-loop and annealed back to the other tail on its own chromosome. SDSA always gives a noncrossover, which is why most double-strand breaks in mitotic cells are repaired without exchanging chromosome arms. This matters because a mitotic crossover can cause loss of heterozygosity, unmasking a recessive tumor suppressor mutation (Chapter 13).
The bacterial machinery
Much of what we know about recombination enzymes was worked out in E. coli. The RecBCD complex binds a double-stranded end and travels along it, unwinding and degrading DNA, until it meets a short sequence called Chi (5'-GCTGGTGG-3'). At Chi, RecBCD stops degrading the 3' strand and loads RecA onto it. RecA is the bacterial counterpart of Rad51: it polymerizes on single-stranded DNA, searches for homology and catalyzes strand invasion. The RuvA and RuvB proteins bind Holliday junctions and drive branch migration, and RuvC resolves them by symmetric nicks.
| Step | E. coli | Eukaryotes |
|---|---|---|
| Make the break (meiosis) | Not applicable | Spo11 |
| Resect 5' ends | RecBCD (regulated by Chi) | MRN complex with CtIP, then Exo1 and Dna2 |
| Coat single strand | SSB | RPA |
| Strand exchange recombinase | RecA | Rad51 (mitosis and meiosis), Dmc1 (meiosis) |
| Load the recombinase | RecBCD | BRCA2 (with BRCA1 and PALB2) |
| Branch migration | RuvAB | Several helicases |
| Resolve or dissolve junctions | RuvC | GEN1, MUS81 complexes (resolution); BLM helicase with topoisomerase III (dissolution, noncrossover only) |
Gene conversion
Mendel's first law predicts that a heterozygote A/a produces meiotic products in a 2:2 ratio of A to a. In fungi such as Neurospora and Sordaria, where all products of a single meiosis stay together in an ascus, and where a postmeiotic mitosis turns the four products into eight spores (an octad), the normal ratio is 4:4. Occasionally, however, an ascus shows 6:2 or 2:6, meaning one allele was converted into the other, or 5:3 and 3:5, meaning one spore pair contains both alleles. This nonreciprocal transfer of information is gene conversion.
Recombination explains both kinds of aberrant ascus. When a heteroduplex forms across a site where the parents differ, the two strands of that region carry different alleles and form a mismatch. If mismatch repair corrects the mismatch, it may restore the original allele (giving a normal 4:4) or convert it to match the invading strand (giving 6:2 or 2:6). If the mismatch escapes repair, the two strands separate at the next DNA replication, the postmeiotic mitosis, and one spore pair becomes a non-identical pair, giving 5:3 or 3:5, an event called postmeiotic segregation. Gap repair in the DSBR model also converts: sequence lost by resection at the break is replaced by copying from the homolog.
Homologous recombination repairs double-strand breaks and generates meiotic crossovers using the same steps: resection to 3' tails, Rad51 (RecA) strand invasion, synthesis, and either strand annealing (noncrossover) or a double Holliday junction that is resolved as a crossover or a noncrossover. Mismatches in heteroduplex DNA, repaired or not, produce gene conversion, seen as 6:2 and 5:3 octads in fungi.
Section 4Mutation types, causes and rates
Kinds of mutation
A mutation is any heritable change in DNA sequence. Mutations in germ-line cells can be passed to offspring; somatic mutations arise in body cells and are passed only to that cell's descendants, as in cancer. Here we treat changes of one or a few nucleotides; larger changes were covered in Chapter 6.
The simplest gene mutation is a base substitution. A transition replaces a purine with the other purine or a pyrimidine with the other pyrimidine (A:T to G:C or G:C to A:T). A transversion replaces a purine with a pyrimidine or the reverse (for example G:C to T:A). Although there are twice as many possible transversions, transitions are more common, because deamination and tautomeric mispairing produce transitions. Insertions and deletions (indels) add or remove nucleotides. If the number added or removed is not a multiple of three in a coding region, the reading frame shifts and every downstream codon is misread; this is a frameshift mutation, and it nearly always destroys protein function, usually by reaching a premature stop codon soon after the shift.
Mutations are also classified by their effect on the protein:
- A synonymous (silent) mutation changes a codon to another codon for the same amino acid, most often at the third position.
- A missense mutation changes one amino acid to another. A conservative missense change swaps similar amino acids (leucine to isoleucine) and may be harmless; a nonconservative change swaps dissimilar ones and is more likely to disrupt structure.
- A nonsense mutation changes an amino acid codon into a stop codon, truncating the protein. Messenger RNAs with premature stop codons are often destroyed by nonsense-mediated decay (Chapter 8).
- A splice-site mutation alters the signals for intron removal, often causing exon skipping or intron retention.
- A regulatory mutation in a promoter or enhancer changes how much protein is made rather than what kind.
A forward mutation changes the wild type to a mutant; a reverse mutation (reversion) restores the wild-type phenotype, either by restoring the original sequence or by a second change. A suppressor mutation is a second mutation at a different site that hides the effect of the first; it may be intragenic (a compensating change in the same gene, such as a +1 frameshift near a −1 frameshift) or intergenic (for example, a mutant tRNA that reads a stop codon as an amino acid). Loss-of-function mutations are usually recessive; gain-of-function mutations, which give a protein a new or excessive activity, are usually dominant.
| Change in DNA (coding strand) | Codon change | Class | Effect |
|---|---|---|---|
| G to A at third position | CAG (Gln) to CAA (Gln) | Transition, synonymous | No amino acid change |
| A to T at second position | GAG (Glu) to GTG (Val) | Transversion, missense | Sickle cell hemoglobin, beta chain position 6 |
| G to A at third position | TGG (Trp) to TGA (stop) | Transition, nonsense | Truncated protein |
| Deletion of one T | Reading frame shifts after the deletion | Frameshift | Garbled sequence, early stop |
| Deletion of CTT (3 bp) | One codon lost, frame kept | In-frame deletion | Loss of one amino acid (as in the F508del allele of the cystic fibrosis gene) |
| CAG repeat grows from 20 to 45 copies | Longer polyglutamine tract | Repeat expansion | Huntington disease |
Expanding repeats
In trinucleotide repeat expansions, a run of a three-base repeat becomes unstable past a threshold length and tends to grow in each generation. In Huntington disease, a CAG repeat encoding polyglutamine in the huntingtin gene causes disease at 40 or more copies (36 to 39 copies give incomplete penetrance). In fragile X syndrome, a CGG repeat in the 5' untranslated region of FMR1 is normal below about 45 copies, a premutation from about 55 to 200, and a full mutation above 200, at which point the gene is methylated and silenced. Myotonic dystrophy type 1 involves a CTG repeat in a 3' untranslated region. Because longer repeats are more unstable and cause earlier, more severe disease, these disorders show anticipation: symptoms appear earlier or more severely in successive generations.
Spontaneous mutation
Many mutations arise without any outside agent:
- Replication errors. Despite proofreading, polymerases occasionally insert the wrong base. Rare tautomeric shifts (the amino to imino form of adenine or cytosine, the keto to enol form of guanine or thymine) and wobble pairing allow mispairs such as G:T and A:C, which become transitions after the next round of replication.
- Strand slippage. In runs of a repeated base or short repeat, the new or template strand can loop out, producing small insertions or deletions. These create mutational hot spots in repetitive sequences.
- Depurination. The bond joining a purine base to deoxyribose breaks spontaneously, roughly 10,000 times per human cell per day, leaving an apurinic (AP) site with no base to guide replication.
- Deamination. Cytosine loses its amino group to become uracil, which pairs with adenine; if unrepaired, G:C becomes A:T. Cells recognize uracil as foreign in DNA and remove it efficiently. But deamination of 5-methylcytosine yields thymine, a normal DNA base, so the resulting G:T mismatch is repaired less reliably. That is why methylated CpG sites are the strongest mutational hot spots in mammalian genomes, mutating 10 to 50 times faster than other sites.
- Oxidative damage. Reactive oxygen species from normal metabolism convert guanine to 8-oxoguanine, which pairs with adenine and so causes G:C to T:A transversions.
Induced mutation and mutagens
Mutagens raise the mutation rate, and knowing how each acts predicts the kind of change it causes.
| Mutagen | Mechanism | Typical mutation |
|---|---|---|
| 5-bromouracil (5-BU) | Thymine analog; its enol form pairs with G | Transitions in both directions |
| 2-aminopurine | Adenine analog that can pair with C | Transitions (A:T to G:C and reverse) |
| Ethyl methanesulfonate (EMS) and other alkylating agents | Adds ethyl or methyl groups; O6-alkylguanine pairs with T | G:C to A:T transitions |
| Nitrous acid | Deaminates C to U and A to hypoxanthine (pairs with C) | Transitions |
| Hydroxylamine | Adds a hydroxyl to the amino group of C so it pairs with A | G:C to A:T transitions only |
| Acridine dyes (proflavin), ethidium bromide | Intercalate between stacked bases | Frameshifts (single base insertions and deletions) |
| Aflatoxin B1, benzo[a]pyrene (after metabolic activation) | Bulky adducts on guanine | G:C to T:A transversions |
| Ultraviolet light (UVB, UVC) | Joins adjacent pyrimidines: cyclobutane dimers and 6-4 photoproducts | C to T and CC to TT transitions at dipyrimidines |
| Ionizing radiation (X rays, gamma rays) | Free radicals; single- and double-strand breaks | Deletions and chromosome rearrangements |
The Ames test, developed by Bruce Ames in the 1970s, screens chemicals for mutagenic potential. It uses strains of Salmonella carrying mutations in a histidine synthesis gene (his−), so they cannot grow without added histidine. Tester strains carry substitution or frameshift alleles and lack excision repair. Because many compounds become mutagenic only after liver metabolism, the chemical is mixed with a liver extract (S9 fraction). The bacteria are plated on medium without histidine, and only cells in which a new mutation has reverted the his− allele can form colonies. More revertant colonies than on a control plate indicates a mutagen, and most chemical carcinogens score as mutagens.
Mutations are random: the fluctuation test
Do mutations arise at random, or are they induced by the selective condition that reveals them? In 1943 Salvador Luria and Max Delbrück addressed this with bacteria and phage T1. They grew many small, separate cultures of E. coli from a few cells each, then plated each entire culture on phage-coated plates and counted resistant colonies. If resistance were induced by contact with phage, every culture would give a similar small number, with a variance about equal to the mean (a Poisson distribution). Instead, the counts fluctuated wildly: most cultures had zero or a few resistant cells, while a few had hundreds. This "jackpot" pattern is expected if mutations occur randomly during growth: an early mutation leaves many resistant descendants, a late one only a few. Joshua and Esther Lederberg confirmed this with replica plating, showing resistant colonies existed before exposure to phage.
The fluctuation test also gives a way to measure the mutation rate, the probability of a mutation per cell per division (or per gene per generation). The simplest version, the P0 method, uses the fraction of cultures with no mutants. If mutations occur at random, the number of mutational events per culture follows a Poisson distribution with mean m, so the fraction of cultures with no mutational events is P0 = e−m, and m = −ln P0. Dividing m by the number of cell divisions in a culture (approximately the final number of cells) gives the rate.
How often mutations happen
Mutation rates are usually quoted at two scales. Per gene, forward mutation rates typically fall between 10-5 and 10-7 per generation. Per nucleotide, the human germ-line rate is about 1.2 × 10-8 per base pair per generation. With a diploid genome of about 6.2 × 109 bp, that predicts 1.2 × 10-8 × 6.2 × 109 = about 74 new point mutations in each child, in line with the 60 to 75 measured by sequencing parents and children. Most arise in the father, whose sperm precursors keep dividing throughout life. RNA viruses, whose polymerases lack proofreading, mutate on the order of 10-4 per nucleotide per replication, which is why influenza and HIV evolve so rapidly.
Base substitutions are transitions or transversions and can be silent, missense or nonsense; indels in coding sequence cause frameshifts; and unstable trinucleotide repeats cause disorders with anticipation. Mutations arise spontaneously from replication errors, slippage, depurination, deamination and oxidation, or are induced by mutagens whose chemistry predicts their effects. The fluctuation test showed that mutations are random rather than directed, and the zero class gives a mutation rate.
Section 5DNA repair systems and transposable elements
Direct reversal
The simplest repair undoes the damage chemically without removing anything. Photolyase uses the energy of visible light to split cyclobutane pyrimidine dimers back into separate bases, a process called photoreactivation; it works in bacteria, fungi, plants and many animals but is absent from placental mammals. O6-methylguanine DNA methyltransferase (MGMT) transfers the methyl group from O6-methylguanine onto one of its own cysteines. The enzyme is inactivated by the reaction, so it is called a suicide enzyme.
Excision repair
Base excision repair (BER) handles small lesions that do not distort the helix: uracil, 8-oxoguanine, alkylated and deaminated bases. A DNA glycosylase specific for one kind of damage flips the base out and cuts the bond to its sugar, leaving an AP site. AP endonuclease nicks the backbone, DNA polymerase (pol β in mammals) inserts the correct nucleotide, and ligase seals the strand. Using thymine rather than uracil in DNA lets cells treat any uracil as deaminated cytosine.
Nucleotide excision repair (NER) handles bulky lesions that distort the helix, chiefly UV dimers and chemical adducts. In E. coli, UvrA and UvrB find the distortion, UvrC cuts the damaged strand on both sides, and UvrD helicase removes an oligonucleotide of 12 to 13 nucleotides; pol I and ligase fill the gap. In humans the same logic uses about 30 proteins, including the XP proteins and the helicases of TFIIH, and removes 24 to 32 nucleotides. Transcription-coupled NER repairs lesions that stall RNA polymerase faster than global genome NER.
Mismatch repair
Mismatch repair corrects replication errors that escaped proofreading. The key problem is deciding which strand is wrong. In E. coli the answer comes from methylation: the Dam methylase adds methyl groups to the A of every GATC sequence, but only after a delay, so just behind the fork the new strand is briefly unmethylated. MutS recognizes the mismatch, MutL links it to MutH, and MutH nicks the unmethylated (new) strand at a nearby GATC. An exonuclease removes the new strand past the mismatch and pol III resynthesizes it. Eukaryotes use MutS and MutL homologs (MSH2, MLH1 and others) and recognize the new strand by its nicks.
Double-strand breaks and damage tolerance
Double-strand breaks are repaired by two main routes. Homologous recombination (Section 3) is accurate but needs a sister chromatid, so it operates in S and G2. Nonhomologous end joining (NHEJ) works throughout the cycle: the Ku70/Ku80 heterodimer binds the broken ends, recruits DNA-PKcs, and the ends are trimmed and joined by DNA ligase IV. NHEJ often adds or loses a few nucleotides, so it is error prone. Lesions that block replication can also be bypassed rather than repaired. In E. coli, single-stranded DNA at stalled forks activates RecA, which stimulates self-cleavage of the LexA repressor and induces more than 40 genes of the SOS response, including the error-prone translesion polymerases pol IV and pol V. Humans have several translesion polymerases; pol η correctly inserts two A's opposite a thymine dimer.
| Pathway | Damage repaired | Key proteins | Human disorder when defective |
|---|---|---|---|
| Direct reversal | UV dimers; O6-alkylguanine | Photolyase (not in placental mammals); MGMT | MGMT silencing in some tumors |
| Base excision | Uracil, 8-oxoG, small base damage | Glycosylases, AP endonuclease, pol β | MUTYH polyposis (colon polyps) |
| Nucleotide excision | UV dimers, bulky adducts | UvrABC; XPA to XPG, TFIIH | Xeroderma pigmentosum; Cockayne syndrome |
| Mismatch repair | Replication mismatches, small loops | MutS, MutL, MutH; MSH2, MLH1 | Lynch syndrome (hereditary colorectal cancer) |
| Homologous recombination | Double-strand breaks, collapsed forks | RecA; Rad51, BRCA1, BRCA2 | Hereditary breast and ovarian cancer; Fanconi anemia |
| Nonhomologous end joining | Double-strand breaks | Ku70/80, DNA-PKcs, ligase IV | Severe combined immunodeficiency (V(D)J joining fails) |
| Translesion synthesis | Bypass of blocking lesions | Pol IV, pol V (SOS); pol η | Xeroderma pigmentosum variant (pol η) |
Transposable elements
Transposable elements are DNA sequences that move from one place in the genome to another. Barbara McClintock discovered them in maize in the 1940s, when the Ds (Dissociation) element moved only in the presence of Ac (Activator), which supplies the enzyme; Ds is a defective copy. Two main classes exist.
- Class II, DNA transposons, move as DNA. Each carries short terminal inverted repeats recognized by the transposase it encodes. Bacterial insertion sequences (IS elements), 0.7 to 2.5 kb, carry only a transposase gene. Composite transposons such as Tn10 are two IS elements flanking other genes, often antibiotic resistance genes. Most DNA transposons move by cut-and-paste (conservative) transposition; others, such as Tn3, use replicative transposition, leaving a copy behind.
- Class I, retrotransposons, move through an RNA intermediate that is reverse transcribed, so they copy and paste. LTR retrotransposons (yeast Ty1) resemble retroviruses. LINEs such as human L1 (about 6 kb, roughly 17 percent of the human genome) encode their own reverse transcriptase. SINEs such as Alu (about 300 bp, over one million copies, about 10 percent of the genome) encode nothing and borrow L1 enzymes.
Almost every insertion creates a target site duplication: the enzyme makes staggered cuts in the target, the element is joined to the overhangs, and repair synthesis copies the single-stranded regions, leaving a short direct repeat (typically 2 to 12 bp) on each side. Nearly half of the human genome derives from transposable elements, although only a few dozen L1 copies remain active.
Transposons mutate genes by inserting into coding sequence or regulatory regions, and they drive larger rearrangements when recombination occurs between copies. Mendel's wrinkled pea allele is caused by a transposon-like insertion in a starch branching enzyme gene, and new L1 insertions into the factor VIII gene have caused hemophilia A.
Cells match each repair pathway to a kind of damage: direct reversal for simple chemical changes, base excision for small base lesions, nucleotide excision for bulky distortions, mismatch repair for replication errors, homologous recombination and NHEJ for double-strand breaks, and translesion synthesis for bypass. Defects cause cancer predisposition syndromes. Transposable elements move by cut-and-paste, replicative or RNA-mediated mechanisms, leave target site duplications, and make up nearly half of our genome.
The chapter in one breath
- The Meselson and Stahl experiment showed that replication is semiconservative: one hybrid band after one generation, hybrid and light bands after two.
- Polymerases extend only 3' ends and need primers, so forks have a continuous leading strand and a lagging strand of Okazaki fragments.
- In E. coli, helicase, SSB, gyrase, primase, pol III, pol I and ligase replicate the genome from oriC; base selection, proofreading and mismatch repair hold errors near 10-9 to 10-10.
- Eukaryotic origins are licensed in G1 and fired once in S; pol α-primase starts chains, pol ε and pol δ extend them, and PCNA is the clamp.
- Telomerase, a reverse transcriptase with an RNA template, extends TTAGGG repeats to solve the end replication problem; most somatic cells lack it and senesce.
- Homologous recombination runs from resection and Rad51 strand invasion to a double Holliday junction resolved as a crossover or noncrossover; mismatches in heteroduplex DNA cause gene conversion.
- Base substitutions are transitions or transversions and can be silent, missense or nonsense; indels cause frameshifts; repeat expansions cause anticipation.
- Deamination of 5-methylcytosine makes CpG sites hot spots; 8-oxoguanine causes G:C to T:A transversions; UV causes dimers and alkylating agents cause transitions.
- The fluctuation test showed that mutations arise at random, and P0 = e−m gives the mutation rate; the human germ-line rate is about 1.2 × 10-8 per bp per generation.
- Repair pathways (direct reversal, BER, NER, mismatch repair, HR, NHEJ, translesion synthesis) match specific damage, and their defects cause xeroderma pigmentosum, Lynch syndrome and BRCA-related cancers.
- Transposable elements move as DNA or through RNA, create target site duplications, and make up nearly half of the human genome.
Words worth knowing
| Term | What it means |
|---|---|
| Semiconservative replication | Copying in which each daughter duplex has one parental strand and one new strand. |
| Primase | The enzyme that makes the short RNA primers DNA polymerases need to start synthesis. |
| Leading strand | The new strand made continuously in the direction the fork moves. |
| Lagging strand | The new strand made discontinuously, away from the fork, as Okazaki fragments. |
| Okazaki fragment | A short primed piece of lagging strand DNA later joined by ligase. |
| Proofreading | Removal of a just-added wrong nucleotide by a polymerase's 3' to 5' exonuclease. |
| Telomere | The repeated TTAGGG sequence and bound proteins that cap a chromosome end. |
| Telomerase | A reverse transcriptase with its own RNA template that adds telomere repeats. |
| Holliday junction | A four-armed DNA structure where two duplexes have exchanged strands. |
| Gene conversion | Nonreciprocal transfer of sequence, giving ratios such as 6:2 instead of 4:4. |
| Transition | A substitution of a purine for a purine or a pyrimidine for a pyrimidine. |
| Transversion | A substitution of a purine for a pyrimidine or the reverse. |
| Missense mutation | A substitution that changes one amino acid to another. |
| Nonsense mutation | A substitution that creates a premature stop codon. |
| Frameshift mutation | An insertion or deletion, not a multiple of three, that shifts the reading frame. |
| Anticipation | Earlier or more severe disease in successive generations, typical of repeat expansions. |
| Fluctuation test | Comparison of mutant counts among parallel cultures showing mutations arise randomly. |
| Base excision repair | Repair that removes a single damaged base with a glycosylase, then replaces the nucleotide. |
| Nucleotide excision repair | Repair that cuts out an oligonucleotide containing a bulky, helix-distorting lesion. |
| Mismatch repair | Correction of replication mismatches by removing part of the newly made strand. |
| Nonhomologous end joining | Error-prone rejoining of broken DNA ends without a template. |
| Transposable element | A DNA sequence that can move to new positions in the genome. |
| Target site duplication | A short direct repeat of host DNA left on both sides of an inserted element. |
Check yourself
Transcription, RNA Processing and Translation
A gene is only a promise until it is expressed. In this chapter you follow information from DNA to RNA to protein: how RNA polymerase finds a gene and copies it, how eukaryotic cells cap, cut, splice and tail the transcript, how a triplet code was cracked with synthetic RNAs, and how the ribosome, itself a machine made largely of RNA, reads that code to build a protein. Nearly every mutation, drug and disease you meet later in genetics acts somewhere along this path.
By the end of this chapter you can
- Identify the template and coding strands of a gene and write the RNA transcribed from either.
- Describe the bacterial RNA polymerase holoenzyme, the −10 and −35 promoter elements and the two kinds of termination.
- Compare the three eukaryotic RNA polymerases and explain how general transcription factors, the TATA box, enhancers and the CTD control RNA polymerase II.
- Explain how the 5' cap, splicing and polyadenylation convert pre-mRNA into mature mRNA, and describe alternative splicing and RNA editing.
- Summarize the experiments that showed the genetic code is a nonoverlapping triplet code and use the codon table to translate a sequence in any reading frame.
- Apply the wobble rules to predict which codons a tRNA can read.
- Describe tRNA charging, the ribosome and its A, P and E sites, and the steps of initiation, elongation and termination in bacteria and eukaryotes.
- Explain how proteins are targeted, folded and modified after synthesis, and how antibiotics and toxins block translation.
Section 1Transcription in bacteria
Template, coding strand and direction
Transcription is the synthesis of RNA using one strand of DNA as a template. Like DNA polymerase, RNA polymerase joins nucleotides (here ribonucleoside triphosphates: ATP, GTP, CTP and UTP) to the 3' end of the growing chain, so RNA is always made 5' to 3' and the template is read 3' to 5'. Unlike DNA polymerase, RNA polymerase needs no primer; it can start a chain from scratch. It also unwinds DNA itself, so no separate helicase is required.
The DNA strand that is read is the template strand (also called the antisense or noncoding strand). The other strand, the coding strand (sense or nontemplate strand), has the same sequence as the RNA except that the RNA contains uracil where the DNA has thymine. By convention, gene sequences are written as the coding strand, 5' to 3', so that they read like the mRNA. Different genes on the same chromosome may use different strands as template; what matters is the orientation of each gene's promoter. Positions are numbered relative to the first transcribed nucleotide, +1; nucleotides before it, in the upstream direction, have negative numbers, and there is no position 0.
RNA polymerase and sigma factors
Bacteria have a single RNA polymerase that makes all their RNAs. The core enzyme has five subunits, written α2ββ'ω. The β and β' subunits form the catalytic site and the channels for DNA and RNA; the two α subunits assemble the enzyme and contact some regulators; ω helps assembly. The core enzyme can elongate RNA but cannot find promoters. That job belongs to the sigma (σ) factor, which joins the core to form the holoenzyme. In E. coli, the housekeeping factor σ70 directs transcription of most genes. Alternative sigma factors recognize different promoter sequences and switch on whole sets of genes at once: σ32 for heat shock genes, σS for stationary phase and stress, σ54 for nitrogen metabolism and σ28 for flagellar genes. Bacteria that form spores use a cascade of sigma factors to control development.
The promoter
A promoter is the DNA sequence where the holoenzyme binds and starts transcription. Comparing hundreds of σ70 promoters reveals two conserved hexamers on the coding strand. The −35 element has the consensus TTGACA, and the −10 element (the Pribnow box) has the consensus TATAAT. They are separated by a spacer of 16 to 18 bp, with 17 bp optimal, which places both elements on the same face of the helix where σ can contact them. Region 4 of σ binds the −35 element and region 2 binds the −10 element. A consensus sequence is the most common base at each position; few real promoters match it exactly, and in general the closer a promoter is to consensus, the stronger it is. Very strong promoters, such as those of ribosomal RNA genes, also carry an AT-rich UP element upstream of −35 that is bound by the C-terminal domain of the α subunits.
Initiation, elongation and the transcription bubble
Initiation proceeds in stages. The holoenzyme first binds the promoter as a closed complex in which the DNA is still double stranded. It then unwinds about 13 bp from roughly −11 to +2, forming the open complex. The AT-rich −10 element is where melting begins, which is one reason that TATAAT is AT rich. The polymerase starts synthesis at +1, usually with a purine, but it often makes and releases short transcripts of 2 to 10 nucleotides before it breaks free of the promoter, a process called abortive initiation. Once the RNA is about 10 to 15 nucleotides long, the enzyme undergoes promoter escape, σ is usually released, and the core enzyme continues as an elongation complex.
During elongation, the polymerase maintains a transcription bubble of about 12 to 14 unpaired base pairs, within which the newest 8 to 9 nucleotides of RNA are base paired to the template as an RNA:DNA hybrid. DNA rewinds behind the bubble and the RNA peels away. Bacterial RNA polymerase adds roughly 40 to 80 nucleotides per second. Its error rate, about 1 in 104 to 105, is much higher than that of DNA replication; a limited form of proofreading, in which the enzyme backs up and cleaves off a misincorporated nucleotide, improves it somewhat. Errors in RNA matter less than errors in DNA because each RNA is one of many short-lived copies.
In bacteria there is no nucleus, so ribosomes begin translating an mRNA while its 3' end is still being made. This coupling of transcription and translation is important for regulation (as in attenuation, Chapter 9). Bacterial mRNAs are often polycistronic, carrying the coding sequences of several genes of an operon, each with its own ribosome binding site.
Termination
Bacteria end transcription in two ways. At an intrinsic (Rho-independent) terminator, the DNA contains a GC-rich inverted repeat followed by a run of about 7 to 8 A's on the template strand. As the inverted repeat is transcribed, the RNA folds back on itself into a stable hairpin (stem-loop) that pulls on the RNA in the polymerase exit channel. The run of U's that follows forms an RNA:DNA hybrid held only by weak A:U pairs, and the combination of hairpin and weak hybrid causes the RNA to dissociate. Rho-dependent termination requires the protein Rho, a ring-shaped hexameric helicase. Rho binds the RNA at a rut site (Rho utilization site), a stretch rich in C and poor in G that is not covered by ribosomes, and uses ATP to move 5' to 3' along the RNA. When the polymerase pauses at a termination site, Rho catches up and pulls the RNA out of the complex.
| Feature | Intrinsic terminator | Rho-dependent terminator |
|---|---|---|
| Protein needed | None besides RNA polymerase | Rho hexamer (helicase, uses ATP) |
| Signal in the RNA | GC-rich hairpin followed by about 8 U's | C-rich, G-poor rut site upstream of the stop point |
| How release happens | Hairpin destabilizes complex; weak A:U hybrid lets go | Rho translocates 5' to 3' and pulls RNA from a paused polymerase |
| Effect of tight ribosome coverage | Little effect | Blocks Rho access, so translation can prevent termination |
RNA polymerase makes RNA 5' to 3' from the template strand without a primer, so the RNA matches the coding strand with U for T. In bacteria, sigma directs the core enzyme to promoters with −35 (TTGACA) and −10 (TATAAT) elements; the enzyme melts DNA, escapes the promoter and elongates within a moving bubble. Transcription ends at intrinsic hairpin-plus-U-tract terminators or with the help of the Rho helicase.
Section 2Transcription in eukaryotes
Three nuclear RNA polymerases
Eukaryotic nuclei contain three RNA polymerases, each a complex of 12 or more subunits, and each responsible for a different class of genes. Plants have two more (Pol IV and Pol V) that make small RNAs for gene silencing, and mitochondria and chloroplasts have their own simpler polymerases. The three nuclear enzymes were first distinguished by their sensitivity to α-amanitin, a cyclic peptide toxin from the death cap mushroom.
| Polymerase | Main products | Location | α-amanitin sensitivity |
|---|---|---|---|
| RNA polymerase I | 45S pre-rRNA, processed into 28S, 18S and 5.8S rRNA | Nucleolus | Resistant |
| RNA polymerase II | All pre-mRNAs; most snRNAs; microRNA precursors; most long noncoding RNAs | Nucleoplasm | Very sensitive (blocked at low concentrations) |
| RNA polymerase III | tRNAs, 5S rRNA, U6 snRNA, 7SL RNA of the signal recognition particle | Nucleoplasm | Moderately sensitive (blocked only at high concentrations) |
Unlike bacterial RNA polymerase with sigma, none of the eukaryotic enzymes can recognize a promoter by itself. Each depends on a set of general transcription factors that bind the promoter first and then recruit the polymerase. Pol I and Pol III use their own factor sets (for example, TFIIIA, TFIIIB and TFIIIC for Pol III, some of which bind internal promoters located inside the transcribed region of tRNA and 5S rRNA genes). Because protein-coding genes are the focus of most genetics, the rest of this section concentrates on Pol II.
The core promoter and the general transcription factors
The core promoter is the minimal region, roughly −40 to +40, where the transcription machinery assembles. Its best-known element is the TATA box, consensus TATA(A/T)A(A/T), located about 25 to 30 bp upstream of the start site. Only about 10 to 20 percent of human promoters have a recognizable TATA box. Others depend on an initiator (Inr) element spanning +1, a downstream promoter element (DPE) near +30, or a TFIIB recognition element (BRE) just upstream of the TATA box. Many housekeeping genes have TATA-less promoters embedded in CpG islands. Just upstream of the core, proximal promoter elements such as the GC box (bound by Sp1) and the CAAT box (bound by NF-Y) raise the rate of transcription.
On a TATA-containing promoter, the general factors assemble in a well-studied order to form the preinitiation complex (PIC):
- TFIID binds first. Its subunit TBP (TATA-binding protein) grips the TATA box through the minor groove and bends the DNA by about 80 degrees; the other subunits, the TBP-associated factors (TAFs), recognize Inr and DPE and contact activators. TBP is also used by Pol I and Pol III, making it a universal eukaryotic factor.
- TFIIA stabilizes TBP binding, and TFIIB binds TBP and the BRE, forming a platform that positions the polymerase and helps select the start site.
- Pol II arrives bound to TFIIF.
- TFIIE joins and recruits TFIIH, the last factor. TFIIH has two critical activities: an ATP-dependent DNA translocase (the XPB subunit) that opens the promoter DNA, and a kinase (CDK7) that phosphorylates the polymerase's tail.
That tail is the C-terminal domain (CTD) of the largest Pol II subunit, a series of repeats of the seven amino acids Tyr-Ser-Pro-Thr-Ser-Pro-Ser (52 repeats in humans, 26 in yeast). The polymerase that enters the PIC has an unphosphorylated CTD. Phosphorylation of serine 5 by TFIIH helps the polymerase break its contacts with the promoter factors and escape. Many genes then pause about 20 to 60 nucleotides downstream until the kinase P-TEFb (CDK9) phosphorylates serine 2, releasing the polymerase into productive elongation. The changing pattern of CTD phosphorylation acts as a code read by RNA processing factors: serine 5 phosphorylation recruits the capping enzymes, and serine 2 phosphorylation recruits splicing and 3'-end processing factors as the gene is transcribed. This is why processing is cotranscriptional.
Enhancers, activators and chromatin
The general factors alone support only a low, basal level of transcription. High-level, regulated transcription needs activators, sequence-specific DNA-binding proteins that bind enhancers. Enhancers are short regulatory regions that can lie upstream, downstream or within introns, sometimes tens or hundreds of kilobases from the promoter, and still work when their orientation is reversed. DNA looping brings an enhancer near its promoter, and the large Mediator complex carries the signal from activators to the PIC. Activators also recruit enzymes that modify or move nucleosomes, because promoter DNA wrapped in nucleosomes is largely inaccessible. Silencers bind repressors that do the opposite. Chapter 9 develops this regulation in detail.
Termination of Pol II transcription
Pol II has no fixed termination sequence. Instead, termination is coupled to 3'-end processing (Section 3). When the polymerase transcribes the polyadenylation signal AAUAAA, the processing machinery binds it from the CTD, and the RNA is cleaved downstream. The polymerase keeps going, but the cleavage leaves an uncapped 5' end on the RNA still emerging from it. A 5' to 3' exonuclease, Xrn2 in humans, attacks that end, degrades the RNA faster than it is made and dislodges the polymerase, often hundreds to thousands of bases past the poly(A) site. This is the torpedo model. Pol III, by contrast, terminates at a simple run of T's in the coding strand, and Pol I uses a terminator-binding protein.
| Element or factor | Location or role | Bacterial analog |
|---|---|---|
| TATA box | About −25 to −30; bound by TBP | −10 element (both are AT rich) |
| Initiator (Inr) | Spans +1 | Start site region |
| GC box, CAAT box | Proximal promoter, about −40 to −150 | UP element (loosely) |
| Enhancer | Any position, any orientation, often far away | Activator sites in some operons |
| TFIID, TFIIB | Recognize the promoter and position the polymerase | Sigma factor |
| TFIIH | Opens DNA, phosphorylates CTD serine 5; also works in repair | None (bacterial polymerase melts DNA itself) |
Eukaryotes use Pol I for large rRNAs, Pol II for mRNAs and most snRNAs and Pol III for tRNAs and 5S rRNA. Pol II needs general transcription factors that assemble on the core promoter in order: TFIID (TBP on the TATA box), TFIIA, TFIIB, Pol II with TFIIF, TFIIE and TFIIH. Phosphorylation of the CTD on serine 5 and then serine 2 drives escape and elongation and recruits RNA processing factors, activators on distant enhancers act through Mediator, and termination follows poly(A) site cleavage by the torpedo mechanism.
Section 3RNA processing: capping, splicing, polyadenylation
A bacterial mRNA can be translated as it is made. A eukaryotic transcript must first be converted from pre-mRNA into mature mRNA, then exported from the nucleus. Three main modifications occur, all while transcription is still under way: a cap is added to the 5' end, introns are removed by splicing, and the 3' end is cut and given a poly(A) tail. The collection of unprocessed nuclear transcripts is sometimes called heterogeneous nuclear RNA (hnRNA).
The 5' cap
When the RNA is only about 20 to 30 nucleotides long, three enzymes, recruited by the serine 5 phosphorylated CTD, add the cap. An RNA triphosphatase removes the outermost phosphate of the first nucleotide; a guanylyltransferase adds GMP from GTP in an unusual 5' to 5' triphosphate linkage; and a methyltransferase methylates the guanine at position N7 using S-adenosylmethionine. The result, 7-methylguanosine (m7G) joined by a 5'-5' triphosphate bridge, is called cap 0. In vertebrates the 2'-OH of the first one or two transcribed nucleotides is also methylated (cap 1, cap 2), which helps the innate immune system distinguish the cell's own RNA from viral RNA. The cap protects the mRNA from 5' to 3' exonucleases, is needed for efficient splicing of the first intron and for export, and is recognized by eIF4E during translation initiation.
Introns and exons
Most eukaryotic genes are interrupted by introns, intervening sequences that are transcribed but removed, separated by exons, the sequences that remain in mature RNA. Introns were discovered in 1977 when adenovirus mRNA hybridized to its DNA left loops of unpaired DNA. A typical human protein-coding gene has about 8 to 9 introns. Exons average roughly 150 nucleotides, while introns average several thousand, so introns make up most of the length of many genes. Exons include untranslated regions as well as coding sequence: the first exon usually contains the 5' untranslated region (5' UTR) and the last contains the 3' UTR.
The spliceosome and the chemistry of splicing
Nuclear pre-mRNA introns carry short conserved signals. The 5' splice site begins the intron with GU (consensus exon...AG | GURAGU), the 3' splice site ends it with AG, and a branch point containing a critical adenosine lies about 18 to 40 nucleotides upstream of the 3' end, followed by a polypyrimidine tract. The nearly invariant GU and AG give the GU-AG rule.
Splicing is carried out by the spliceosome, a large complex of five small nuclear ribonucleoproteins (snRNPs), called U1, U2, U4, U5 and U6, plus more than 100 proteins. Each snRNP contains a short snRNA that base pairs with the pre-mRNA or with other snRNAs. U1 pairs with the 5' splice site; the protein U2AF binds the polypyrimidine tract and the AG; and U2 pairs with the branch point, bulging out the branch adenosine. The U4/U6.U5 tri-snRNP then joins, and a series of ATP-driven rearrangements releases U1 and U4. U6 replaces U1 at the 5' splice site and pairs with U2, forming an RNA catalytic center that binds two magnesium ions. The spliceosome is therefore a ribozyme, an RNA enzyme.
The chemistry is two transesterification reactions. In step 1, the 2'-OH of the branch-point adenosine attacks the phosphate at the 5' splice site. Exon 1 is released with a free 3'-OH, and the 5' end of the intron becomes linked to the branch A by an unusual 2'-5' phosphodiester bond, forming a looped lariat. In step 2, the 3'-OH of exon 1 attacks the phosphate at the 3' splice site, joining exon 1 to exon 2 and releasing the intron as a lariat, which is debranched and degraded. Each step exchanges one phosphodiester bond for another, so no net energy is needed for the chemistry itself; ATP is spent on the rearrangements that ensure accuracy.
Not all introns need a spliceosome. Group I introns, found in some rRNA, organelle and phage genes, splice themselves using a free guanosine as the attacking nucleophile; Thomas Cech's discovery of self-splicing in Tetrahymena rRNA was the first demonstration that RNA can be a catalyst. Group II introns, in organelles and bacteria, also self-splice but form a lariat, as the spliceosome does, and are thought to be its evolutionary ancestors. Introns in tRNA genes are removed by protein enzymes. A rare minor spliceosome removes a small class of introns with different consensus sequences.
Alternative splicing
One gene can produce several mRNAs by alternative splicing. About 95 percent of human multi-exon genes are alternatively spliced. The main patterns are exon skipping (a cassette exon is included or left out), mutually exclusive exons, alternative 5' or 3' splice sites, and intron retention. Choices are controlled by short sequences in exons and introns, splicing enhancers bound by SR proteins and splicing silencers bound by hnRNP proteins, whose levels differ among tissues. Classic examples include sex determination in Drosophila, in which female-specific Sex-lethal protein sets off a cascade of alternative splicing decisions, and calcitonin/CGRP, in which thyroid cells make the hormone calcitonin and neurons make a neuropeptide from the same gene.
Polyadenylation
Except for replication-dependent histone mRNAs, which end in a stem-loop, nearly all Pol II mRNAs end in a poly(A) tail. The signal is AAUAAA (or a close variant), located 10 to 30 nucleotides upstream of the cleavage site, plus a GU- or U-rich downstream element. The factor CPSF (cleavage and polyadenylation specificity factor) binds AAUAAA and CstF binds the downstream element, both recruited from the CTD. The RNA is cleaved, usually just after a CA, and poly(A) polymerase adds about 200 to 250 adenosines in mammals without any template. Nuclear poly(A)-binding protein controls the tail length. The tail, bound in the cytoplasm by poly(A)-binding protein (PABP), promotes export, stabilizes the mRNA and enhances translation; gradual shortening of the tail is a main route to mRNA decay. Many genes have more than one poly(A) site, so alternative polyadenylation can produce mRNAs with longer or shorter 3' UTRs and different stabilities.
| Modification | Signal | Main enzymes or factors | Functions |
|---|---|---|---|
| 5' cap | Recruited by CTD serine 5 phosphate | Triphosphatase, guanylyltransferase, N7-methyltransferase | Protects from exonucleases; export; eIF4E binding for translation |
| Splicing | GU at 5' end, branch A, pyrimidine tract, AG at 3' end | U1, U2, U4, U5, U6 snRNPs; U2AF; SR and hnRNP proteins | Removes introns; alternative splicing makes isoforms |
| 3' cleavage and poly(A) | AAUAAA plus downstream GU-rich element | CPSF, CstF, poly(A) polymerase, PABP | Defines 3' end; stability, export, translation; triggers termination |
| Editing | Specific sites and structures | APOBEC1 (C to U), ADAR (A to I) | Changes coded sequence after transcription |
RNA editing, export and quality control
RNA editing changes the nucleotide sequence of an RNA after transcription. In the human intestine, the enzyme APOBEC1 deaminates one cytosine in the apolipoprotein B mRNA, converting a CAA (glutamine) codon to UAA, a stop codon. The intestine therefore makes the short apoB-48 for chylomicrons, while the liver, which does not edit, makes the full-length apoB-100 for VLDL and LDL from the same gene. ADAR enzymes deaminate adenosine to inosine, which is read as guanosine; editing of a glutamate receptor mRNA in neurons changes a glutamine codon (CAG) to one read as arginine (CGG), altering the channel's calcium permeability. In trypanosome mitochondria, guide RNAs direct the insertion and deletion of hundreds of uridines.
Mature mRNAs are exported through nuclear pores as protein-bound particles. During splicing, an exon junction complex (EJC) is deposited about 20 to 24 nucleotides upstream of each exon-exon junction. If a ribosome reaches a stop codon while an EJC still lies more than about 50 to 55 nucleotides downstream, the stop is judged premature and the mRNA is destroyed by nonsense-mediated mRNA decay (NMD). NMD protects cells from truncated proteins, and it explains why many nonsense mutations produce almost no mRNA at all.
Eukaryotic pre-mRNAs are processed while they are transcribed: a 7-methylguanosine cap is added in a 5'-5' linkage, introns are removed by the snRNP-based spliceosome in two transesterifications that form a lariat, and the 3' end is cleaved downstream of AAUAAA and given a poly(A) tail. Alternative splicing and polyadenylation multiply the products of a gene, editing alters coded sequence, and the exon junction complex lets NMD destroy mRNAs with premature stop codons.
Section 4The genetic code
A triplet, nonoverlapping code
With four bases and twenty amino acids, a code of single bases (4 words) or pairs (42 = 16 words) is too small; triplets give 43 = 64 combinations, enough for twenty amino acids with room to spare. The genetic evidence came in 1961 from Francis Crick, Sydney Brenner and colleagues, who used the acridine dye proflavin to make single-base insertions (+) and deletions (−) in the rIIB gene of phage T4. Any single + or − mutation destroyed function, but combining a + with a nearby − often restored it, because the frame was shifted only in the short stretch between them. Most strikingly, three + mutations together (or three −) also restored function, while two did not. Only a code read in groups of three, starting from a fixed point and without punctuation between codons, explains that result. The same experiments showed that the code is nonoverlapping (each base belongs to one codon in a given frame) and suggested that it is degenerate, since a garbled stretch between compensating mutations rarely produced a stop.
Cracking the code
The biochemical solution began the same year. Marshall Nirenberg and Heinrich Matthaei added a synthetic RNA made only of uridine, poly(U), to a cell-free extract of E. coli with radioactive amino acids. The extract made polyphenylalanine, so UUU codes for phenylalanine. Poly(A) gave polylysine and poly(C) gave polyproline. Random copolymers, made from mixtures of two nucleotides in known proportions, revealed which bases (but not their order) were in other codons. Two further methods assigned the rest. In the triplet binding assay of Nirenberg and Philip Leder, single trinucleotides were mixed with ribosomes and charged tRNAs; only the tRNA matching the trinucleotide bound to the ribosomes and was trapped on a filter. Har Gobind Khorana synthesized RNAs with repeating sequences, whose products in each reading frame confirmed the assignments. By 1966 all 64 codons were known.
The codon table
| First base | Second base U | Second base C | Second base A | Second base G |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| U | UUU, UUC Phe; UUA, UUG Leu | UCU, UCC, UCA, UCG Ser | UAU, UAC Tyr; UAA, UAG stop | UGU, UGC Cys; UGA stop; UGG Trp |
| C | CUU, CUC, CUA, CUG Leu | CCU, CCC, CCA, CCG Pro | CAU, CAC His; CAA, CAG Gln | CGU, CGC, CGA, CGG Arg |
| A | AUU, AUC, AUA Ile; AUG Met (start) | ACU, ACC, ACA, ACG Thr | AAU, AAC Asn; AAA, AAG Lys | AGU, AGC Ser; AGA, AGG Arg |
| G | GUU, GUC, GUA, GUG Val | GCU, GCC, GCA, GCG Ala | GAU, GAC Asp; GAA, GAG Glu | GGU, GGC, GGA, GGG Gly |
The table shows the code's main properties. It is degenerate (redundant): 61 sense codons specify 20 amino acids, so most amino acids have more than one codon, called synonymous codons. Leucine, serine and arginine have six; methionine and tryptophan only one. It is unambiguous: each codon specifies only one amino acid. Synonymous codons usually differ only at the third position, and amino acids with similar properties tend to have similar codons (codons with U in the second position encode hydrophobic amino acids), so many point mutations are silent or conservative. AUG is the start codon, encoding methionine at the start and inside proteins. UAA, UAG and UGA are stop codons (nicknamed ochre, amber and opal); no normal tRNA reads them. The code is read 5' to 3', and a single strand can be read in three reading frames, so a double-stranded DNA has six. An open reading frame (ORF) is a long stretch that begins with AUG and has no stop codon in frame.
Wobble
Each codon is read by base pairing with the anticodon of a tRNA, and the two pair antiparallel: the first codon base (5') pairs with the third anticodon base (3'). Cells have fewer kinds of tRNA than the 61 sense codons, because, as Crick proposed in his wobble hypothesis, the first (5') base of the anticodon can pair with the third (3') base of the codon in nonstandard ways. The first two codon positions pair strictly. Inosine (I), a modified purine made from adenosine at the wobble position, is especially flexible.
| Anticodon 5' (wobble) base | Codon 3' bases it can pair with |
|---|---|
| C | G only |
| A (rare; usually converted to I) | U only |
| G | C or U |
| U | A or G |
| I (inosine) | U, C or A |
A nearly universal code
The same code is used by bacteria, archaea, plants and animals, which is why a human gene can be expressed in E. coli to make insulin. There are exceptions. In vertebrate mitochondria, UGA codes for tryptophan, AUA for methionine, and AGA and AGG are stops. Some Mycoplasma read UGA as tryptophan, and some ciliates read UAA and UAG as glutamine. Two rare amino acids are added by recoding stop codons in special contexts: selenocysteine at certain UGA codons when a downstream stem-loop (the SECIS element) is present, and pyrrolysine at UAG in some archaea.
The genetic code is a nonoverlapping, comma-free triplet code read 5' to 3' from a fixed start, as frameshift experiments showed. Poly(U), random copolymers, triplet binding and repeating copolymers assigned all 64 codons: 61 sense codons and three stops, with AUG as start. The code is degenerate but unambiguous, wobble at the third codon position lets one tRNA read several codons, and the code is nearly universal, with known exceptions in mitochondria and a few organisms.
Section 5Translation and protein processing
Charging tRNAs: the second genetic code
Transfer RNAs are adaptors, typically about 76 nucleotides long, that fold into a cloverleaf secondary structure and an L-shaped tertiary structure. The acceptor stem ends in the sequence CCA at the 3' end, and the amino acid is attached to the terminal adenosine. The opposite end of the L carries the anticodon loop. tRNAs contain many modified bases, such as dihydrouridine, pseudouridine (ψ) and inosine.
The link between an amino acid and its anticodon is made by aminoacyl-tRNA synthetases, usually one for each amino acid. Each enzyme works in two steps: amino acid + ATP → aminoacyl-AMP + PPi, then aminoacyl-AMP + tRNA → aminoacyl-tRNA + AMP. Hydrolysis of the pyrophosphate makes the reaction irreversible, so charging costs two high-energy phosphate bonds. The resulting ester bond is itself high energy and later powers peptide bond formation. Synthetases recognize their tRNAs by the anticodon and by features of the acceptor stem, and many have a separate editing site that hydrolyzes wrong amino acids, such as valine on tRNAIle. Accuracy here is critical because the ribosome checks only the codon and anticodon, not the amino acid. This was shown by chemically converting cysteine already attached to tRNACys into alanine: the ribosome inserted alanine at cysteine codons.
Ribosomes
Ribosomes are made of two subunits, each composed of rRNA and proteins. Sizes are given in Svedberg units (S), which reflect sedimentation rate and do not add.
| Feature | Bacteria (70S) | Eukaryotes (80S, cytoplasm) |
|---|---|---|
| Small subunit | 30S: 16S rRNA, about 21 proteins | 40S: 18S rRNA, about 33 proteins |
| Large subunit | 50S: 23S and 5S rRNA, about 33 proteins | 60S: 28S, 5.8S and 5S rRNA, about 47 proteins |
| Start signal | Shine-Dalgarno sequence pairs with 16S rRNA | 5' cap, then scanning to the first good AUG |
| Initiator tRNA | fMet-tRNAfMet | Met-tRNAiMet |
| Elongation factors | EF-Tu (with EF-Ts), EF-G | eEF1A (with eEF1B), eEF2 |
| Release factors | RF1 (UAA, UAG), RF2 (UAA, UGA), RF3 | eRF1 (all three stops), eRF3 |
The ribosome has three tRNA binding sites. The A site (aminoacyl) accepts each incoming charged tRNA, the P site (peptidyl) holds the tRNA carrying the growing chain, and the E site (exit) holds the uncharged tRNA before it leaves. The small subunit contains the decoding center, where 16S rRNA bases inspect the minor groove of the codon-anticodon helix to confirm correct pairing at the first two positions. The large subunit contains the peptidyl transferase center, and high-resolution structures published in 2000 showed that no protein lies within reach of the active site. Peptide bond formation is catalyzed by 23S rRNA, so the ribosome is a ribozyme.
Initiation
In bacteria, initiation factor IF3 keeps the subunits apart so a free 30S subunit can bind mRNA. The 30S subunit finds the start codon by base pairing between the Shine-Dalgarno sequence (consensus AGGAGG, about 5 to 10 nucleotides upstream of the AUG) and a complementary sequence near the 3' end of 16S rRNA. Because each gene in a polycistronic mRNA has its own Shine-Dalgarno sequence, ribosomes can start at several internal AUGs. IF2, bound to GTP, brings the initiator tRNA carrying N-formylmethionine (fMet-tRNAfMet) directly to the P site, while IF1 blocks the A site. The 50S subunit then joins, IF2 hydrolyzes its GTP, the factors leave, and a 70S initiation complex is ready with fMet in the P site and an empty A site.
In eukaryotes, the small subunit with several initiation factors and eIF2-GTP-Met-tRNAi forms a 43S complex. The eIF4F complex (cap-binding eIF4E, the scaffold eIF4G and the helicase eIF4A) binds the 5' cap; eIF4G also binds poly(A)-binding protein, which circularizes the mRNA and links the tail to efficient translation. The 43S complex is recruited to the cap and scans 5' to 3', using ATP to unwind structure, until it finds an AUG in a favorable context, the Kozak sequence (gccRccAUGG, with a purine at −3 and G at +4 being most important). GTP hydrolysis by eIF2 releases the factors and the 60S subunit joins. Some viral and cellular mRNAs bypass the cap by using an internal ribosome entry site (IRES). Phosphorylation of eIF2 by stress-activated kinases blocks its recycling and shuts down most translation, a central control point in viral infection and cellular stress.
Elongation
Each elongation cycle has three steps. (1) Decoding: EF-Tu bound to GTP delivers an aminoacyl-tRNA to the A site. If codon and anticodon match, the decoding center triggers GTP hydrolysis and EF-Tu-GDP leaves (EF-Ts regenerates EF-Tu-GTP); a mismatched tRNA usually leaves before it can be used. (2) Peptide bond formation: the amino group of the A-site amino acid attacks the ester bond that holds the peptide to the P-site tRNA, transferring the entire chain onto the A-site tRNA, which is now one residue longer. (3) Translocation: EF-G bound to GTP moves the mRNA and tRNAs by exactly one codon, shifting the peptidyl-tRNA from A to P and the uncharged tRNA from P to E, from which it leaves. Bacterial ribosomes add about 15 to 20 amino acids per second and eukaryotic ribosomes about 5, with an error rate of roughly 1 in 104. Many ribosomes can translate one mRNA at once, forming a polysome.
Termination and the energy budget
When a stop codon enters the A site, no tRNA matches. Instead a release factor binds: in bacteria RF1 recognizes UAA and UAG and RF2 recognizes UAA and UGA; in eukaryotes eRF1 recognizes all three. A conserved GGQ motif of the release factor positions a water molecule in the peptidyl transferase center, which hydrolyzes the bond between the polypeptide and the P-site tRNA, releasing the protein. RF3 (or eRF3) and GTP help remove the release factor, and recycling factors split the ribosome so it can start again.
Protein targeting, folding and modification
Most proteins need help after synthesis. Molecular chaperones such as Hsp70 bind exposed hydrophobic stretches of nascent chains, and chaperonins (GroEL with GroES in bacteria, TRiC in eukaryotes) provide an enclosed chamber where some proteins fold. In bacteria the formyl group of fMet is removed, and in both domains the initial methionine is often trimmed off.
Where a protein goes depends on signals in its sequence. Proteins destined for secretion, the plasma membrane, or the endoplasmic reticulum (ER), Golgi or lysosomes begin with a signal sequence of about 15 to 30 amino acids with a hydrophobic core. As it emerges from the ribosome, the signal recognition particle (SRP), which contains the Pol III product 7SL RNA, binds it and pauses translation. SRP then docks on its receptor in the ER membrane and hands the ribosome to the Sec61 translocon, through which the chain is threaded as it is made (cotranslational translocation). Signal peptidase removes the signal sequence. In the ER, proteins acquire N-linked glycosylation on asparagine in the sequence Asn-X-Ser/Thr and form disulfide bonds; further glycosylation and sorting take place in the Golgi. Other proteins are made on free ribosomes and carry signals for the nucleus (nuclear localization signals), mitochondria or peroxisomes.
Many proteins are activated by cleavage. Insulin is made as preproinsulin; removing the signal peptide gives proinsulin, and removing the connecting C peptide in secretory granules gives mature two-chain insulin. Phosphorylation, acetylation, lipid attachment and other post-translational modifications regulate activity, and attachment of chains of ubiquitin marks proteins for destruction by the proteasome.
| Agent | Target | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| Aminoglycosides (streptomycin, gentamicin) | Bacterial 30S subunit | Cause misreading and block initiation |
| Tetracyclines | Bacterial 30S subunit | Block aminoacyl-tRNA binding to the A site |
| Chloramphenicol | Bacterial 50S subunit | Inhibits peptidyl transferase |
| Macrolides (erythromycin, azithromycin) | Bacterial 50S exit tunnel | Block passage of the growing chain |
| Puromycin | Ribosomes of all domains | Mimics aminoacyl-tRNA; causes premature chain release |
| Cycloheximide | Eukaryotic 60S subunit | Blocks translocation (research tool) |
| Diphtheria toxin | Eukaryotic eEF2 | ADP-ribosylates eEF2, halting translocation |
| Ricin, Shiga toxin | Eukaryotic 28S rRNA | Remove one adenine from the large subunit rRNA, inactivating the ribosome |
The differences between 70S and 80S ribosomes are the basis of many antibiotics. Mitochondrial ribosomes resemble bacterial ones, which helps explain some side effects, such as the hearing loss caused by aminoglycosides in people with a particular mitochondrial rRNA variant.
Aminoacyl-tRNA synthetases attach each amino acid to the right tRNA using ATP, and the ribosome, a ribozyme with A, P and E sites, matches anticodons to codons. Initiation uses the Shine-Dalgarno sequence and fMet in bacteria and cap-dependent scanning to a Kozak AUG in eukaryotes; elongation cycles through EF-Tu decoding, peptidyl transfer and EF-G translocation; release factors end synthesis at stop codons. Signal sequences, chaperones, cleavage and modification then deliver and finish each protein.
The chapter in one breath
- RNA is made 5' to 3' from the template strand without a primer; the RNA matches the coding strand with U for T.
- Bacterial sigma factors guide the core polymerase to promoters with −35 (TTGACA) and −10 (TATAAT) elements; termination is intrinsic (GC hairpin plus U tract) or Rho dependent.
- Eukaryotes use Pol I (large rRNAs), Pol II (mRNAs) and Pol III (tRNAs, 5S rRNA), distinguished by α-amanitin sensitivity.
- Pol II needs general factors assembled on the core promoter (TFIID with TBP on the TATA box, then IIA, IIB, IIF, IIE, IIH); CTD phosphorylation drives escape and recruits processing factors.
- Pre-mRNA receives a 7-methylguanosine cap, loses its introns by splicing and gains a poly(A) tail after cleavage downstream of AAUAAA.
- The spliceosome (U1, U2, U4, U5, U6 snRNPs) uses two transesterifications and a branch-point A to remove introns as lariats; alternative splicing multiplies protein isoforms.
- RNA editing (C to U in apoB, A to I by ADAR) and nonsense-mediated decay modify and police mRNAs.
- The code is a nonoverlapping triplet code with 61 sense codons and 3 stops; it is degenerate, unambiguous and nearly universal.
- Wobble at the third codon position lets one tRNA read several codons; inosine pairs with U, C or A.
- Synthetases charge tRNAs; the ribosome, a ribozyme, uses A, P and E sites and cycles through decoding, peptidyl transfer and translocation.
- Initiation uses Shine-Dalgarno pairing and fMet in bacteria and cap-dependent scanning to a Kozak AUG in eukaryotes; release factors end translation.
- Signal sequences, SRP, chaperones, cleavage and modification finish proteins, and many antibiotics exploit 70S versus 80S differences.
Words worth knowing
| Term | What it means |
|---|---|
| Template strand | The DNA strand read by RNA polymerase; the RNA is complementary to it. |
| Coding strand | The DNA strand with the same sequence as the RNA (T in place of U). |
| Promoter | The DNA sequence where RNA polymerase and its factors bind to start transcription. |
| Sigma factor | A bacterial protein that lets RNA polymerase recognize a particular class of promoters. |
| Intrinsic terminator | A bacterial stop signal made of a GC-rich hairpin followed by a run of U's in the RNA. |
| Rho | A bacterial helicase that tracks along RNA and ends transcription at certain sites. |
| TATA box | A core promoter element about 25 to 30 bp upstream of the start site, bound by TBP. |
| General transcription factors | Proteins such as TFIID, TFIIB and TFIIH that assemble at promoters with RNA polymerase II. |
| Enhancer | A regulatory DNA element that raises transcription from a distance in either orientation. |
| CTD | The repeated tail of RNA polymerase II whose phosphorylation coordinates transcription and processing. |
| 5' cap | A 7-methylguanosine joined to the first nucleotide of mRNA by a 5'-5' triphosphate. |
| Intron | A transcribed sequence removed from RNA by splicing. |
| Exon | A sequence retained in mature RNA, including coding sequence and UTRs. |
| Spliceosome | The snRNP and protein complex that removes nuclear pre-mRNA introns. |
| Lariat | The looped intron formed when the branch-point A joins the intron's 5' end by a 2'-5' bond. |
| Alternative splicing | Joining different combinations of exons to make several mRNAs from one gene. |
| Poly(A) tail | About 200 adenosines added to the 3' end of mRNA after cleavage. |
| RNA editing | A change in RNA sequence after transcription, such as C to U or A to I. |
| Nonsense-mediated decay | Destruction of mRNAs with a premature stop codon upstream of an exon junction. |
| Codon | A group of three mRNA nucleotides that specifies an amino acid or a stop. |
| Anticodon | The three tRNA nucleotides that pair antiparallel with a codon. |
| Degenerate code | A code in which several codons specify the same amino acid. |
| Reading frame | One of the three ways to divide a sequence into consecutive codons. |
| Wobble | Flexible pairing between the anticodon's 5' base and the codon's 3' base. |
| Aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase | An enzyme that attaches a specific amino acid to its matching tRNAs using ATP. |
| Shine-Dalgarno sequence | A bacterial mRNA sequence upstream of the start codon that pairs with 16S rRNA. |
| Kozak sequence | The context around a eukaryotic start codon that favors initiation. |
| Peptidyl transferase | The rRNA catalytic center of the large subunit that forms peptide bonds. |
| Release factor | A protein that recognizes a stop codon and triggers release of the polypeptide. |
| Signal sequence | An N-terminal hydrophobic segment that directs a protein into the ER via SRP. |
Check yourself
Gene Regulation and Epigenetics
Every cell in your body carries the same genome, yet a neuron and a liver cell behave like different organisms. The difference lies in which genes they use, when, and how much. This chapter explains the switches, dials and memory systems that decide gene expression, from bacterial operons to the chromatin marks and small RNAs that shape development and disease.
By the end of this chapter you can
- Distinguish cis-acting elements from trans-acting factors and classify a regulatory system as positive or negative, and inducible or repressible.
- Name the levels at which gene expression is controlled and estimate how mRNA synthesis and decay set steady state levels.
- Explain how the lac operon responds to lactose and glucose, including the roles of the lac repressor, allolactose, CAP and cAMP.
- Predict enzyme expression in partial diploids carrying lacI, operator and structural gene mutations.
- Describe repression and attenuation in the trp operon and predict the effect of leader mutations.
- Explain how eukaryotic activators, enhancers, Mediator and insulators control transcription, and interpret a reporter gene deletion experiment.
- Describe how histone modifications, chromatin remodeling and DNA methylation establish heritable states, including genomic imprinting and X inactivation.
- Read a bisulfite sequencing result and calculate percent methylation.
- Trace the biogenesis of siRNAs and microRNAs, identify a miRNA seed match, and compare their modes of silencing.
Section 1Principles of gene regulation
Why regulate genes at all?
Making RNA and protein is expensive. A bacterium that made all of its roughly 4,300 proteins at full speed all the time would waste energy on enzymes it does not need. Multicellular organisms face a second problem: they must build many cell types from one genome and keep each type stable through many divisions. Gene regulation solves both problems.
Genes expressed at a fairly steady level in nearly every cell, such as those for ribosomal proteins and glycolytic enzymes, are called housekeeping genes, and their expression is constitutive. Other genes are regulated: switched on or off, or turned up or down, in response to signals.
The levels of control
Gene expression is a pipeline, and a cell can intervene at any stage. In eukaryotes the main control points are:
- Chromatin accessibility: tightly packed nucleosomes and heterochromatin hide DNA.
- Transcription initiation: the most common and most economical control point.
- RNA processing: alternative splicing and polyadenylation change which protein is made.
- RNA export and localization.
- mRNA stability: half lives range from minutes to days, set by 3′ UTR sequences, RNA binding proteins and microRNAs.
- Translation: initiation factors, regulatory proteins and small RNAs control ribosome loading.
- Protein modification, localization and degradation, for example phosphorylation or ubiquitin tagging for the proteasome.
In bacteria, where transcription and translation are coupled, most regulation acts on transcription initiation, transcription termination and translation initiation. Bacterial mRNAs often last only 1 to 3 minutes, so protein supply follows transcription closely.
Cis-acting elements and trans-acting factors
A cis-acting element is a DNA (or RNA) sequence that controls only the gene on the same molecule: promoters, operators, enhancers, silencers and 3′ UTR sequences are binding sites, not products. A trans-acting factor is a diffusible product, usually a protein or RNA, that can act on targets anywhere in the cell, including on another chromosome. Repressors, activators, sigma factors and microRNAs are trans-acting.
The distinction is testable in a partial diploid (merodiploid) carrying two copies of a regulatory region, one on the chromosome and one on a plasmid. A defective trans-acting factor is usually rescued by a wild type copy elsewhere, because the wild type product diffuses to both targets. A defective cis-acting site is not rescued; it affects only the genes physically linked to it.
Positive and negative control; induction and repression
Regulatory systems are classified along two independent axes.
- Negative versus positive control asks what the regulatory protein does when it binds DNA. In negative control a repressor binds and blocks transcription; the default without the protein is “on.” In positive control an activator binds and stimulates transcription; the default without the protein is “off.”
- Inducible versus repressible asks how a small signal molecule changes expression. An inducible system is normally off and is turned on by an inducer, typically a nutrient the pathway breaks down. A repressible system is normally on and is turned off by a corepressor, typically the end product of a biosynthetic pathway.
The logic fits physiology. Catabolic enzymes are worth making only when their food is present, so catabolic operons are usually inducible; biosynthetic enzymes are worth making only when their product is scarce, so biosynthetic operons are usually repressible. The signal usually works allosterically, binding the regulatory protein away from its DNA binding domain and changing its DNA affinity.
| Type of control | Regulatory protein | Effect of small molecule | Classic example |
|---|---|---|---|
| Negative inducible | Repressor binds operator without signal | Inducer binds repressor and releases it from DNA | lac operon (lacI repressor, allolactose) |
| Negative repressible | Repressor cannot bind DNA alone | Corepressor binds repressor and enables DNA binding | trp operon (TrpR, tryptophan) |
| Positive inducible | Activator inactive alone | Inducer activates the activator | ara operon (AraC with arabinose); CAP with cAMP at lac |
| Positive repressible | Activator active alone | Signal molecule inactivates the activator | Less common; some amino acid pathways |
Operons, regulons and global control
Bacteria often cluster genes for one pathway into an operon: a set of genes transcribed from a single promoter into one polycistronic mRNA and controlled by shared regulatory sites. The lac operon carries three genes for lactose use, and the trp operon carries five genes for tryptophan synthesis. Operons guarantee that enzymes needed together are made together.
A single regulator can control many operons scattered around the chromosome, a set called a regulon. Alternative sigma factors act globally: in E. coli, σ70 directs RNA polymerase to most housekeeping promoters, while heat shock raises σ32, which switches on chaperones and proteases. Some mRNAs regulate themselves: a riboswitch is a structured 5′ UTR segment that binds a metabolite directly and changes shape to end transcription early or hide the ribosome binding site, so regulation does not always require a protein.
How fast can expression change? Synthesis, decay and steady state
The amount of an mRNA or protein reflects a balance between synthesis and destruction. If a molecule is made at a constant rate s and decays with first order kinetics, the decay constant is k = ln 2 ÷ t1/2. At steady state synthesis equals decay, so N = s ÷ k. Doubling the half life therefore raises the level as much as doubling transcription does. The time to reach a new steady state depends only on the half life: halfway in one half life, 75 percent in two, and about 97 percent in five. Short lived mRNAs let cells respond quickly.
Step 1: Find the decay constant. k = ln 2 ÷ t1/2 = 0.693 ÷ 2.0 = 0.347 per minute.
Step 2: Steady state N = s ÷ k = 12 ÷ 0.347 = 34.6, about 35 molecules.
Step 3: With t1/2 = 0.5 minutes, k = 0.693 ÷ 0.5 = 1.386 per minute, so N = 12 ÷ 1.386 = 8.7, about 9 molecules. A fourfold shorter half life gives a fourfold lower level (34.6 ÷ 8.7 = 4.0).
Step 4: Approach to the new level takes about five of the new half lives: 5 × 0.5 = 2.5 minutes.
Answer: about 35 molecules at first, about 9 after destabilization, with the new level essentially reached in 2.5 minutes.
Gene regulation saves resources and creates cell identity. Cis-acting sites are sequences that affect only linked genes, while trans-acting factors are diffusible products. Systems are classified as negative or positive (repressor versus activator) and inducible or repressible (what the small molecule does). Expression levels reflect both synthesis and decay, and the half life sets how quickly a cell can change course.
Section 2The lac and trp operons
The lac operon: genes and sites
The lactose operon of E. coli, worked out by François Jacob and Jacques Monod around 1960, was the first gene regulatory system understood in molecular detail. Lactose is a disaccharide of galactose and glucose. The operon carries three genes in the order lacZ, lacY, lacA:
- lacZ encodes β-galactosidase, which cleaves lactose into glucose and galactose. As a side reaction it also rearranges a small fraction of lactose into allolactose (a β-1,6 isomer), the natural inducer.
- lacY encodes lactose permease, a membrane symporter that brings lactose into the cell with a proton.
- lacA encodes thiogalactoside transacetylase, which is not required for lactose use.
Upstream of the structural genes lie the cis-acting sites. The promoter (P) binds RNA polymerase. The main operator (O1) overlaps the transcription start, so a bound repressor blocks polymerase; auxiliary operators O2 (in lacZ) and O3 (upstream) let one repressor tetramer bind two operators and loop the DNA, tightening repression. Just upstream of the promoter is the site for the catabolite activator protein (CAP). The nearby lacI gene, with its own constitutive promoter, encodes the tetrameric lac repressor.
Negative control by the repressor
Without lactose, the repressor binds the operator and blocks transcription. Repression is not absolute: a few molecules of permease and β-galactosidase escape, which the cell needs to import the first lactose and make the first allolactose. Allolactose binds the repressor and lowers its affinity for the operator, so it falls off and expression rises roughly a thousandfold. When lactose runs out, the repressor rebinds and the short lived mRNA is degraded within minutes.
Researchers often induce the operon with IPTG, a gratuitous inducer that binds the repressor like allolactose but is not broken down, so its concentration stays constant. X-gal, a colorless galactoside that β-galactosidase cleaves to a blue product, shows whether lacZ is active.
Positive control by CAP and cAMP
With both glucose and lactose present, E. coli uses glucose first and expresses lac only weakly, called catabolite repression. Two mechanisms produce it.
- Activation by CAP. The lac promoter is weak and is strongly transcribed only when CAP bound to cyclic AMP (cAMP) sits upstream, bends the DNA and contacts RNA polymerase. Adenylate cyclase makes cAMP when glucose is scarce. With plenty of glucose, cAMP is low, CAP does not bind, and lac transcription stays low even with lactose present.
- Inducer exclusion. While glucose enters through the phosphotransferase system, its component EIIAGlc is mostly unphosphorylated and in that form inhibits lactose permease, so less inducer forms. This is thought to be the larger contributor, with low cAMP adding to it.
The result is a logic gate. High transcription requires two conditions at once: lactose present (repressor off) and glucose absent (CAP-cAMP on, permease active).
| Glucose | Lactose | Repressor | cAMP and CAP | lac transcription |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Present | Absent | Bound to operator | Low cAMP, CAP not bound | Off (basal trace) |
| Absent | Absent | Bound to operator | High cAMP, CAP bound | Off (basal trace) |
| Present | Present | Released | Low cAMP, CAP not bound; inducer exclusion | Low |
| Absent | Present | Released | High cAMP, CAP bound | High (fully induced) |
Regulatory mutations and the partial diploid test
Jacob and Monod deduced the logic of the operon from mutants, which remain the basis of many problems.
| Mutation | Defect | Phenotype in haploid | Behavior in partial diploid |
|---|---|---|---|
| lacZ− or lacY− | Nonfunctional enzyme | That enzyme absent | Recessive; a wild type copy elsewhere supplies the enzyme |
| lacI− | Repressor cannot bind operator | Constitutive (on without inducer) | Recessive; wild type repressor diffuses and acts in trans |
| lacIS (superrepressor) | Repressor cannot bind inducer | Uninducible (always off) | Dominant in trans; it binds every operator and never leaves |
| lacI−d (dominant negative) | Defective subunits poison mixed tetramers | Constitutive | Dominant over lacI+ |
| lacOc (operator constitutive) | Operator cannot bind repressor | Constitutive | Cis-dominant: only genes on the same DNA are constitutive |
| lacP− | Promoter cannot bind polymerase | No expression | Cis-acting: only linked genes are silent |
To solve a partial diploid problem, treat the cell as a pool of diffusible products and a set of fixed DNA molecules. Repressor made from either copy of lacI goes everywhere. Each operator and promoter controls only the structural genes on its own DNA. Work one structural gene at a time: find every functional copy of that gene, then ask whether the operator and promoter next to it will allow expression with and without inducer.
Step 1: Repressor. The chromosome makes functional repressor (I+); the plasmid makes none (I−). Repressor is diffusible, so functional repressor is available to every operator in the cell.
Step 2: β-galactosidase. The only working lacZ is on the plasmid, next to an O+ operator. Repressor binds that operator without inducer and leaves with inducer. So β-galactosidase is inducible: absent without lactose, present with lactose.
Step 3: Permease. The only working lacY is on the chromosome, next to Oc, which repressor cannot bind. So permease is made whether or not lactose is present: constitutive.
Answer: β-galactosidase inducible; permease constitutive. Notice that the Oc mutation affects only the gene in cis with it, while the I− defect is fully covered by the I+ copy in trans. Had the chromosome carried IS instead of I+, β-galactosidase would be uninducible (absent in both conditions), but permease would still be constitutive because Oc ignores even the superrepressor.
The trp operon: a repressible system
The tryptophan operon contains five genes, trpE, trpD, trpC, trpB, trpA, encoding the enzymes that make tryptophan. The trp repressor, encoded by the separate trpR gene, binds DNA poorly on its own. Tryptophan acts as a corepressor: it binds the repressor dimer and repositions its helix-turn-helix motifs to fit the operator, blocking transcription. When tryptophan is scarce, the repressor drops off. Repression alone changes expression about 70 fold.
Attenuation: fine tuning by coupled transcription and translation
Charles Yanofsky found that even trpR mutants lowered operon expression about eightfold when tryptophan was plentiful. The explanation is attenuation, premature termination controlled by translation of a 162 nucleotide leader (trpL) between the operator and trpE. Its RNA has four regions that can pair in alternative ways:
- Region 1 can pair with region 2.
- Region 2 can pair with region 3, forming the antiterminator.
- Region 3 can pair with region 4, forming the terminator (the attenuator): a GC rich hairpin followed by a run of U's, a classic intrinsic terminator.
Because region 2 cannot pair with both 1 and 3 at once, and region 3 cannot pair with both 2 and 4, the structures are mutually exclusive. Region 1 also encodes a 14 amino acid leader peptide that contains two tryptophan codons in a row. Because bacteria translate mRNA while it is still being made, the position of the ribosome on the leader decides which hairpin forms.
- Tryptophan plentiful. Charged tRNATrp is abundant, so the ribosome reads through the two Trp codons without pause and continues to the leader stop codon, where it covers region 2. Region 2 is unavailable, so when regions 3 and 4 are made they pair into the terminator. Polymerase stops before reaching trpE.
- Tryptophan scarce. Charged tRNATrp is rare, so the ribosome stalls at the Trp codons, sitting on region 1. Region 2 is free to pair with region 3 as soon as region 3 is made. The 2:3 antiterminator prevents the 3:4 terminator, and polymerase transcribes the structural genes.
- No translation at all (for example, if the leader start codon is mutated). Region 1 pairs with region 2, leaving 3 free to pair with 4. Termination occurs.
Repression (about 70 fold) and attenuation (about 8 to 10 fold) multiply to give a total range of roughly 600 fold. Attenuation senses charged tRNA, while repression senses free tryptophan. Leaders rich in the relevant codons also control the histidine, leucine and phenylalanine operons. Attenuation cannot work in eukaryotes, where transcription and translation are separated by the nuclear envelope.
Step 1 (a): The ribosome no longer needs tRNATrp in the leader. Alanyl tRNA is plentiful, so the ribosome does not stall, covers region 2, and 3:4 forms. Attenuation now responds to alanine, not tryptophan: expression stays low even in tryptophan starvation (repression is relieved, so expression is attenuated but not repressed).
Step 2 (b): Without a 3:4 terminator, polymerase cannot be stopped at the attenuator, and with no repressor nothing blocks initiation. Expression is high and constitutive.
Step 3 (c): With no translation, 1:2 forms, freeing 3 to pair with 4. Termination occurs even though tryptophan is low. Expression is low.
Answer: (a) low, (b) high, (c) low. The trick in every case is to ask where the ribosome sits and which pairings are left available.
The lac operon is negatively controlled by a repressor that allolactose removes and positively controlled by CAP-cAMP, so it is strongly expressed only with lactose and without glucose. Partial diploids distinguish trans-acting lacI products from cis-acting operators. The trp operon is repressed by TrpR plus tryptophan and further tuned by attenuation, in which ribosome stalling at Trp codons in the leader chooses between antiterminator and terminator hairpins.
Section 3Eukaryotic transcription factors and enhancers
The parts of a eukaryotic gene's control region
A typical protein coding gene in a eukaryote is transcribed by RNA polymerase II, which cannot recognize a promoter by itself. Its control region has three layers.
- The core promoter, within about 40 base pairs of the start site, is where the transcription machinery assembles. Common elements include the TATA box (consensus TATAAA, about 25 to 30 bp upstream), the initiator (Inr) spanning the start site, and the downstream promoter element (DPE) about 30 bp downstream. Many human promoters lack a TATA box and instead lie in CpG islands.
- Promoter proximal elements, usually within about 200 bp upstream, such as the CAAT box (bound by NF-Y) and GC boxes (bound by Sp1), raise the efficiency of initiation.
- Enhancers and silencers are distal elements that can lie upstream, downstream, within introns, or tens to hundreds of kilobases away.
The general transcription factors assemble at the core promoter to form the preinitiation complex. TFIID, containing the TATA binding protein (TBP), binds first; TFIIA and TFIIB stabilize it, TFIIF brings RNA polymerase II, and TFIIE and TFIIH join last. TFIIH opens the DNA and phosphorylates the polymerase C-terminal domain (CTD), releasing polymerase into elongation. These factors give only low, basal transcription; high levels need activators.
Activators have separable domains
A eukaryotic activator usually has at least two functional parts that can be separated and swapped like modules:
- A DNA binding domain recognizes a specific sequence of roughly 6 to 12 bp, usually by inserting an α helix into the major groove.
- An activation domain recruits the machinery that turns on transcription. Many activation domains are acidic or rich in glutamine or proline and are intrinsically disordered until they bind a partner.
- Many activators also have a dimerization domain and a domain that binds a regulatory ligand.
Modularity was shown by domain swaps with the yeast activator GAL4, which binds the UASG near the galactose genes. The GAL4 DNA binding domain fused to another protein's activation domain still activates UASG genes; the DNA binding domain alone binds but activates nothing. This modularity underlies the yeast two hybrid screen and the GAL4/UAS system used in fruit flies.
Without galactose, GAL4 is already bound to the UAS, but the protein Gal80 masks its activation domain. Galactose binds the sensor Gal3, which pulls Gal80 away. The signal acts on the activator, not on DNA binding.
DNA binding motifs
| Motif | Structure | Examples |
|---|---|---|
| Helix-turn-helix (and homeodomain) | Two α helices joined by a short turn; one, the recognition helix, lies in the major groove | Bacterial lac and trp repressors, CAP; homeodomain proteins such as Hox factors |
| Zinc finger (C2H2) | About 30 amino acids folded around a zinc ion held by two cysteines and two histidines; often several fingers in tandem, each reading about 3 bp | Sp1, TFIIIA, CTCF |
| Nuclear receptor zinc finger (C4) | Two zinc modules each held by four cysteines; bind as dimers to paired half sites | Glucocorticoid, estrogen, thyroid hormone and vitamin D receptors |
| Basic leucine zipper (bZIP) | Leucine every seventh residue forms a coiled coil for dimerization; basic region grips DNA | Fos and Jun (AP-1), CREB |
| Basic helix-loop-helix (bHLH) | Two helices joined by a loop form the dimer interface; basic region binds DNA | MyoD, Myc and Max |
Enhancers and how they work at a distance
An enhancer is a cluster of binding sites for activators, usually 100 to 1,000 bp long, that raises transcription of a target gene. Enhancers have three defining properties that distinguish them from promoter elements:
- They work at a distance, from a few hundred bases to more than a megabase away.
- They work in either orientation; flipping an enhancer usually leaves its activity intact.
- They work upstream, downstream or within introns of the gene they control.
Enhancers act by DNA looping. Activators at the enhancer contact the promoter through Mediator, a coactivator complex of about 25 to 30 subunits that bridges activators and RNA polymerase II. Activators also recruit histone acetyltransferases such as CBP and p300 and ATP dependent remodeling complexes such as SWI/SNF that slide or evict nucleosomes. Many genes have several enhancers, each active in a different tissue, so a mutation in one enhancer can alter one tissue alone. Point mutations in the ZRS enhancer, about a megabase from SHH, cause extra digits without other effects of SHH loss.
Silencers are the mirror image: binding sites for repressors. Eukaryotic repressors work in several ways: they compete with activators for overlapping sites, they mask activation domains (as Gal80 does), they block contact with Mediator, or they recruit corepressors that bring in histone deacetylases and methyltransferases.
Insulators and topological domains
What stops an enhancer from activating the wrong gene? Insulators (boundary elements) block enhancer-promoter communication when placed between them and stop the spread of heterochromatin. In vertebrates most are bound by the zinc finger protein CTCF, which with the ring shaped cohesin complex organizes the genome into topologically associating domains (TADs) of roughly 100 kb to 1 Mb. Deleting a TAD boundary can let an enhancer reach a gene it normally never touches, a cause of some human limb malformations.
Combinatorial control and signals
Humans have roughly 1,600 sequence specific transcription factors, far fewer than the number of expression patterns cells display. The answer is combinatorial control: each enhancer is active only when the right combination of factors is present. A small set of master regulators can therefore specify many cell types; four factors (Oct4, Sox2, Klf4 and c-Myc) can even reprogram skin fibroblasts into induced pluripotent stem cells.
Signals reach transcription factors in several ways. Lipid soluble steroid hormones enter the cell: cortisol releases the glucocorticoid receptor from the chaperone Hsp90, and the receptor moves to the nucleus, dimerizes and binds hormone response elements. Other signals act through kinases; protein kinase A phosphorylates CREB, letting it recruit CBP/p300. The signal changes the activity, location or partners of a factor, not the DNA.
Reporter genes and the dissection of enhancers
Enhancers are mapped with reporter genes. A candidate regulatory region is cloned upstream of a gene whose product is easy to measure, such as luciferase (light) or green fluorescent protein (fluorescence), and the construct is introduced into cells. Deleting or mutating pieces of the region and measuring the reporter reveals which pieces matter. Moving a fragment to new positions or inverting it tests whether it behaves as an enhancer.
Step 1: Fold activation of the full region: 100 ÷ 5 = 20 fold.
Step 2: Deleting B drops activity to baseline (6), so B is necessary. Deleting A or C changes little. Deleting D halves activity (52 ÷ 100), a modest proximal effect.
Step 3: B alone gives 88 ÷ 5 = 17.6 fold, so B is sufficient for most activity.
Step 4: B works inverted and downstream, the defining properties of an enhancer.
Step 5: No activity in kidney (5) means the enhancer is tissue specific, presumably because its activators are made only in liver.
Answer: B is a liver specific enhancer, necessary and sufficient for most of the 20 fold activation; D holds a weaker proximal element.
RNA polymerase II needs general transcription factors to initiate and activators to reach high levels. Activators are modular, with separate DNA binding and activation domains built on motifs like helix-turn-helix, zinc fingers, leucine zippers and helix-loop-helix. Enhancers work at a distance and in either orientation by looping to the promoter through Mediator and by recruiting chromatin modifiers, insulators confine their reach, and combinations of factors give each cell type its own expression pattern.
Section 4Chromatin, DNA methylation and epigenetics
Nucleosomes as gatekeepers
In the nucleus, about 147 bp of DNA wraps around each nucleosome, an octamer with two copies each of histones H2A, H2B, H3 and H4, and histone H1 binds the linker. Nucleosomes block many factors from reaching DNA. Euchromatin is relatively open and contains most active genes; heterochromatin is condensed and largely silent. Constitutive heterochromatin at centromeres stays condensed in all cells, while facultative heterochromatin, such as the inactive X, is condensed only in some.
Cells change chromatin in two ways. ATP dependent chromatin remodelers (SWI/SNF and related families) use ATP to slide nucleosomes along DNA, eject them or exchange histone variants. Histone modifying enzymes add or remove chemical groups on the flexible N-terminal tails of histones, which protrude from the nucleosome.
Histone modifications
The best studied modifications are acetylation and methylation of lysines. Histone acetyltransferases (HATs) add acetyl groups to lysines, which neutralizes their positive charge, loosens the tails' grip on negatively charged DNA and creates docking sites for proteins with bromodomains. Histone deacetylases (HDACs) remove them. Acetylation is therefore a mark of active chromatin. Methylation does not change charge; instead, the effect of a methyl mark depends on which residue carries it and how many methyl groups (one, two or three) are present, because different reader proteins recognize each one. Proteins with chromodomains bind methylated lysines. The idea that combinations of marks are read by specific proteins is called the histone code hypothesis.
| Mark | Where it is found | Usual effect | Writer and reader examples |
|---|---|---|---|
| H3K27ac, H3K9ac | Active promoters and enhancers | Activation | Written by CBP/p300; read by bromodomain proteins |
| H3K4me3 | Promoters of active genes | Activation | Written by trithorax (MLL/COMPASS) complexes |
| H3K4me1 | Enhancers, active or poised | Marks enhancers | MLL3 and MLL4 |
| H3K36me3 | Bodies of transcribed genes | Associated with elongation | SETD2, which travels with Pol II |
| H3K27me3 | Silent developmental genes | Repression (facultative) | Written by Polycomb PRC2 (EZH2); read by PRC1 |
| H3K9me3 | Pericentromeric heterochromatin, repeats | Repression (constitutive) | Written by SUV39H1; read by HP1 |
Repressive marks can spread: HP1 binds H3K9me3 and recruits more SUV39H1, which methylates the next nucleosome. This explains position effect variegation in fruit flies. When an inversion moves the white gene next to centromeric heterochromatin, silencing spreads into it in some cells but not others, and each cell's state is inherited, giving a mottled eye. Polycomb and trithorax complexes form a similar memory system that keeps Hox genes off or on in the segments where they were first set.
DNA methylation
In mammals the major DNA modification is 5-methylcytosine, made by adding a methyl group to carbon 5 of cytosine, almost always where the C is followed by a G (a CpG dinucleotide; the p denotes the phosphate between them). Because CpG is palindromic, a methylated site has methyl groups on both strands. About 70 to 80 percent of CpGs in the human genome are methylated. The exceptions are CpG islands, stretches of about 0.5 to 2 kb rich in G and C and in CpGs, found at roughly 60 to 70 percent of gene promoters and usually unmethylated. Methylation of a promoter CpG island silences the gene, both by blocking binding of some activators and by recruiting methyl-CpG binding proteins such as MeCP2, which bring in HDACs and H3K9 methyltransferases.
Three enzymes establish and maintain the pattern:
- DNMT3A and DNMT3B are de novo methyltransferases that place new methyl groups on unmethylated DNA, especially during early embryonic development and gamete formation.
- DNMT1 is the maintenance methyltransferase. After replication, each CpG is hemimethylated: the parental strand is methylated and the new strand is not. The partner protein UHRF1 recognizes hemimethylated sites and recruits DNMT1, which methylates the new strand. This copying mechanism is why methylation patterns are inherited through cell division.
- TET enzymes oxidize 5-methylcytosine to 5-hydroxymethylcytosine and further products, which are removed by repair or diluted by replication, giving active demethylation. Failure of DNMT1 maintenance during replication gives passive demethylation.
Methylated cytosines are mutation hot spots. Deamination of cytosine gives uracil, which repair recognizes as foreign, but deamination of 5-methylcytosine gives thymine, a normal base, leaving a G-T mismatch that is often repaired the wrong way. This is why CpGs are depleted to about one quarter of their expected frequency and why C-to-T changes at CpGs are common in human disease.
What makes a mark epigenetic?
In its strict sense, epigenetics means changes in gene function that are heritable through cell division without a change in DNA sequence. DNA methylation qualifies because of DNMT1 copying, and some histone marks qualify through reader-writer loops (HP1 with SUV39H1, PRC2 binding its own H3K27me3). Most acetylation turns over in minutes and reflects current activity rather than memory.
Genomic imprinting
For most genes, the maternal and paternal copies are expressed equally. For about 100 to 200 mammalian genes, one copy is silenced depending on which parent it came from. This genomic imprinting is set by methylation at imprinting control regions (ICRs) during gamete formation, maintained through all somatic divisions of the offspring, then erased and reset in the offspring's own germ cells according to that individual's sex.
At the Igf2-H19 locus, Igf2 (a fetal growth factor) is expressed from the paternal allele and H19 (a noncoding RNA) from the maternal allele; both share enhancers downstream of H19. On the maternal chromosome the imprinting control region between them is unmethylated and binds CTCF, an insulator that blocks the enhancers from Igf2, so they activate H19. On the paternal chromosome the region is methylated, CTCF cannot bind, the enhancers reach Igf2, and H19 is silenced.
Step 1 (a): Each offspring receives one paternal allele, Igf2+ or Igf2m with probability 1/2 each. The paternal copy is the expressed one, so offspring receiving Igf2m from the father are small: 1/2.
Step 2 (b): The paternal allele is always Igf2+ from the wild type father, so every offspring expresses a working copy. The maternal Igf2m is silenced anyway. Fraction small: 0.
Step 3 (c): The small female carries Igf2m from her father. In her germ line the imprint is erased and reset to the maternal pattern, so any Igf2m she transmits is silent in her offspring. The father is wild type. Fraction small: 0.
Answer: 1/2, 0, 0. Imprinted traits follow the sex of the transmitting parent, not the sex of the offspring, and the imprint is reset every generation.
Imprinting explains two disorders of chromosome 15q11 to q13. Prader-Willi syndrome (neonatal hypotonia, later overeating and obesity, intellectual disability) results from loss of paternally expressed genes, by a paternal deletion or maternal uniparental disomy (both chromosome 15s from the mother). Angelman syndrome (severe intellectual disability, absent speech, seizures, happy demeanor) results from loss of the maternally expressed UBE3A gene in neurons, by a maternal deletion, paternal uniparental disomy or a UBE3A mutation. The same deletion gives different diseases depending on the parent of origin.
X inactivation
Mammals achieve dosage compensation by silencing all but one X in each somatic cell, as Mary Lyon proposed in 1961. Early in the embryo each cell chooses one X at random. That X expresses the long noncoding RNA Xist, which coats it in cis and recruits Polycomb complexes; the chromosome gains H3K27me3 and promoter methylation and condenses into a Barr body. The choice is inherited by the cell's descendants, making every female a mosaic. The number of Barr bodies is the number of X chromosomes minus one.
The orange and black patches of a calico cat show this mosaic: the two alleles of an X linked coat gene are expressed in different patches. Carriers of X linked disorders may show patchy signs, or symptoms if inactivation is skewed toward the normal X. About 15 percent of human X linked genes escape inactivation, which helps explain why Turner (45,X) and Klinefelter (47,XXY) syndromes have phenotypes.
Measuring methylation: bisulfite sequencing
Ordinary sequencing cannot distinguish C from 5-methylcytosine. In bisulfite sequencing, sodium bisulfite deaminates unmethylated cytosine to uracil, read as T after PCR, while 5-methylcytosine stays C. Non-CpG cytosines are rarely methylated in somatic cells and should all convert, a built in check on the treatment.
Step 1: Number the bases. Reference: A1 C2 G3 T4 T5 C6 G7 A8 C9 C10 G11 A12. The CpGs are C2-G3 (CpG 1), C6-G7 (CpG 2) and C10-G11 (CpG 3). C9 is followed by C, so it is not a CpG.
Step 2: Compare the clone: position 2 is still C, so CpG 1 was methylated. Position 6 reads T, so CpG 2 was unmethylated. Position 10 is still C, so CpG 3 was methylated.
Step 3: Position 9, a non-CpG C, reads T, so the bisulfite conversion worked.
Step 4: Across clones, methylated CpG observations = 9 + 2 + 7 = 18 of 3 × 10 = 30 possible. 18 ÷ 30 = 0.60.
Answer: (a) CpGs 1 and 3; (b) yes, the non-CpG C converted; (c) 60 percent average methylation, though CpG 2 (20 percent) behaves very differently from CpGs 1 (90 percent) and 3 (70 percent).
Epigenetics in development, environment and disease
Most methylation is erased and rebuilt twice in mammalian life, in the early embryo (sparing imprints) and in primordial germ cells (including imprints), which is why most environmentally induced marks are not passed on. A well studied exception is the agouti viable yellow (Avy) mouse: a retrotransposon upstream of the agouti gene drives yellow coat and obesity when unmethylated, and feeding pregnant mothers methyl donors (folate, choline, vitamin B12) shifts offspring toward the methylated, brown, lean state.
Cancer cells show genome wide hypomethylation together with hypermethylation of CpG island promoters of tumor suppressor and repair genes; methylation silencing of MLH1 causes many sporadic colorectal cancers. Because these changes are reversible, DNMT inhibitors (azacitidine, decitabine) and HDAC inhibitors (vorinostat) are used as drugs. Mutations in the machinery itself cause disease: Rett syndrome results from mutations in MECP2, which reads methylated DNA.
Chromatin controls access to DNA. Acetylation and H3K4me3 mark active genes; H3K27me3 (Polycomb) and H3K9me3 (HP1) mark silent ones. CpG methylation silences promoters and is copied after replication by DNMT1 at hemimethylated sites, giving true epigenetic memory. Imprinting uses parent specific methylation at control regions, X inactivation uses the Xist RNA, and bisulfite sequencing reads methylation by converting only unmethylated C to T.
Section 5Regulation by RNA: RNAi and microRNA
The discovery of RNA interference
In 1998 Andrew Fire and Craig Mello found that injecting C. elegans with double stranded RNA (dsRNA) matching a gene silenced it far more strongly than sense or antisense RNA, at only a few molecules per cell. They called this RNA interference (RNAi). It is an ancient defense against viruses and transposons, and its machinery is shared with endogenous regulators, the microRNAs. The first microRNA, lin-4, had been found in worms by Victor Ambros and Gary Ruvkun in 1993.
Shared machinery: Dicer, Argonaute and RISC
Small RNAs of 20 to 30 nucleotides guide proteins to complementary targets. Two enzymes are central:
- Dicer, an RNase III family enzyme, cuts dsRNA or hairpin RNA into duplexes about 21 to 23 bp long with 2 nucleotide overhangs at each 3′ end.
- Argonaute (AGO) proteins bind one strand of the duplex, the guide strand, and discard the other, the passenger strand. The Argonaute with its guide is the core of the RNA induced silencing complex (RISC). In humans, AGO2 has slicer activity that cuts a target paired along the full length of the guide.
siRNAs and microRNAs compared
Small interfering RNAs (siRNAs) come from long dsRNA, such as a viral replication intermediate, a transposon transcript read in both directions, or an experimenter's synthetic duplex. They usually pair perfectly with their target, and AGO slicing cuts the target in the middle of the paired region, after which the fragments are degraded.
MicroRNAs (miRNAs) come from the cell's own genes. Their biogenesis has several steps:
- RNA polymerase II transcribes a long primary miRNA (pri-miRNA), capped and polyadenylated, containing one or more hairpins. Many miRNAs sit in introns of protein coding genes.
- In the nucleus, the Microprocessor, made of the RNase III enzyme Drosha and its partner DGCR8, cuts out a hairpin of about 60 to 70 nucleotides, the precursor miRNA (pre-miRNA).
- Exportin-5, powered by Ran-GTP, carries the pre-miRNA to the cytoplasm.
- Dicer removes the loop, leaving a duplex of about 22 bp.
- One strand is loaded into Argonaute to form the active miRISC.
In animals, a miRNA usually pairs only partly with its target, in the 3′ UTR. The key region is the seed, nucleotides 2 to 8 from the miRNA 5′ end. Without full pairing, AGO does not slice; instead miRISC recruits GW182, which brings in deadenylases, represses translation and leads to decay. The effect on one target is modest, but each miRNA has hundreds of targets, and more than 60 percent of human protein coding genes carry conserved sites. Plant miRNAs usually pair nearly perfectly and direct slicing.
| Feature | siRNA | miRNA (animal) | piRNA |
|---|---|---|---|
| Source | Long dsRNA (virus, transposon, experimental) | Endogenous hairpin genes | Single stranded precursors from piRNA clusters |
| Processing enzymes | Dicer | Drosha-DGCR8, then Dicer | Dicer independent |
| Length | 21 to 23 nt | About 22 nt | 24 to 31 nt |
| Partner protein | Argonaute (AGO2) | Argonaute (AGO1 to 4) | PIWI proteins |
| Pairing with target | Perfect | Partial; seed nucleotides 2 to 8 | Extensive |
| Main outcome | Target cleavage | Translational repression and mRNA decay | Transposon cleavage and silencing chromatin |
| Main role | Antiviral defense, research tool, drugs | Tuning of endogenous genes, development | Protecting the germ line genome |
Finding miRNA targets
Target prediction begins by finding 3′ UTR sequences complementary to seed nucleotides 2 to 8, written antiparallel as the reverse complement of the seed. Such a site is a 7mer; one that also has an A across from miRNA nucleotide 1 is an 8mer, the most effective. Predictions must be tested with reporters.
Step 1: Number from the 5′ end: U1 G2 A3 G4 G5 U6 A7 G8. The seed (nucleotides 2 to 8) is 5′-GAGGUAG-3′.
Step 2: The complement of each seed base, in order 2 to 8, is C U C C A U C. Because the strands are antiparallel, the mRNA reads this in reverse: 5′-CUACCUC-3′. Check by pairing: mRNA C (5′ end) pairs with G8, U with A7, A with U6, C with G5, C with G4, U with A3, and C (3′ end) with G2. All pairs are Watson-Crick.
Step 3: The 8mer adds an A on the 3′ side, across from nucleotide 1: 5′-CUACCUCA-3′.
Step 4: UTR-1 contains the seed sequence itself, which is the same sense as the miRNA, not its complement; it cannot pair. UTR-2 contains CUACCUCA, a full 8mer site.
Answer: (a) GAGGUAG; (b) 7mer CUACCUC, 8mer CUACCUCA; (c) UTR-2. The most common error is copying the seed directly instead of writing its reverse complement.
Biological roles and other regulatory RNAs
MicroRNAs often control developmental timing. lin-4 and let-7 switch worm larvae between stages, and human let-7 represses oncogenes such as RAS. Some miRNAs act as oncogenes (the miR-17-92 cluster) and others as tumor suppressors (miR-15a and miR-16-1, deleted in many chronic lymphocytic leukemias).
PIWI-interacting RNAs (piRNAs) silence transposons in the germ line by cleaving their transcripts and guiding DNA and H3K9 methylation to their copies. Long noncoding RNAs (over 200 nucleotides), such as Xist, act as scaffolds that bring chromatin modifiers to particular loci.
RNAi as a tool and a therapy
RNAi made reverse genetics easy: feeding worms bacteria that express dsRNA silences the matching gene. In mammalian cells long dsRNA triggers an interferon response, so researchers use synthetic 21 nucleotide siRNAs or short hairpin RNAs (shRNAs). RNAi gives a knockdown rather than a knockout, and partial seed matches cause off target effects.
siRNA drugs, chemically stabilized and delivered to the liver in lipid nanoparticles or attached to GalNAc (which binds a hepatocyte receptor), are now approved: patisiran silences transthyretin in hereditary transthyretin amyloidosis, and inclisiran silences PCSK9 to lower LDL cholesterol with dosing about twice a year.
Small RNAs guide Argonaute proteins to complementary targets. siRNAs from long dsRNA pair perfectly and direct cleavage; miRNAs, processed by Drosha-DGCR8 and Dicer from endogenous hairpins, pair through their seed (nucleotides 2 to 8) in 3′ UTRs and cause translational repression and decay; piRNAs with PIWI proteins guard the germ line against transposons. Target sites are the reverse complement of the seed, and RNAi now serves as both a research tool and a class of drugs.
The chapter in one breath
- Cis-acting sites affect only linked genes; trans-acting factors diffuse and act anywhere.
- Negative control uses repressors and positive control uses activators; inducible systems are turned on by a signal and repressible systems turned off.
- The lac operon is induced by allolactose removing the repressor and activated by CAP-cAMP when glucose is low.
- In partial diploids, lacI− is recessive, lacIS is dominant and Oc is cis-dominant.
- The trp operon is repressed by TrpR with tryptophan and fine tuned by attenuation, in which ribosome stalling chooses between 2:3 and 3:4 hairpins.
- Eukaryotic activators have modular DNA binding and activation domains and work through Mediator and chromatin modifiers.
- Enhancers act at a distance, in either orientation, by DNA looping; insulators bound by CTCF limit their reach.
- Histone acetylation and H3K4me3 mark active chromatin; H3K27me3 and H3K9me3 mark silent chromatin.
- CpG methylation is set by DNMT3A/B, copied by DNMT1, and removed by TET enzymes; bisulfite converts only unmethylated C.
- Imprinting and X inactivation use methylation and noncoding RNAs to silence one copy of a gene or chromosome.
- siRNAs direct cleavage, miRNAs repress through seed pairing, and piRNAs silence transposons.
Words worth knowing
| Term | What it means |
|---|---|
| Cis-acting element | A DNA or RNA sequence that regulates only the gene on the same molecule. |
| Trans-acting factor | A diffusible product, usually a protein or RNA, that can regulate genes anywhere in the cell. |
| Operon | A group of bacterial genes transcribed from one promoter into a single mRNA under shared control. |
| Inducer | A small molecule that turns on transcription, often by releasing a repressor from DNA. |
| CAP | Catabolite activator protein; with cAMP it binds near the lac promoter and helps RNA polymerase bind. |
| Partial diploid | A bacterium carrying a second copy of some genes, usually on an F′ plasmid, used to test dominance and cis or trans action. |
| Attenuation | Control by premature termination of transcription, governed by translation of a leader sequence. |
| Enhancer | A cluster of activator binding sites that raises transcription from a distance in either orientation. |
| Mediator | A large coactivator complex that bridges activators and RNA polymerase II. |
| Insulator | A boundary element, often bound by CTCF, that blocks enhancer action or heterochromatin spread across it. |
| Polycomb | Protein complexes that maintain silencing of developmental genes, depositing H3K27me3. |
| CpG island | A CG rich stretch, often at a promoter, that is usually unmethylated. |
| Epigenetic | Describing a change in gene function that is heritable through cell division without a change in DNA sequence. |
| Genomic imprinting | Expression of only one allele of a gene depending on which parent transmitted it. |
| Xist | A long noncoding RNA that coats and silences the inactive X chromosome. |
| Bisulfite sequencing | A method that converts unmethylated cytosine to uracil so methylated sites can be read. |
| Dicer | An RNase III enzyme that cuts double stranded RNA into 21 to 23 bp small RNA duplexes. |
| Argonaute | The protein that holds a small guide RNA and carries out silencing within RISC. |
| MicroRNA | An endogenous 22 nucleotide RNA that represses target mRNAs, mainly through seed pairing in the 3′ UTR. |
| Seed region | Nucleotides 2 to 8 of a miRNA, the main determinant of target recognition. |
Check yourself
Molecular Genetic Tools and Genomics
Fifty years ago no one could read a gene, copy it in a test tube or change a single chosen base in a living cell. Today a student can amplify DNA from a drop of saliva in an afternoon, sequence a whole human genome in a day and edit a gene with a programmable enzyme borrowed from bacteria. This chapter explains the tools that made genetics a molecular science and the genomic thinking they made possible.
By the end of this chapter you can
- Explain how restriction enzymes, DNA ligase and plasmid vectors are used to clone DNA, and calculate expected restriction site frequencies.
- Describe the steps of the polymerase chain reaction and calculate product yield and relative expression by qPCR.
- Read a Sanger sequencing result and contrast it with short read and long read sequencing.
- Calculate sequencing coverage and explain why repeats make genome assembly difficult.
- Design a CRISPR-Cas9 guide next to a PAM and predict the outcomes of NHEJ and HDR repair.
- Compare nuclease editing with base editing, prime editing and CRISPR interference.
- Describe how genome sequence is annotated and what fraction of the human genome is coding, regulatory and repetitive.
- Interpret RNA-seq fold changes, distinguish orthologs from paralogs, and use dN/dS to infer selection.
Section 1Restriction enzymes, cloning and PCR
Restriction enzymes: molecular scissors
Bacteria defend themselves against viruses with restriction-modification systems. A restriction endonuclease cuts DNA at a specific recognition sequence, and a partner methyltransferase methylates the same sequence in the host's own DNA so that it is protected. Invading phage DNA, lacking the methyl marks, is cut. The type II enzymes used in the lab cut within or right next to their recognition site, which is usually 4 to 8 bp long and palindromic: it reads the same 5′ to 3′ on both strands. EcoRI recognizes 5′-GAATTC-3′, whose complement read 5′ to 3′ is also GAATTC.
Enzymes leave three kinds of ends:
| Enzyme | Site (cut marked ^) | End produced | Source organism |
|---|---|---|---|
| EcoRI | G^AATTC | 4 nt 5′ overhang (sticky) | Escherichia coli |
| BamHI | G^GATCC | 4 nt 5′ overhang (sticky) | Bacillus amyloliquefaciens |
| PstI | CTGCA^G | 4 nt 3′ overhang (sticky) | Providencia stuartii |
| SmaI | CCC^GGG | Blunt | Serratia marcescens |
| AluI | AG^CT | Blunt; 4 bp site cuts often | Arthrobacter luteus |
Sticky ends are single stranded overhangs that base pair with any other end made by the same enzyme. When a vector and an insert are cut with the same enzyme, their ends anneal, and DNA ligase seals the sugar-phosphate backbone by forming phosphodiester bonds. Cutting with two different enzymes gives incompatible ends at either side, which forces the insert to enter in one orientation (directional cloning). Blunt ends can be joined to any other blunt end, but less efficiently.
If bases were random and equally frequent, a given 4 bp site would occur on average once every 44 = 256 bp, a 6 bp site once every 46 = 4,096 bp and an 8 bp site once every 48 = 65,536 bp. Real genomes deviate (CpG containing sites are rare in mammals), but the estimate is useful. Fragments are separated by gel electrophoresis: DNA is negatively charged, so it migrates toward the positive electrode, and smaller fragments move faster through the agarose mesh. Distance traveled is roughly proportional to the logarithm of size, so sizes are read against a ladder of known fragments.
Step 1 (a): A 6 bp site occurs once every 46 = 4,096 bp. 4,600,000 ÷ 4,096 = 1,123, so about 1,100 sites.
Step 2 (b): Put EcoRI 3 kb from the left end. BamHI is either 4 kb or 6 kb from the left end.
Step 3: Test BamHI at 4 kb. Double digest pieces: 0 to 3 (3 kb), 3 to 4 (1 kb), 4 to 10 (6 kb). This matches 3, 1, 6.
Step 4: Test BamHI at 6 kb. Pieces: 3, 3 and 4 kb. This does not match.
Answer: (a) about 1,100 sites; (b) EcoRI at 3 kb and BamHI at 4 kb from the same end, 1 kb apart. Always check sums: 3 + 1 + 6 = 10 kb, the full fragment.
Vectors and cloning
A vector carries a DNA fragment into a host cell and replicates it there. A typical plasmid cloning vector has an origin of replication, a selectable marker such as an ampicillin resistance gene so that only cells that took up the plasmid survive, and a multiple cloning site (polylinker) containing many unique restriction sites. In many vectors the cloning site lies within the lacZα fragment. Cells carrying an empty vector make functional β-galactosidase and form blue colonies on X-gal; an insert disrupts lacZα, giving white colonies (blue-white screening). Plasmids are introduced into bacteria by transformation using chemically treated cells or a brief electric pulse.
Plasmids carry inserts up to about 10 to 15 kb. Larger fragments need other vectors: bacteriophage lambda (about 20 kb), cosmids (about 45 kb), bacterial artificial chromosomes (BACs, 100 to 300 kb) and yeast artificial chromosomes (up to 1 Mb or more). Expression vectors add a strong regulated promoter, such as a lac derived promoter induced by IPTG, so the cloned gene's protein can be produced.
Eukaryotic genes contain introns that bacteria cannot remove, so to express a human protein in bacteria researchers clone complementary DNA (cDNA). Retroviral reverse transcriptase copies mature mRNA, primed from its poly(A) tail with oligo(dT), into DNA. A collection of clones representing all mRNAs in a tissue is a cDNA library; one representing all of an organism's DNA is a genomic library.
The polymerase chain reaction
Invented by Kary Mullis in the 1980s, the polymerase chain reaction (PCR) copies a chosen segment of DNA billions of times in a few hours without cloning. A reaction contains template DNA, two primers (short single stranded oligonucleotides, usually 18 to 25 nt) complementary to opposite strands at the two ends of the target, the four dNTPs, Mg2+ and a heat stable DNA polymerase, classically Taq polymerase from the hot spring bacterium Thermus aquaticus. Each cycle has three steps:
- Denaturation at about 94 to 98 °C separates the strands.
- Annealing at about 50 to 65 °C, set a few degrees below the primers' melting temperature, lets primers pair with their sites.
- Extension at 72 °C, the optimum for Taq, lets polymerase add nucleotides to each primer's 3′ end, at roughly 1 kb per minute.
Because each new strand can serve as a template in the next cycle, the number of target copies ideally doubles each cycle: after n cycles, N = N0 × 2n. Products of exactly the length between the primers appear in cycle 3 and soon dominate. Amplification slows after about 30 to 35 cycles as primers and dNTPs run low. Taq lacks proofreading and makes roughly one error per 104 to 105 bases, so high fidelity proofreading polymerases are used when sequence accuracy matters. PCR is so sensitive that a single contaminating molecule can be amplified, so careful technique and negative controls are essential.
Variations: RT-PCR and quantitative PCR
RT-PCR starts with reverse transcription of RNA into cDNA, then amplifies it, to detect transcripts or RNA viruses. Quantitative (real time) PCR (qPCR) follows product accumulation each cycle with a fluorescent dye or probe. The threshold cycle (Ct) is the cycle at which fluorescence crosses a set threshold; the more starting template, the earlier this happens. Each cycle earlier means twice as much template. Relative expression is usually calculated by the ΔΔCt method, which normalizes the target gene to a stable reference gene in each sample.
Step 1 (a): N = 100 × 230 = 100 × 1,073,741,824 = about 1.07 × 1011 copies.
Step 2 (b): Normalize each sample: ΔCt = Ct(target) − Ct(reference). Control: 27.0 − 18.0 = 9.0. Treated: 24.5 − 18.5 = 6.0.
Step 3: ΔΔCt = ΔCt(treated) − ΔCt(control) = 6.0 − 9.0 = −3.0.
Step 4: Fold change = 2−ΔΔCt = 23 = 8.
Answer: (a) about 1.1 × 1011 copies; (b) the drug raises target expression eightfold. Note that the raw Ct difference (2.5 cycles) would have underestimated the change, because the treated sample was loaded with slightly less RNA.
Type II restriction enzymes cut palindromic sites into sticky or blunt ends that ligase can join, letting DNA be cloned into vectors with an origin, a selectable marker and a cloning site. A random n base site occurs once per 4n bp. PCR doubles a target each cycle of denaturing, annealing and extending; qPCR measures template amount from the threshold cycle, with fold change equal to 2−ΔΔCt.
Section 2Sequencing technologies
Sanger chain termination sequencing
In 1977 Frederick Sanger introduced the method that would dominate sequencing for thirty years. It exploits dideoxynucleotides (ddNTPs), which lack the 3′ hydroxyl group that DNA polymerase needs to attach the next nucleotide. A reaction contains a single stranded template, one primer, DNA polymerase, the four normal dNTPs and a small amount of the four ddNTPs. Each time polymerase happens to add a ddNTP instead of the matching dNTP, the strand stops growing. The result is a nested set of fragments, each beginning at the primer and ending at a particular position with a ddNTP that identifies the base there.
In the original method four separate reactions, one per ddNTP, were run in adjacent lanes of a gel. In modern automated sequencing each ddNTP carries a different colored fluorescent dye, so one reaction suffices; the fragments are separated by size in a thin capillary, and a laser reads the color of each fragment as it passes the detector. Fragments emerge from shortest to longest, so the sequence is read in the 5′ to 3′ direction of the newly synthesized strand, which is complementary to the template. A single Sanger read covers about 700 to 1,000 bases with very high accuracy (about 99.99 percent), so Sanger sequencing remains the standard for confirming a single mutation or checking a cloned insert.
Step 1: List the fragments in order of size with their terminal base: 1 C, 2 G, 3 A, 4 T, 5 C, 6 G, 7 A, 8 C, 9 T, 10 G.
Step 2: The shortest fragment ends nearest the primer, so this order is the new strand read 5′ to 3′: 5′-CGATCGACTG-3′.
Step 3: The template is complementary and antiparallel. Complement: GCTAGCTGAC, which runs 3′ to 5′. Written 5′ to 3′: 5′-CAGTCGATCG-3′.
Answer: new strand 5′-CGATCGACTG-3′; template 5′-CAGTCGATCG-3′. The usual mistake is reporting the new strand as the template.
Short read sequencing by synthesis
The Human Genome Project, completed in 2003 at a cost of about three billion dollars, relied on Sanger sequencing. Massively parallel (next generation) methods introduced after 2005 cut the cost of a human genome to a few hundred dollars by sequencing hundreds of millions of fragments at once. The most widely used approach is sequencing by synthesis with reversible terminators:
- Library preparation. Genomic DNA is fragmented to a few hundred base pairs and short adapters are ligated to both ends.
- Cluster amplification. Fragments bind to a glass flow cell coated with oligonucleotides matching the adapters and are copied in place by bridge amplification, producing clusters of about a thousand identical copies.
- Sequencing. Each cycle, polymerase adds one fluorescent nucleotide whose 3′ end is reversibly blocked. A camera records the color of every cluster, the dye and block are removed, and the cycle repeats.
Reads are short, typically 100 to 300 bases, and are often paired end (both ends of each fragment are read), which helps place them. Per base accuracy is about 99.9 percent. Short reads are ideal for resequencing, where reads are aligned to a reference genome to find variants, and for counting molecules, as in RNA-seq.
Long read sequencing
Two technologies read single molecules thousands of bases long. In single molecule real time sequencing, one polymerase sits at the bottom of a tiny well and the flash of each fluorescent nucleotide is recorded as it is incorporated. In nanopore sequencing, a single DNA strand is pulled through a protein pore in a membrane, and the change in ionic current reveals the bases in the pore; reads can exceed 100 kb, and modified bases such as 5-methylcytosine can be detected directly. Raw error rates were once high but repeated reading of the same molecule now gives accuracy above 99.9 percent.
| Method | Read length | Strengths | Limitations |
|---|---|---|---|
| Sanger | 700 to 1,000 bases | Very accurate; simple for one target | Low throughput, costly per base |
| Short read sequencing by synthesis | 100 to 300 bases, paired | Huge throughput, cheapest per base | Cannot span long repeats or resolve complex structure |
| Single molecule real time | 10 to 25 kb, highly accurate | Resolves repeats and haplotypes | Higher cost per base |
| Nanopore | Tens of kb to over 1 Mb | Longest reads, portable, reads base modifications | Somewhat higher error in some contexts |
Coverage and assembly
Because fragments are sampled randomly, some positions are read many times and others not at all. Coverage (depth) is the average number of reads covering a base: C = L × N ÷ G, where L is read length, N the number of reads and G genome size. If reads land at random, the number covering a given base follows a Poisson distribution, so the fraction of bases with zero coverage is about e−C (the Lander-Waterman estimate). Clinical genome sequencing typically aims for 30x or more so that both alleles at a heterozygous site are sampled many times.
Putting reads back together into a genome is assembly. De novo assembly builds the genome from overlaps among reads alone, producing contigs (continuous sequences) that are linked into scaffolds using paired reads or long reads. Reference based assembly aligns reads to an existing genome of the same species. The great obstacle is repeats: if a repeated element is longer than the reads, the assembler cannot tell which copy a read came from, and the assembly breaks. This is why the first human reference left roughly 8 percent of the genome, mostly centromeres and other long repeats, unfinished until long reads produced the first complete, telomere to telomere human sequence in 2022.
Step 1 (a): C = L × N ÷ G = 150 × 600,000,000 ÷ 3,100,000,000 = 90,000,000,000 ÷ 3,100,000,000 = 29.0, about 29x.
Step 2 (b): Fraction uncovered = e−5 = 0.0067.
Step 3: Bases uncovered = 0.0067 × 3,100,000,000 = about 20.9 million bases.
Answer: about 29x coverage; at 5x, roughly 21 Mb (0.67 percent) would be missed entirely, and many more bases would have too few reads to call both alleles. Real coverage is less even than Poisson, so the true gap is larger.
Sanger sequencing uses ddNTPs lacking a 3′ OH to make nested fragments read from shortest to longest as the new strand. Massively parallel short read sequencing gives enormous, cheap output of 100 to 300 base reads; long read methods span repeats and detect base modifications. Coverage C = LN/G, and the fraction of bases missed is about e−C. Repeats longer than reads are the main barrier to assembly.
Section 3CRISPR and genome editing
From bacterial immunity to a programmable tool
Many bacteria and most archaea carry CRISPR arrays (clustered regularly interspaced short palindromic repeats): short repeats separated by unique spacers, many of which match sequences from viruses and plasmids. Nearby lie cas (CRISPR associated) genes. Together they form an adaptive immune system. When a cell survives infection, Cas proteins snip a piece of the invader's DNA and insert it as a new spacer at the front of the array, a heritable record of the encounter. The array is transcribed and processed into short CRISPR RNAs (crRNAs), each carrying one spacer. A crRNA guides Cas nucleases to destroy any matching DNA that enters later.
In 2012 Jennifer Doudna and Emmanuelle Charpentier showed that the Cas9 nuclease of Streptococcus pyogenes could be directed to cut any chosen DNA sequence in a test tube using a guide RNA, and within months others showed it worked in human cells. Earlier engineered nucleases, zinc finger nucleases and TALENs, recognized DNA through custom built proteins, which had to be redesigned for every target. Cas9 is retargeted simply by changing 20 nucleotides of RNA.
How Cas9 finds and cuts its target
In the lab, the natural crRNA and its partner tracrRNA are fused into a single guide RNA (sgRNA) of about 100 nucleotides. Its first 20 nucleotides, the spacer, match the target. Cas9 first scans DNA for a short protospacer adjacent motif (PAM), which for S. pyogenes Cas9 is 5′-NGG-3′ (N is any base). On finding a PAM, Cas9 unwinds the adjacent DNA and tests whether the guide pairs with it. If the 20 nt protospacer immediately 5′ of the PAM matches the guide, the two nuclease domains of Cas9 (HNH and RuvC) each cut one strand, producing a blunt double strand break 3 bp upstream of the PAM. The PAM requirement is how bacteria avoid cutting their own CRISPR arrays, which contain the spacer but not the PAM. Mismatches near the PAM, in the so called seed region of the guide, block cutting more than mismatches far from it.
Step 1: Search the strand for NGG. Positions 37 to 39 read CGG (numbering from the 5′ end), the only NGG with 20 bases upstream on this strand.
Step 2: The protospacer is the 20 nt immediately 5′ of the PAM, positions 17 to 36: ATGGCAACCTTGAGCGTTAC.
Step 3: The guide spacer has the same sequence as the protospacer, written in RNA: 5′-AUGGCAACCUUGAGCGUUAC-3′. It pairs with the opposite (target) strand. Do not include the PAM in the guide.
Step 4: Cas9 cuts 3 bp upstream of the PAM, between protospacer nucleotides 17 and 18, which are positions 33 and 34: ...GAGCGTT^ACCGG...
Answer: guide 5′-AUGGCAACCUUGAGCGUUAC-3′; blunt cut between T33 and A34. If NHEJ leaves a random small indel, about two thirds of indels shift the reading frame (any length not divisible by 3), which usually knocks out the gene.
Repairing the break: knockouts and knock-ins
Cas9 only cuts; the cell's own repair pathways decide the outcome. Nonhomologous end joining (NHEJ) rejoins the broken ends directly and often adds or removes a few bases. Because the edited site is still a target, cutting and repair repeat until an indel destroys the site. In a coding exon, frameshifting indels create premature stop codons and usually a knockout. Homology directed repair (HDR) uses a template with sequence matching both sides of the break; if researchers supply a donor DNA carrying a desired change between homology arms, the cell copies it in, giving a precise knock-in. HDR is active mainly in dividing cells in S and G2 and is less efficient than NHEJ.
Beyond cutting
| Tool | Components | What it does |
|---|---|---|
| Cas9 nuclease | Cas9 + sgRNA | Double strand break; knockout by NHEJ or knock-in by HDR |
| Cytosine base editor | Cas9 nickase fused to a cytidine deaminase | Converts C•G to T•A in a small window without a double strand break |
| Adenine base editor | Cas9 nickase fused to an engineered adenosine deaminase | Converts A•T to G•C |
| Prime editor | Cas9 nickase fused to reverse transcriptase + pegRNA | Writes any small substitution, insertion or deletion encoded in the guide's extension |
| CRISPRi and CRISPRa | Catalytically dead Cas9 (dCas9) fused to a repressor or activator domain | Turns transcription down or up without changing DNA |
| Cas12a | Single crRNA; T rich PAM (TTTV) | Staggered cut; processes its own guide arrays |
| Cas13 | RNA guided RNase | Cleaves RNA; used for knockdown and diagnostics |
CRISPR is also used as a screening tool: libraries of tens of thousands of guides, one or more per gene, are delivered to a population of cells, which are then selected (for example, for drug resistance), and sequencing the guides in survivors reveals which gene knockouts matter. In agriculture, editing has produced disease resistant and nonbrowning crops. A gene drive places the Cas9 and guide genes inside the target site itself, so a heterozygote converts its wild type allele and passes the drive to nearly all offspring; drives are being tested to suppress malaria carrying mosquitoes.
Editing raises safety and ethical issues. Off target cutting at similar sequences, large deletions at the target, and mosaicism when editing happens after the first cell division are technical risks. Editing of somatic cells affects only the patient, whereas germline editing of embryos would be inherited. When edited babies were announced in 2018, the work was widely condemned as unsafe and unjustified, and most countries restrict heritable editing.
CRISPR began as bacterial adaptive immunity. SpCas9, guided by a 20 nt spacer, cuts both strands 3 bp upstream of an NGG PAM. NHEJ repair leaves indels that knock out genes; HDR with a donor makes precise changes. Base editors, prime editors and dCas9 fusions change bases or expression without double strand breaks, while off target effects and germline editing remain major concerns.
Section 4Genome structure and annotation
Genome size and gene number
Genomes vary enormously in size, but the number of genes varies much less, and neither tracks organismal complexity well. The lack of correlation between genome size (the C-value, the DNA content of a haploid genome) and complexity is called the C-value paradox. Some amoebae, lungfish and lilies have genomes many times larger than ours. The paradox is resolved by noncoding DNA: genome size differences come mostly from repetitive sequences and transposable elements, not from extra genes.
| Organism | Genome size | Protein coding genes (approx.) | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Escherichia coli | 4.6 Mb | 4,300 | About 88 percent coding; few introns |
| Saccharomyces cerevisiae (yeast) | 12 Mb | 6,000 | Compact; few introns |
| Caenorhabditis elegans | 100 Mb | 20,000 | First animal genome sequenced (1998) |
| Drosophila melanogaster | 140 Mb | 14,000 | Fewer genes than a worm |
| Arabidopsis thaliana | 135 Mb | 27,000 | Model plant with a small genome |
| Homo sapiens | 3.1 Gb | 20,000 | About 1.5 percent protein coding |
| Wheat (bread) | About 16 Gb | About 100,000 | Hexaploid; mostly repeats |
In bacteria, genes are packed densely, with about one gene per kilobase and short intergenic spacers. In humans, the average protein coding gene spans about 27 kb, but its mature mRNA is only about 3 kb, because most of the gene is introns; the average gene has about 9 exons. Only about 1.5 percent of the human genome encodes protein. Roughly another 5 to 10 percent is under evolutionary constraint, including regulatory elements and noncoding RNA genes. Humans also have about 20,000 noncoding RNA genes, including those for rRNA, tRNA, snRNA, microRNAs and long noncoding RNAs.
Repetitive DNA and transposable elements
About half of the human genome consists of transposable elements, sequences that move or once moved within the genome (Chapter 7), almost all of them now inactive.
- LINEs (long interspersed nuclear elements) are retrotransposons of about 6 kb that encode their own reverse transcriptase. LINE-1 makes up about 17 percent of the genome, and a few dozen copies remain active.
- SINEs (short interspersed nuclear elements), about 300 bp, are copied using LINE enzymes. The Alu element alone has over a million copies, about 10 percent of the genome.
- LTR retrotransposons, including endogenous retroviruses, make up about 8 percent, and DNA transposons about 3 percent.
Other repeats include satellite DNA (tandem arrays at centromeres, such as the 171 bp alpha satellite), minisatellites and microsatellites (short tandem repeats used in forensic profiling), and segmental duplications, long blocks over 1 kb with more than 90 percent identity that make up about 5 percent of the genome and promote rearrangements by unequal crossing over. Gene families arise by duplication, and many duplicates decay into pseudogenes; processed pseudogenes, lacking introns and ending in a poly(A) stretch, are mRNA copies reinserted by LINE reverse transcriptase.
Annotation: finding the genes
A raw genome sequence is a string of letters. Annotation identifies the genes and other functional elements in it. Structural annotation marks where genes, exons, introns, UTRs and regulatory elements lie; functional annotation assigns probable roles, usually by similarity to known proteins and domains.
The simplest clue to a protein coding gene is an open reading frame (ORF): a stretch beginning with a start codon (ATG) and continuing without a stop codon (TAA, TAG or TGA). Each double stranded sequence has six possible reading frames, three on each strand. In random sequence, 3 of the 64 codons are stops, so stops occur on average every 64 ÷ 3 = 21 codons. A long ORF is therefore unlikely by chance and strongly suggests a real gene. In bacteria, finding long ORFs and a ribosome binding site upstream identifies most genes. In eukaryotes, introns break ORFs into pieces, so gene finding programs combine several kinds of evidence:
- Ab initio predictions use statistical signals: splice site consensus sequences (GU at the 5′ end of an intron and AG at the 3′ end), codon usage, start and stop codons and promoter features.
- Transcript evidence from cDNA and RNA-seq shows exactly which sequences are present in mature mRNA, revealing exon boundaries and alternative isoforms.
- Homology evidence aligns known proteins and the genomes of related species; sequences conserved across species are likely to be functional.
Annotation also uses CpG islands, chromatin marks such as H3K4me3 at promoters and H3K27ac at enhancers (Chapter 9), and DNase or ATAC accessibility. The project that mapped these features across many human cell types concluded that a large fraction of the genome shows some biochemical activity, though how much of that activity matters for fitness is debated; evolutionary constraint suggests that under 10 percent is functional in that stricter sense.
Step 1 (a): The chance a random codon is not a stop is 61 ÷ 64 = 0.953. For 100 independent codons: 0.953100. Using logs: 100 × ln(0.953) = 100 × (−0.0480) = −4.80, and e−4.80 = 0.0082.
Step 2: So only about 0.8 percent of random 100 codon stretches in a given frame are stop free. A 300 codon ORF would arise by chance with probability about (0.953)300 = 5.6 × 10−7.
Step 3 (b): Coding DNA = 4,700 × 950 = 4,465,000 bp. Fraction = 4,465,000 ÷ 5,000,000 = 0.893.
Answer: (a) about 0.008, which is why long ORFs flag real genes; (b) about 89 percent coding, typical of bacteria and in sharp contrast to about 1.5 percent in humans.
Organelle genomes
Mitochondria and chloroplasts carry their own small circular genomes, relics of their bacterial ancestors. Human mitochondrial DNA is 16,569 bp and encodes 37 genes: 13 proteins of the respiratory chain, 22 tRNAs and 2 rRNAs. It has almost no noncoding DNA apart from the control region (D-loop), is present in hundreds to thousands of copies per cell and is maternally inherited. Most mitochondrial proteins, more than a thousand, are encoded in the nucleus and imported, showing that genes have moved from the organelle to the nucleus over evolutionary time.
Genome size reflects mostly repeats, not gene number (the C-value paradox). Only about 1.5 percent of the human genome codes for protein, about half is transposable element sequence, and genes are long because of introns. Annotation combines ORFs (long ORFs are improbable by chance), splice signals, transcript evidence and conservation.
Section 5Functional and comparative genomics
From sequence to function
Functional genomics asks what all the genes and elements of a genome do, on a genome wide scale. Two broad strategies exist. Forward genetics starts from a phenotype, such as a mutant that cannot grow on lactose, and finds the responsible gene. Reverse genetics starts from a gene sequence and disrupts it, with knockouts, RNAi or CRISPR, to see what phenotype results. Genome wide versions of reverse genetics include collections of yeast strains with every gene deleted and pooled CRISPR screens in human cells. Such screens show, for example, that only about 1,000 of yeast's 6,000 genes are essential in rich medium, and that about 2,000 human genes are essential for growth of a typical cell line.
Measuring the transcriptome and more
The transcriptome is the set of RNAs present in a sample. RNA-seq converts RNA to cDNA, sequences it, and maps reads to the genome; the number of reads per gene estimates its expression. Because samples are sequenced to different depths and genes differ in length, counts are normalized, for example as counts per million (CPM) or transcripts per million (TPM), which also corrects for length. Changes are usually reported as log2 fold change, so that a doubling is +1, a halving is −1 and no change is 0. Statistical tests across biological replicates determine whether a change is significant, and the large number of genes tested requires correction for multiple comparisons. Single cell RNA-seq profiles thousands of individual cells and has revealed new cell types in many tissues. Older microarrays measured hybridization of labeled cDNA to probes on a chip.
| Method | What it measures | Typical question |
|---|---|---|
| RNA-seq | Abundance of every transcript | Which genes change after treatment? |
| Single cell RNA-seq | Transcripts in individual cells | What cell types are in this tissue? |
| ChIP-seq | Genomic sites bound by a protein or carrying a histone mark | Where does this transcription factor bind? |
| ATAC-seq | Open, accessible chromatin | Which enhancers are active in this cell type? |
| Mass spectrometry proteomics | Protein identity and abundance | Does the mRNA change reach the protein level? |
| Pooled CRISPR screen | Effect of knocking out each gene on a selected trait | Which genes are needed for drug resistance? |
Other genome wide methods map where proteins bind and which regions are open. ChIP-seq (chromatin immunoprecipitation followed by sequencing) uses an antibody to pull down a transcription factor or histone mark with its bound DNA. ATAC-seq uses a transposase that inserts adapters preferentially into open chromatin, mapping accessible regulatory elements. Proteomics identifies and quantifies proteins by mass spectrometry. Combining these layers lets researchers trace how a variant in an enhancer changes chromatin, transcription and finally protein levels.
Step 1: CPM = reads ÷ total reads in millions. Control: 500 ÷ 20 = 25 CPM. Treated: 1,800 ÷ 30 = 60 CPM.
Step 2: Fold change = 60 ÷ 25 = 2.4.
Step 3: log2(2.4) = ln(2.4) ÷ ln(2) = 0.875 ÷ 0.693 = 1.26.
Answer: 25 and 60 CPM; a 2.4 fold increase, log2 fold change of 1.26. Comparing raw counts (1,800 ÷ 500 = 3.6) would have overstated the change because the treated library was sequenced more deeply.
Comparative genomics: homologs, orthologs and paralogs
Comparative genomics compares genomes across species to infer function and evolutionary history. Genes related by common descent are homologs. Homologs come in two kinds that students often confuse:
- Orthologs are genes in different species that descend from a single gene in their last common ancestor and were separated by a speciation event. Human and mouse β-globin are orthologs. Orthologs usually keep the same function, which is why studying a gene in mice or yeast tells us about the human version.
- Paralogs are genes related by a duplication event, usually within one genome. Human α-globin and β-globin are paralogs. After duplication, one copy may keep the original function while the other is lost, divides the original functions (subfunctionalization) or gains a new one (neofunctionalization).
Synteny, the conservation of gene order on chromosomes, helps identify true orthologs and reveals rearrangements: large blocks of human chromosomes correspond to blocks of mouse chromosomes with their genes in the same order. Sequence conservation outside genes points to function. Some ultraconserved elements are identical over 200 bp or more between human, mouse and rat, and many act as developmental enhancers.
Reading selection from sequence: dN/dS
Comparing coding sequences of orthologs reveals what kind of selection has acted. Substitutions are divided into synonymous (silent, not changing the amino acid) and nonsynonymous (changing it). dS is the number of synonymous substitutions per synonymous site, and dN the number of nonsynonymous substitutions per nonsynonymous site. Because synonymous changes are nearly neutral, dS approximates the neutral rate. The ratio ω = dN/dS then indicates selection on the protein: ω < 1 means purifying selection removed most amino acid changes (the usual case); ω ≈ 1 suggests neutral evolution, as in pseudogenes; ω > 1 indicates positive selection favoring amino acid change, as in some immune and reproductive genes.
Step 1: dN = 6 ÷ 300 = 0.020.
Step 2: dS = 10 ÷ 100 = 0.100.
Step 3: ω = 0.020 ÷ 0.100 = 0.20.
Answer: ω = 0.2, well below 1. About 80 percent of amino acid changes that would otherwise have accumulated were removed by purifying selection, so this protein is functionally constrained. Note that counting raw differences (6 versus 10) without dividing by the number of sites of each kind would give a misleading 0.6.
Genomes of populations and communities
Sequencing many individuals of a species reveals variation. Population projects have catalogued hundreds of millions of human single nucleotide variants, most rare, which underpin association studies (Chapter 11) and clinical interpretation of variants. A species' pangenome includes genes present in some individuals but not others; in bacteria the variable portion can be larger than the shared core. Metagenomics sequences DNA directly from environmental samples, such as soil, seawater or the human gut, identifying organisms that cannot be cultured and showing that the gut microbiome carries far more genes than the human genome.
Functional genomics measures what genes do on a genome wide scale: forward and reverse genetic screens, RNA-seq with normalized counts and log2 fold changes, ChIP-seq, ATAC-seq and proteomics. Comparative genomics separates orthologs (split by speciation) from paralogs (split by duplication), uses synteny and conservation to find function, and uses ω = dN/dS to detect purifying (ω < 1) or positive (ω > 1) selection.
The chapter in one breath
- Restriction enzymes cut palindromic sites into sticky or blunt ends; a random n base site appears once per 4n bp.
- Ligase joins fragments into vectors carrying an origin, a selectable marker and a cloning site; cDNA copies mRNA without introns.
- PCR doubles its target each cycle; qPCR fold change equals 2−ΔΔCt.
- Sanger sequencing uses ddNTPs to make nested fragments read from shortest to longest as the new strand.
- Short reads give massive throughput; long reads span repeats and detect base modifications.
- Coverage C = LN/G, and about e−C of bases are missed.
- Cas9 cuts 3 bp upstream of an NGG PAM under a 20 nt guide; NHEJ gives indels and HDR precise edits.
- Base editors, prime editors and dCas9 fusions change bases or expression without double strand breaks.
- About 1.5 percent of the human genome is protein coding and about half is transposable elements.
- Annotation combines long ORFs, splice signals, RNA-seq and conservation.
- Orthologs arise by speciation, paralogs by duplication, and dN/dS below 1 signals purifying selection.
Words worth knowing
| Term | What it means |
|---|---|
| Restriction endonuclease | A bacterial enzyme that cuts DNA at a specific, usually palindromic, recognition sequence. |
| Sticky end | A short single stranded overhang left by a staggered cut that pairs with matching ends. |
| DNA ligase | The enzyme that seals breaks in the DNA backbone by forming phosphodiester bonds. |
| Vector | A DNA molecule, such as a plasmid, that carries a fragment into a host cell and replicates it. |
| Selectable marker | A vector gene, such as antibiotic resistance, that lets only cells carrying the vector survive. |
| cDNA | DNA copied from mRNA by reverse transcriptase, lacking introns. |
| PCR | Polymerase chain reaction; cycles of denaturing, annealing and extension that amplify a target exponentially. |
| Primer | A short oligonucleotide that pairs with a template and provides a 3′ end for polymerase. |
| Threshold cycle | The qPCR cycle at which fluorescence crosses a set level; lower values mean more starting template. |
| Dideoxynucleotide | A nucleotide lacking the 3′ hydroxyl, which ends DNA synthesis when incorporated. |
| Paired end reads | Sequence reads from both ends of the same fragment, a known distance apart. |
| Coverage | The average number of reads covering each base of a genome. |
| Contig | A continuous stretch of sequence assembled from overlapping reads. |
| De novo assembly | Building a genome sequence from read overlaps without a reference. |
| CRISPR array | Bacterial repeats separated by spacers that record past infections. |
| Guide RNA | The RNA whose 20 nt spacer directs Cas9 to a matching DNA target. |
| PAM | Protospacer adjacent motif; a short sequence (NGG for SpCas9) required next to the target. |
| NHEJ | Nonhomologous end joining; direct rejoining of a break that often leaves small indels. |
| HDR | Homology directed repair; repair copied from a homologous template such as a donor DNA. |
| Base editor | A Cas9 nickase fused to a deaminase that changes one base without a double strand break. |
| C-value paradox | The lack of correlation between genome size and organismal complexity. |
| Alu element | A primate SINE of about 300 bp with over a million copies in the human genome. |
| Open reading frame | A stretch of codons from a start codon to a stop codon that could encode a protein. |
| Annotation | Identifying genes and other functional elements in a genome sequence and assigning their roles. |
| RNA-seq | Sequencing cDNA made from RNA to measure transcript levels across the genome. |
| ChIP-seq | Sequencing DNA pulled down with an antibody to map where a protein or histone mark binds. |
| Ortholog | A homolog in another species separated from the gene by a speciation event. |
| Paralog | A homolog in the same lineage separated from the gene by a duplication event. |
| Synteny | Conservation of gene order along chromosomes between species. |
| dN/dS | The ratio of nonsynonymous to synonymous substitution rates, used to infer selection on a protein. |
| Metagenomics | Sequencing DNA directly from an environmental or community sample. |
Check yourself
Quantitative Genetics
Most of the traits people care about, such as height, blood pressure, milk yield, grain weight and the risk of type 2 diabetes, do not sort into neat Mendelian classes. They vary smoothly across a range because many genes and many environmental factors each nudge them a little. Quantitative genetics gives you the tools to measure that variation, divide it into genetic and environmental parts, predict how a population will respond to selection, and finally track down the individual genes hiding inside the bell curve.
By the end of this chapter you can
- Distinguish continuous, meristic and threshold traits and explain how many additive alleles plus environmental noise produce a smooth distribution.
- Use the multiple factor hypothesis to find the number of genes from the fraction of extreme F2 offspring and to predict phenotype class frequencies.
- Calculate a mean, variance, standard deviation, covariance, correlation coefficient and regression slope from a small data set.
- Partition phenotypic variance into additive, dominance, epistatic and environmental components.
- Define and estimate broad sense and narrow sense heritability from inbred lines, twins and parent offspring regression, and state what heritability does not mean.
- Apply the breeder's equation, R = h2S, and calculate realized heritability.
- Explain correlated response, selection limits and why long term selection experiments keep responding.
- Describe how QTL mapping in experimental crosses locates genes using markers and LOD scores.
- Read a Manhattan plot, explain the genome wide significance threshold, and discuss polygenic scores and missing heritability.
Section 1Continuous traits and polygenic inheritance
Discrete and continuous variation
Mendel chose traits that fall into a few clear categories: round or wrinkled seeds, purple or white flowers. Traits like these show discontinuous (discrete) variation, and a single gene with large effect explains the categories. Most traits in nature behave differently. Measure the height of 1,000 adults, the weight of 1,000 bean seeds or the systolic blood pressure of 1,000 patients and you get a smooth, roughly bell shaped distribution with no natural breaks. These are quantitative traits, also called continuous or complex traits. Their study is quantitative genetics, and its language is the language of statistics rather than of ratios.
Quantitative traits come in three broad types, and it helps to recognize which one you are dealing with:
- Continuous traits can take any value within a range: height, body mass, blood glucose, milk yield, the time a plant takes to flower.
- Meristic traits are counted in whole numbers but still show many classes and a roughly normal distribution: the number of bristles on a fruit fly, kernels on a corn ear, eggs laid by a hen in a year, vertebrae in a snake.
- Threshold traits appear as present or absent, yet the liability that underlies them is continuous. An individual develops the condition only when the combined effect of many genes and environmental factors pushes its liability past a threshold. Cleft lip with or without cleft palate, pyloric stenosis, type 2 diabetes, schizophrenia and many congenital heart defects behave this way.
The multiple factor hypothesis
An early resolution of how Mendelian genes could produce continuous variation came from experiments on wheat kernel color by the Swedish geneticist Herman Nilsson-Ehle. He crossed a red kerneled line with a white kerneled line. The F1 were an intermediate pink. In some F2 families he found 1/16 as red as the red parent and 1/16 as white as the white parent, with three intermediate shades in between in the ratio 1:4:6:4:1. In other crosses only 1/64 of the F2 were as extreme as either parent.
He explained these results with the multiple factor hypothesis (the polygene hypothesis): a quantitative trait is controlled by several genes, each segregating in a Mendelian way, and each with a small, additive effect. In the two gene case, call the alleles that add red pigment A and B (the contributing or additive alleles) and the alleles that add nothing a and b (the noncontributing alleles). Every contributing allele adds the same increment of color, so the phenotype depends only on how many contributing alleles an individual carries, not on which gene they belong to. An AaBb F1 has two of four, so it is intermediate. In the F2, the number of contributing alleles follows the binomial distribution: 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 contributing alleles occur in the ratio 1:4:6:4:1.
Three general rules follow for n genes, each with two equally effective alleles, in a cross of two heterozygotes (or in the F2 from two homozygous extreme parents):
- The number of distinct phenotypic classes is 2n + 1.
- The fraction of offspring that matches one extreme parent is (1/4)n. For one gene this is 1/4, for two genes 1/16, for three 1/64, for four 1/256.
- The frequency of each class is given by the row of Pascal's triangle with 2n entries, so the probability of exactly k contributing alleles is C(2n, k) × (1/2)2n.
| Genes (n) | Phenotypic classes (2n + 1) | Fraction like one extreme parent | F2 class ratio |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 3 | 1/4 | 1:2:1 |
| 2 | 5 | 1/16 | 1:4:6:4:1 |
| 3 | 7 | 1/64 | 1:6:15:20:15:6:1 |
| 4 | 9 | 1/256 | 1:8:28:56:70:56:28:8:1 |
| n | 2n + 1 | (1/4)n | binomial coefficients of (1 + 1)2n |
Why the bell curve appears
Even a few additive genes produce a distribution with a central peak and tapering tails. Two further factors smooth the steps into a continuous curve. First, real traits usually involve many more loci, often hundreds or thousands, so the steps become tiny. Second, the environment adds its own variation: nutrition, temperature, disease, maternal effects and chance events during development shift each individual a little up or down. A plant with exactly four contributing alleles might be 34 cm in poor soil and 38 cm in rich soil. When every genotypic class is spread out by environmental noise, neighboring classes overlap and the histogram looks like a single normal distribution. This is the central limit theorem at work: sums of many small independent effects tend toward a normal shape.
The overlap has an important practical consequence. In a continuous trait, you cannot read genotype from phenotype. Two plants of the same height may carry different numbers of contributing alleles, and two plants with identical genotypes may differ in height. That is why quantitative genetics works with averages and variances of populations rather than with individual genotypes.
Gene action in polygenic traits
The simple model assumes that alleles act additively: the heterozygote is exactly halfway between the two homozygotes, and the effects of different loci simply add. Real loci depart from this in two ways:
- Dominance is an interaction between alleles at the same locus. If one allele is dominant, the heterozygote resembles one homozygote rather than lying at the midpoint. Dominance makes the F2 distribution skewed toward the dominant class.
- Epistasis is an interaction between alleles at different loci. The effect of an allele at one gene depends on the genotype at another. Epistasis is common in metabolic pathways and developmental networks.
The distinction matters because, as we will see in Section 3, only the additive part of genetic variation is reliably passed from parent to offspring. Dominance and epistatic combinations are broken up each generation by segregation and recombination.
Threshold traits and liability
Many common diseases appear to run in families without following Mendelian ratios. The liability threshold model explains them. Each person has a continuous, normally distributed liability built from many genetic and environmental factors. Only those whose liability exceeds a threshold are affected. The model makes several predictions that fit clinical data well. The risk to relatives of an affected person is higher than the population risk and falls off sharply with distance of relationship, faster than for a single gene trait. The risk is higher when more relatives are affected, and higher when the affected relative has a severe form, because both indicate that the family carries many risk alleles. When the sexes have different thresholds, relatives of an affected person of the less often affected sex have higher risk. Pyloric stenosis is the classic example: it is about five times more common in boys, and the sons of affected women carry the highest risk because a woman who crossed the higher female threshold must carry an unusually heavy load of liability alleles.
Quantitative traits vary continuously because many genes, each with a small and often additive effect, combine with environmental variation. With n additive genes the F2 shows 2n + 1 classes and (1/4)n at each extreme, and environmental noise blurs the classes into a normal curve. Threshold traits look discrete but rest on a continuous underlying liability.
Section 2Statistics for quantitative traits
Mean, variance and standard deviation
The mean (x̄) is the arithmetic average: add all n measurements and divide by n. It tells you where the distribution is centered, but nothing about its spread. Two populations can share a mean of 170 cm yet differ greatly in how variable they are.
The variance (s2) measures spread. For each value, find its deviation from the mean, square it so that positive and negative deviations do not cancel, add the squares, and divide by n − 1:
s2 = Σ(xi − x̄)2 / (n − 1)
Dividing by n − 1 rather than n (the degrees of freedom) corrects for the fact that the sample mean was itself calculated from the same data, which makes the raw squared deviations slightly too small on average. The variance is in squared units (cm2), which is awkward to interpret but has a great advantage: independent sources of variance add. That additivity is the foundation of heritability.
The standard deviation (s) is the square root of the variance and is in the original units. In a normal distribution, about 68 percent of values fall within 1 standard deviation of the mean, about 95 percent within 2 (more exactly 1.96) and about 99.7 percent within 3. If adult height in a population has a mean of 170 cm and a standard deviation of 7 cm, about 95 percent of adults are between 156 and 184 cm.
The standard error of the mean, s/√n, is a different quantity. It describes how precisely the sample mean estimates the true population mean, and it shrinks as sample size grows. Students often mix it up with the standard deviation, which describes variation among individuals and does not shrink with more data.
Covariance and correlation
Quantitative genetics constantly asks whether two measurements vary together: the height of parents and of their children, the weight of a calf and its later milk yield, the trait values of twins. The covariance measures this joint variation. For each pair, multiply the deviation of x from its mean by the deviation of y from its mean, add the products, and divide by n − 1:
cov(x, y) = Σ(xi − x̄)(yi − ȳ) / (n − 1)
If large x values tend to go with large y values, most products are positive and the covariance is positive. If large x goes with small y, the covariance is negative. If there is no relationship, positive and negative products cancel and the covariance is near zero. The covariance between relatives is the raw material from which heritability is estimated, because relatives share genes in known proportions.
Covariance depends on the units of measurement, so it is hard to compare across traits. The correlation coefficient (r) standardizes it by dividing by both standard deviations:
r = cov(x, y) / (sx sy)
The correlation ranges from −1 (perfect negative linear relationship) through 0 (no linear relationship) to +1 (perfect positive). Two cautions apply. First, correlation does not imply causation: ice cream sales and drowning deaths are positively correlated because both rise in summer. Second, r measures only linear association. The square of r, r2, gives the proportion of the variation in y that is accounted for by its linear relationship with x.
Regression
Correlation tells you how tightly points cluster around a line. Regression tells you the line itself, so that you can predict y from x. The least squares regression line y = a + bx has slope
b = cov(x, y) / sx2
and intercept a = ȳ − b x̄. The slope says how much y changes, on average, for each one unit change in x. In quantitative genetics the regression of offspring on parents is especially useful: as Section 3 shows, the slope of offspring values regressed on the average of the two parents (the midparent value) estimates narrow sense heritability directly.
Francis Galton noticed the key pattern in the late 1800s while studying human height. Children of very tall parents were tall, but on average not as tall as their parents; children of very short parents were short, but not as short. He called this regression toward the mean. It happens because part of what made the parents extreme was environment and nonadditive gene combinations that are not transmitted, so the children drift back toward the population mean. The slope of the regression line measures how much of the parental deviation is passed on.
| Statistic | Formula | Units | What it tells you |
|---|---|---|---|
| Mean | Σx / n | Same as data | Center of the distribution |
| Variance | Σ(x − x̄)2 / (n − 1) | Squared units | Spread; independent sources add |
| Standard error | s / √n | Same as data | Precision of the sample mean |
| Covariance | Σ(x − x̄)(y − ȳ) / (n − 1) | Product of units | Direction and size of joint variation |
| Correlation (r) | cov / (sxsy) | None, −1 to +1 | Strength of linear association |
| Regression slope (b) | cov / sx2 | y units per x unit | Predicted change in y per unit x |
The mean locates a distribution and the variance measures its spread; variances from independent sources add, which is why quantitative genetics partitions variance. Covariance and correlation measure how two variables move together, and the regression slope (covariance divided by the variance of x) predicts one from the other. Offspring on midparent regression ties these statistics directly to heritability.
Section 3Heritability: broad and narrow sense
Partitioning phenotypic variance
The central idea of quantitative genetics is that the total variation we see in a trait, the phenotypic variance (VP), can be divided into parts that have different causes. In the simplest model, an individual's phenotype is the sum of a genetic value and an environmental deviation, P = G + E. If genes and environment are independent, their variances add:
VP = VG + VE
Real populations add two complications. If particular genotypes tend to find themselves in particular environments (for example, children with high musical aptitude are more likely to receive music lessons), there is a genotype environment covariance that adds 2cov(G, E). If genotypes respond differently to the same environmental change (one wheat variety yields best in drought, another in wet years), there is a genotype by environment interaction, VG×E. A fuller version is therefore VP = VG + VE + VG×E + 2cov(G, E). Most problems assume these two terms are zero.
The genetic variance itself has three components that correspond to the kinds of gene action described in Section 1:
- Additive genetic variance (VA) comes from the average effects of individual alleles, summed across loci. It is the part that makes offspring resemble their parents, because a parent passes on alleles, not genotypes.
- Dominance variance (VD) comes from interactions between the two alleles at the same locus. A parent cannot transmit a dominance interaction, because each child receives only one of the parent's two alleles.
- Interaction (epistatic) variance (VI) comes from interactions between loci, and it too is largely broken up by segregation and recombination.
Putting the pieces together: VP = VA + VD + VI + VE. The environmental variance can also be split into a common or shared part (VEc, effects shared by members of a family, such as household diet) and a special or unique part (effects specific to each individual, including random developmental noise and measurement error).
Two kinds of heritability
Heritability is the proportion of phenotypic variance in a population that is due to genetic differences among individuals. There are two versions, and confusing them is a classic exam error.
Broad sense heritability (H2) includes all genetic variance:
H2 = VG / VP = (VA + VD + VI) / VP
It tells you how much of the variation reflects genotype in general, which matters, for example, when clones or inbred lines can be propagated, because a clone transmits its entire genotype.
Narrow sense heritability (h2) includes only the additive part:
h2 = VA / VP
It is the quantity that predicts how closely offspring resemble parents and how a sexually reproducing population will respond to selection. Plant and animal breeders care most about h2. Both heritabilities range from 0 (no variation is genetic) to 1 (all variation is genetic), and h2 can never exceed H2.
| Trait (typical population) | Approximate h2 | Comment |
|---|---|---|
| Adult height, humans (well nourished populations) | 0.8 | Among the most heritable human traits |
| Body mass index, humans | 0.4 to 0.7 | Twin estimates higher than family estimates |
| Milk yield, dairy cattle | 0.3 | Moderate; steady genetic progress in breeding programs |
| Back fat thickness, pigs | 0.5 | Responds quickly to selection |
| Egg production, chickens | 0.1 to 0.3 | Lower, as for many fitness related traits |
| Litter size, pigs and mice | About 0.1 | Reproductive traits tend to have low h2 |
| Abdominal bristle number, fruit flies | 0.5 | Classic laboratory selection trait |
Estimating heritability
Heritability cannot be measured directly. It is estimated by comparing groups whose genetic or environmental relationships are known. Four approaches are commonly taught.
1. Genetically uniform populations. Members of an inbred line, or the F1 from a cross of two inbred lines, are genetically identical, so all their variance is environmental: VP = VE. The F2 from the same cross contains both genetic and environmental variance. Grown in the same environment, VG = VP(F2) − VE. This yields H2.
2. Parent offspring regression. Plot offspring phenotypes against parental phenotypes. When offspring are regressed on the midparent value, the slope b estimates h2 directly. When they are regressed on one parent only, the slope estimates h2/2, because a single parent contributes only half of the offspring's alleles; double the slope to get h2. The method works because the covariance between a parent and its offspring equals ½VA, while dominance and epistatic deviations are not shared.
3. Twin studies. Monozygotic (identical) twins share all their genes; dizygotic (fraternal) twins share on average half, like ordinary siblings. If both kinds of twins share their environments to a similar degree, the extra similarity of identical twins reflects genes. Falconer's formula gives a heritability estimate from the twin correlations:
h2 ≈ 2(rMZ − rDZ)
Because the difference in genetic sharing is one half, doubling the difference in correlation recovers the additive genetic proportion. Twins reared apart provide another approach: the correlation of identical twins raised in separate homes estimates H2 directly, provided the homes are not systematically similar. Twin studies have limits: identical twins may be treated more alike, and adoptive homes are not random environments, biases that tend to inflate estimates.
4. Response to selection. The amount a population changes after selection gives the realized heritability, discussed in Section 4.
What heritability does not mean
Heritability is one of the most misunderstood numbers in biology. Keep these points straight:
- It describes a population, not an individual. A heritability of 0.8 for height does not mean that 80 percent of your height came from genes and 20 percent from food. It means that 80 percent of the differences among people in that population are associated with genetic differences.
- It is specific to a population and an environment. If an environment becomes more uniform, VE shrinks and heritability rises, even though no gene has changed. If environments become more variable, heritability falls.
- High heritability does not mean a trait cannot be changed. Height is highly heritable, yet average height in many countries rose by more than 10 cm over the 20th century as nutrition and health improved. Phenylketonuria is entirely genetic in cause, yet a low phenylalanine diet prevents its intellectual disability.
- Heritability within groups says nothing about the cause of differences between groups. Imagine seeds from one genetically variable bag planted in two fields, one fertile and one poor. Within each field, height differences are largely genetic (high heritability), but the difference between the field averages is entirely environmental. This is the classic argument against inferring genetic causes for average differences between human populations.
- A trait with zero heritability can still be under genetic control. Number of eyes in humans has a heritability near zero because almost everyone has two; differences that do occur come from accidents. The genes that build eyes are fixed, so they create no variance.
Phenotypic variance divides into additive, dominance, epistatic and environmental parts. Broad sense heritability (H2 = VG/VP) includes all genetic variance; narrow sense heritability (h2 = VA/VP) includes only the transmissible additive part. Heritability is estimated from inbred lines, parent offspring regression, twins and selection, and it describes variation in one population in one environment, never the genetic share of an individual's trait.
Section 4Response to selection
The breeder's equation
For thousands of years farmers improved crops and livestock by saving seed from the best plants and breeding the best animals. Quantitative genetics turns that practice into a prediction. Suppose a breeder measures a trait in a population, picks the individuals with the highest values to be parents, and measures their offspring. Three quantities are involved:
- The selection differential (S) is the difference between the mean of the selected parents and the mean of the whole population they were chosen from: S = x̄selected − x̄population.
- The response to selection (R) is the difference between the mean of the offspring and the mean of the original population: R = x̄offspring − x̄population.
- The narrow sense heritability (h2) links them.
The breeder's equation states:
R = h2 S
The logic is the same as for regression toward the mean. The selected parents are superior partly because of their additive genes and partly because of good luck in environment and favorable dominance or epistatic combinations. Only the additive part is transmitted, so offspring recover only the fraction h2 of their parents' advantage. If h2 = 1, the offspring would match their selected parents exactly. If h2 = 0, the offspring would revert completely to the original population mean, no matter how carefully the parents were chosen.
Realized heritability
Rearranging the breeder's equation gives a direct way to estimate heritability from a selection experiment:
h2 = R / S
This is the realized heritability. For example, if mice average 40 g, the selected parents average 50 g (S = 10 g) and their offspring average 43 g (R = 3 g), then h2 = 3/10 = 0.30. Realized heritability is valuable because it is measured from the very process it is meant to predict, rather than from correlations among relatives.
Selection intensity
The size of S depends on two things: how strictly the breeder selects and how variable the trait is. Breeders separate these by writing S = i σP, where σP is the phenotypic standard deviation and i is the selection intensity, the selection differential in standard deviation units. For a normally distributed trait, keeping the top 50 percent gives i ≈ 0.80, the top 20 percent gives i ≈ 1.40, the top 10 percent gives i ≈ 1.76, and the top 1 percent gives i ≈ 2.67. The breeder's equation then becomes R = i h2 σP. Dividing by the generation interval gives gain per year, which is why genomic selection of young bulls has sped dairy improvement.
| Factor | Effect on response per year | How breeders use it |
|---|---|---|
| Heritability (h2) | Higher h2, larger response | Reduce environmental noise with uniform management and repeated measurement |
| Selection intensity (i) | Stricter selection, larger response | Select fewer, more extreme parents (limited by inbreeding risk) |
| Phenotypic standard deviation (σP) | More variation, more room to select | Introduce new germplasm to restore variation |
| Generation interval | Shorter interval, faster yearly gain | Select young animals using genomic predictions |
Correlated response
Selecting on one trait often changes others. A correlated response occurs when two traits share a genetic correlation, usually because some genes affect both (pleiotropy) or because genes for the two traits are tightly linked. Broiler chickens selected intensely for rapid growth also developed leg problems and heart failure; dairy cows selected for milk yield showed declining fertility; and in many species, selection for large body size lengthens development time. Correlated responses can also be exploited: if a trait is hard or expensive to measure, a breeder can select on an easily measured trait that is genetically correlated with it.
Long term selection and selection limits
Two famous experiments show what sustained selection can do. In the Illinois long term corn selection experiment, begun in the late 1800s, separate lines were selected for high and low kernel oil content. After more than 100 generations, the high oil line had risen from about 5 percent oil to more than 20 percent, and the low oil line had fallen to near 1 percent, values far outside the range of the starting population.
Why does response continue so long? First, a polygenic trait has many loci, and a starting population is very unlikely to contain an individual with the favorable allele at every one; selection gradually assembles combinations that never existed before. Second, new mutations continually add a small amount of additive variance each generation. Eventually, however, response may slow or stop, reaching a selection plateau. Causes include fixation of favorable alleles (VA exhausted), opposing natural selection (very high growth lines may become infertile), and negative genetic correlations with fitness.
The breeder's equation R = h2S predicts how far the next generation moves when parents are selected; rearranged, R/S gives realized heritability. Response increases with heritability, selection intensity and phenotypic variation and decreases with longer generation intervals. Genetic correlations cause correlated responses, and long term selection keeps working until additive variance is used up or opposed by natural selection.
Section 5QTL mapping and genome wide association
From variance components to genes
Heritability tells us that genes matter for a trait, but not which genes, where they are, or how large their effects are. A quantitative trait locus (QTL) is a region of the genome containing one or more genes that influence a quantitative trait. Two families of methods find them. QTL mapping uses controlled crosses between lines that differ in the trait; genome wide association studies (GWAS) use natural populations, including humans, where controlled crosses are impossible. Both rely on the same principle: if a genetic marker sits near a gene that affects the trait, individuals carrying different marker alleles will differ, on average, in the trait.
QTL mapping in experimental crosses
The classic design starts with two inbred lines that differ strongly in the trait, for example a high yielding and a low yielding tomato. The lines also differ at thousands of molecular markers, such as single nucleotide polymorphisms (SNPs) or microsatellites, scattered across the genome. They are crossed to produce an F1, and the F1 is either intercrossed to make an F2, backcrossed to one parent, or selfed for several generations to make recombinant inbred lines (RILs), each a homozygous mosaic of the two parental genomes. Every individual in the mapping population is then genotyped at all markers and measured for the trait.
At each marker, the population is sorted by marker genotype and the trait means are compared. At a marker unlinked to any QTL, the genotype classes have the same mean, because independent assortment randomizes the trait genes relative to the marker. At a marker tightly linked to a QTL, marker genotype predicts QTL genotype, so the classes differ. The size and pattern of the differences estimate the QTL's effects:
- The additive effect a is half the difference between the two homozygous classes.
- The dominance effect d is how far the heterozygote mean departs from the midpoint of the homozygotes.
Because recombination between the marker and the QTL weakens the association, the effect is strongest at the marker closest to the QTL. Interval mapping refines this by testing positions between markers, using the known map distances to calculate the probability of each QTL genotype at each position. The evidence at each position is expressed as a LOD score, the logarithm (base 10) of the odds that the data arose with a QTL at that position versus with no QTL. A LOD of 3 means the data are 103 = 1,000 times more likely under the QTL hypothesis. Plotting LOD along each chromosome produces peaks at likely QTL positions; thresholds of about 3 (often set more exactly by permutation testing) declare significance, and the region within about one LOD unit of the peak gives a confidence interval.
Limits of QTL mapping
QTL mapping in crosses is powerful but coarse. An F2 has had only one round of meiosis to break up parental chromosomes, so a QTL peak often spans 10 to 30 centimorgans and hundreds of genes. Only variants that differ between the two parental lines can be detected, and small effect QTL are easily missed unless the mapping population is large. Intervals are narrowed with further crosses and candidate genes tested by gene editing. Success stories include the tomato gene fw2.2, which accounts for a large share of the difference in fruit size between wild and cultivated tomatoes, and the maize gene tb1, whose altered regulation helped turn bushy teosinte into single stalked corn.
Genome wide association studies
In humans and in many natural populations, experimental crosses are not possible. Instead, a GWAS genotypes hundreds of thousands to millions of SNPs in thousands to hundreds of thousands of unrelated people and tests each SNP for association with the trait. For a continuous trait like height, the test asks whether the trait mean differs among SNP genotypes, usually by regressing the trait on the number of copies of one allele (0, 1 or 2). For a disease, it compares allele frequencies in cases and controls and expresses the effect as an odds ratio.
GWAS depends on linkage disequilibrium (LD), the nonrandom association of alleles at nearby loci. In a population, recombination has broken up most chromosome segments over many generations, but alleles very close together are still inherited as blocks called haplotypes. A genotyped SNP therefore acts as a tag for untyped variants in the same LD block. A significant SNP is usually not the causal variant itself, only a neighbor in LD with it. Because LD blocks in human populations span only tens of kilobases, GWAS localizes signals far more precisely than F2 QTL mapping, often to a handful of genes.
Multiple testing and the significance threshold
With a million tests, the usual P < 0.05 would produce about 50,000 false positives by chance alone. GWAS therefore uses a Bonferroni style correction, dividing 0.05 by the approximate number of independent common variants in the human genome, about one million: 0.05/1,000,000 = 5 × 10−8. This is the conventional genome wide significance threshold. Results are displayed on a Manhattan plot, with −log10(P) on the vertical axis so that small P values become tall points. The threshold 5 × 10−8 sits at −log10(5 × 10−8) = 8 − log10(5) = 8 − 0.70 = 7.3. Significant associations must then be replicated in an independent sample.
| Feature | QTL mapping in crosses | GWAS in populations |
|---|---|---|
| Study population | F2, backcross or recombinant inbred lines from two parents | Unrelated individuals, or cases and controls |
| Source of marker trait association | Linkage created by the cross | Historical linkage disequilibrium |
| Resolution | Coarse, often 10 to 30 cM | Fine, often tens of kilobases |
| Variants detected | Only those differing between the two parents | Common variants segregating in the population |
| Typical sample size | Hundreds of individuals | Thousands to over a million |
| Significance measure | LOD score, threshold about 3 | P value, threshold 5 × 10−8 |
| Main pitfall | Large intervals, missed small effects | Population stratification, tiny effect sizes |
Pitfalls: population stratification
If cases and controls come from populations with different ancestries, any SNP whose allele frequency differs between those ancestries will appear associated with the disease, whether or not it has anything to do with it. This population stratification produces false positives. Modern GWAS correct for stratification by including principal components of genome wide genotypes, or relatedness matrices, in the analysis, and by checking that the bulk of the P values follow the null expectation on a quantile quantile (Q-Q) plot.
What GWAS has revealed
Two decades of GWAS have transformed our picture of complex traits. Most traits are highly polygenic: adult height is associated with more than 10,000 independent SNPs, each shifting height by about 1 mm or less. Most associated variants lie in noncoding DNA, especially in enhancers active in the relevant tissue, implying that they change gene regulation rather than protein structure. Many loci are shared among traits, which is pleiotropy on a genomic scale. Some findings have pointed to unexpected biology: GWAS of Crohn disease highlighted autophagy genes, and GWAS of age related macular degeneration identified complement factor H, opening new treatment directions.
Early GWAS posed the puzzle of missing heritability. Twin studies put the heritability of height near 0.8, yet the first significant SNPs together explained only a few percent of the variance. The gap has largely closed for height as samples grew into the millions, showing that much of the missing heritability was spread across thousands of variants too small to detect individually. Remaining gaps are attributed to rare variants poorly tagged by SNP arrays, structural variants, imperfect LD tagging, gene by environment interaction and inflated twin estimates.
Polygenic scores
A polygenic score (polygenic risk score) adds up an individual's alleles across many associated SNPs, each weighted by its GWAS effect size: score = Σ (number of effect alleles × effect size). For coronary artery disease, breast cancer and type 2 diabetes, people in the top few percent of the score distribution can have risk comparable to carriers of single gene mutations. Polygenic scores also have important limits. They predict poorly in populations whose ancestry differs from the GWAS sample, because LD patterns and allele frequencies differ; most large GWAS have been done in people of European ancestry, so scores currently work best for them, an equity problem the field is working to correct. A score gives probabilities for a population of people with similar scores, not a diagnosis for an individual, and its predictive power is capped by the trait's heritability.
QTL mapping finds trait genes by testing whether marker genotypes in a cross differ in trait means, summarizing evidence as LOD scores; it has coarse resolution. GWAS tests millions of SNPs in natural populations, relies on linkage disequilibrium, uses the 5 × 10−8 threshold to control false positives, and must correct for population stratification. It has shown that complex traits are highly polygenic, mostly regulatory, and that polygenic scores are useful but ancestry dependent.
The chapter in one breath
- Quantitative traits (continuous, meristic and threshold) vary smoothly because many genes and the environment each contribute small effects.
- With n additive genes, an F2 shows 2n + 1 classes and (1/4)n at each extreme; environmental noise blurs the classes into a normal curve.
- The variance measures spread and adds across independent sources; covariance, correlation and the regression slope describe how two variables move together.
- VP = VA + VD + VI + VE, with possible genotype by environment terms.
- Broad sense heritability H2 = VG/VP; narrow sense heritability h2 = VA/VP, the transmissible part.
- Heritability is estimated from inbred lines, offspring on midparent regression (slope = h2), twins (h2 ≈ 2[rMZ − rDZ]) and selection experiments.
- Heritability describes one population in one environment; it says nothing about individuals or differences between groups.
- The breeder's equation R = h2S predicts response; realized heritability is R/S, and S = iσP.
- Correlated responses arise from pleiotropy and linkage; long term selection continues until additive variance runs out or natural selection opposes it.
- QTL mapping uses markers and LOD scores in crosses; GWAS uses linkage disequilibrium, the 5 × 10−8 threshold and Manhattan plots, and yields polygenic scores.
Words worth knowing
| Term | What it means |
|---|---|
| Quantitative trait | A trait that varies continuously across a range and is influenced by many genes and the environment. |
| Threshold trait | A present or absent trait that appears when an underlying continuous liability exceeds a threshold. |
| Multiple factor hypothesis | The idea that quantitative traits are controlled by several Mendelian genes with small, additive effects. |
| Variance | The average squared deviation from the mean (dividing by n − 1); a measure of spread. |
| Standard deviation | The square root of the variance, in the same units as the data. |
| Covariance | A measure of how two variables vary together, positive when they rise together. |
| Correlation coefficient | Covariance standardized by both standard deviations, ranging from −1 to +1. |
| Regression slope | The predicted change in y per unit change in x, equal to covariance divided by the variance of x. |
| Additive variance (VA) | Genetic variance from the average effects of alleles; the part transmitted from parent to offspring. |
| Dominance variance (VD) | Genetic variance from interactions between alleles at the same locus. |
| Epistatic variance (VI) | Genetic variance from interactions between alleles at different loci. |
| Genotype by environment interaction | When genotypes respond differently to the same change in environment. |
| Broad sense heritability (H2) | The proportion of phenotypic variance due to all genetic variance. |
| Narrow sense heritability (h2) | The proportion of phenotypic variance due to additive genetic variance. |
| Selection differential (S) | Mean of the selected parents minus the mean of the population. |
| Response to selection (R) | Mean of the offspring minus the mean of the original population. |
| Realized heritability | Heritability estimated from a selection experiment as R/S. |
| Selection intensity (i) | The selection differential expressed in phenotypic standard deviations. |
| Correlated response | Change in an unselected trait caused by its genetic correlation with a selected trait. |
| Quantitative trait locus (QTL) | A genomic region containing a gene or genes that affect a quantitative trait. |
| LOD score | The base 10 logarithm of the odds favoring linkage or a QTL over no linkage. |
| Linkage disequilibrium | Nonrandom association of alleles at nearby loci in a population. |
| GWAS | A genome wide association study that tests many SNPs across the genome for association with a trait. |
| Population stratification | Ancestry differences between study groups that create false associations. |
| Polygenic score | A weighted sum of an individual's trait associated alleles used to estimate genetic predisposition. |
Check yourself
Population and Evolutionary Genetics
Evolution, at its most basic, is a change in allele frequencies in a population over time. Population genetics measures those frequencies, predicts what happens to them when nothing disturbs them, and then calculates how mutation, migration, chance and natural selection push them around. The same few equations let you estimate how many people carry a recessive disease allele, why small populations lose diversity, how a harmful allele can persist for generations, and how new species arise.
By the end of this chapter you can
- Calculate genotype frequencies and allele frequencies from counts for autosomal, multiple allele and X-linked loci.
- State the Hardy Weinberg principle and its assumptions, and use p2 + 2pq + q2 to predict genotype frequencies and carrier frequencies.
- Test a population for Hardy Weinberg equilibrium with a chi square test, using the correct degrees of freedom.
- Calculate the inbreeding coefficient (F) from a pedigree and predict its effect on homozygosity and recessive disease.
- Distinguish positive and negative assortative mating from inbreeding.
- Calculate the effects of mutation, migration and natural selection on allele frequency, including heterozygote advantage and mutation selection balance.
- Explain genetic drift, effective population size, the founder effect and bottlenecks.
- Describe the neutral theory, the molecular clock and the use of dN/dS ratios.
- Classify reproductive isolating mechanisms and modes of speciation.
Section 1Allele and genotype frequencies
Populations and gene pools
Transmission genetics follows alleles through individual families. Population genetics steps back and asks about all the alleles in a group of interbreeding individuals. A population in this sense is a group of individuals of the same species that live in the same area and can mate with one another, sometimes called a Mendelian population. The complete set of alleles carried by all its members at a given time is its gene pool. For a diploid population of N individuals, the gene pool at an autosomal locus contains 2N alleles.
Two kinds of frequencies describe a gene pool, and the distinction is fundamental:
- A genotype frequency is the proportion of individuals in the population with a particular genotype. For a locus with alleles A and a, the three genotype frequencies are often written f(AA), f(Aa) and f(aa), or P, H and Q. They must add to 1.
- An allele frequency (sometimes called a gene frequency) is the proportion of all copies of the gene in the population that are a particular allele. By convention, p is the frequency of A and q the frequency of a, and p + q = 1.
Genotype frequencies are what we observe when we classify individuals; allele frequencies are what is transmitted from one generation to the next, because individuals pass on alleles, not genotypes. Evolution, in the population genetic definition, is a change in allele frequencies across generations.
Calculating allele frequencies from counts
There are two equivalent ways to calculate allele frequencies at an autosomal locus with codominant alleles, where every genotype can be recognized.
The counting method. Each homozygote carries two copies of its allele and each heterozygote carries one copy of each. Count all copies and divide by the total number of alleles, 2N:
p = (2 × number of AA + number of Aa) / 2N
The genotype frequency method. Half of a heterozygote's alleles are A, so
p = f(AA) + ½ f(Aa), and q = f(aa) + ½ f(Aa).
Both methods give the same answer, and you can use whichever is more convenient. Both require that you can identify heterozygotes. When one allele is completely dominant, AA and Aa look alike, and you cannot count alleles directly; you need the Hardy Weinberg relationships of Section 2 to estimate them.
Multiple alleles
The same logic extends to loci with more than two alleles. With three alleles A1, A2 and A3 there are six genotypes: three homozygotes and three heterozygotes. The frequency of A1 is the frequency of A1A1 plus half the frequency of each heterozygote containing A1:
p1 = f(A1A1) + ½f(A1A2) + ½f(A1A3)
In general, a locus with k alleles has k(k + 1)/2 genotypes, of which k are homozygous and k(k − 1)/2 are heterozygous. A locus with 10 alleles therefore has 55 genotypes. This is why highly polymorphic loci, such as forensic short tandem repeats and HLA genes, distinguish individuals so well.
X-linked loci
For genes on the X chromosome, females (XX) carry two copies and males (XY) carry one. Male genotype frequencies equal allele frequencies directly, because each male has exactly one allele. To find the population allele frequency, count every X chromosome: two per female and one per male.
Measuring genetic variation
Allele frequencies are the raw data for describing how much variation a population carries. Population geneticists commonly use three summary measures:
| Measure | Definition | Example of use |
|---|---|---|
| Proportion of polymorphic loci | Fraction of loci where the most common allele has frequency below 0.95 (or 0.99) | Early protein electrophoresis surveys showed about a third of loci are polymorphic in many species |
| Observed heterozygosity (Ho) | Proportion of individuals heterozygous at a locus, averaged across loci | Comparing diversity in endangered and healthy populations |
| Expected heterozygosity (He) | 1 − Σpi2, the heterozygosity predicted under random mating | Detecting inbreeding when Ho < He |
| Allelic richness | Number of distinct alleles at a locus, corrected for sample size | Detecting bottlenecks, which remove rare alleles first |
| Nucleotide diversity (π) | Average proportion of nucleotide sites that differ between two randomly chosen sequences | About 0.001 in humans: two copies of a genome differ at roughly 1 site per 1,000 |
Note one important point: allele frequencies alone do not determine genotype frequencies. Two populations can both have p = 0.5, one with 50 percent AA and 50 percent aa (no heterozygotes), and another with 25 percent AA, 50 percent Aa and 25 percent aa. Something must connect allele frequencies to genotype frequencies, and under random mating that connection is the Hardy Weinberg principle.
A gene pool is described by genotype frequencies (proportions of individuals) and allele frequencies (proportions of gene copies). For codominant autosomal alleles, p = f(AA) + ½f(Aa); for X-linked loci, count two X chromosomes per female and one per male. Multiple alleles produce k(k + 1)/2 genotypes, and heterozygosity summarizes a population's variation.
Section 2Hardy Weinberg equilibrium
The principle
The mathematician G. H. Hardy and the physician Wilhelm Weinberg independently showed that dominant alleles do not automatically spread. Their result, the Hardy Weinberg principle, states that in a large, randomly mating population with no mutation, migration or selection:
- Allele frequencies do not change from generation to generation.
- After one generation of random mating, genotype frequencies are given by p2 (AA), 2pq (Aa) and q2 (aa), and they stay at those values.
A population with these genotype frequencies is in Hardy Weinberg equilibrium. Dominance has nothing to do with it: a dominant allele at a frequency of 0.01 stays at 0.01. Dominance affects which phenotype a genotype shows, not how often alleles are transmitted.
Why it works
Random mating of individuals is equivalent to random union of gametes drawn from the gene pool. A fraction p of all gametes carries A and a fraction q carries a. The probability that an egg and a sperm both carry A is p × p = p2; both a, q2; and one of each, pq + qp = 2pq (an A egg with an a sperm or an a egg with an A sperm). These terms are the expansion of (p + q)2 = p2 + 2pq + q2 = 1.
Now check that allele frequencies are unchanged. In the offspring, the frequency of A is f(AA) + ½f(Aa) = p2 + ½(2pq) = p2 + pq = p(p + q) = p. Allele frequencies are preserved, so the same genotype frequencies are produced in every later generation. Meiosis and fertilization, by themselves, do not change the gene pool.
The assumptions
The principle holds exactly only under idealized conditions. Each assumption corresponds to a force that can change the population, and much of the rest of this chapter is about those forces.
| Assumption | If violated | Main effect |
|---|---|---|
| Random mating | Inbreeding or assortative mating | Changes genotype frequencies (often fewer heterozygotes) without changing allele frequencies |
| Very large population | Genetic drift | Random change in allele frequencies; loss of variation |
| No mutation | New alleles arise | Very slow change in allele frequencies; source of all new variation |
| No migration | Gene flow | Allele frequencies move toward those of the source population |
| No selection | Genotypes differ in survival or reproduction | Directional or balancing change in allele frequencies |
The surprising lesson is how robust the principle is in practice. Many loci in large human populations fit Hardy Weinberg proportions closely, because mutation and migration are weak over a single generation, and selection on most variants is weak. Even when a population departs from equilibrium, one generation of random mating restores Hardy Weinberg proportions for an autosomal locus, provided allele frequencies are the same in both sexes. For X-linked loci the approach is gradual: if male and female allele frequencies differ, the difference is halved and changes sign each generation, so the population oscillates toward equilibrium.
Uses of the Hardy Weinberg equation
The most common practical use is estimating allele and carrier frequencies for a recessive trait, where heterozygotes cannot be recognized. If the population is assumed to be in equilibrium, the frequency of affected individuals equals q2, so q = √(frequency of affected). The carrier frequency is then 2pq. When q is small, p is close to 1 and 2pq ≈ 2q.
That last observation follows from the ratio of heterozygotes to recessive homozygotes, 2pq/q2 = 2p/q. When q = 0.02, the ratio is 2(0.98)/0.02 = 98. This has an important consequence for selection: eliminating affected individuals barely changes the frequency of a rare recessive allele, because almost all copies are in carriers who are not selected against.
For X-linked recessive traits, the frequency of affected males equals q, and the frequency of affected females is q2. About 8 percent of males of northern European ancestry have red green color vision deficiency, so q ≈ 0.08, the expected frequency of affected females is 0.082 = 0.0064 (about 0.6 percent), and carrier females are 2(0.92)(0.08) = 0.147, about 15 percent. This is why X-linked recessive conditions are much more common in males: a male needs one copy, a female two.
Multiple alleles: the ABO system
With three alleles at frequencies p, q and r (p + q + r = 1), Hardy Weinberg genotype frequencies come from (p + q + r)2: p2, q2, r2, 2pq, 2pr and 2qr. For ABO blood groups, with IA (p), IB (q) and i (r), the phenotypes are type A = p2 + 2pr, type B = q2 + 2qr, type AB = 2pq and type O = r2. Because type O is homozygous recessive, r = √f(O) is the natural starting point. For example, if 49 percent of a population is type O and 32 percent type A, then r = 0.7; solving p2 + 2(0.7)p = 0.32 gives p = 0.2; and q = 1 − 0.7 − 0.2 = 0.1. The model then predicts type B = 0.01 + 0.14 = 0.15 and type AB = 0.04, which sum with the others to 1.00.
Testing for equilibrium with chi square
To ask whether a population fits Hardy Weinberg proportions, calculate allele frequencies from the observed data, use them to calculate expected genotype numbers, and compare observed and expected with a chi square test: χ2 = Σ(O − E)2/E. The degrees of freedom are the number of genotype classes minus 1, minus the number of independent allele frequencies estimated from the data. For two alleles and three genotypes, df = 3 − 1 − 1 = 1, not 2. This is one of the most common errors on population genetics problems. With df = 1, the critical value at P = 0.05 is 3.84.
In a large, randomly mating population without mutation, migration or selection, allele frequencies stay constant and genotype frequencies settle at p2, 2pq and q2 after one generation. The equation estimates carrier frequencies (2pq ≈ 2q for rare alleles), shows that rare recessive alleles hide mostly in heterozygotes, extends to multiple and X-linked alleles, and is tested with chi square using 1 degree of freedom for two alleles.
Section 3Inbreeding and nonrandom mating
Kinds of nonrandom mating
Random mating means that the chance two individuals mate does not depend on their genotypes or their relationship. Real populations often break this rule in one of three ways:
- Inbreeding is mating between relatives, more often than expected by chance. It affects every locus in the genome, because relatives share alleles everywhere.
- Positive assortative mating is mating between individuals with similar phenotypes. Humans mate assortatively for height, educational attainment and, notably, deafness and blindness. It affects only the loci that influence the trait in question (and loci linked to them).
- Negative assortative mating (disassortative mating) is mating between individuals with dissimilar phenotypes. Self incompatibility systems in plants enforce it, and in some animals, mate choice favors partners with different immune (MHC) genotypes.
The central point about all three is that nonrandom mating changes genotype frequencies but not allele frequencies. Inbreeding and positive assortative mating increase homozygosity and decrease heterozygosity; negative assortative mating does the reverse. On its own, nonrandom mating is therefore not an evolutionary force in the strict sense, but by exposing recessive alleles in homozygotes it changes how selection acts.
The inbreeding coefficient
Two alleles at a locus can be identical in two different senses. They can be identical by state, meaning they have the same DNA sequence, or identical by descent (IBD), meaning they are both copies of a single allele in a common ancestor. The inbreeding coefficient (F) is the probability that the two alleles at a locus in an individual are identical by descent. An individual whose two alleles are identical by descent is called autozygous. F ranges from 0 (no inbreeding beyond the reference population) to 1 (complete inbreeding, as in a fully inbred line).
With inbreeding coefficient F, genotype frequencies in a population become:
- f(AA) = p2 + Fpq
- f(Aa) = 2pq(1 − F)
- f(aa) = q2 + Fpq
Heterozygotes are reduced by the fraction F, and the missing heterozygotes are added equally to the two homozygote classes. Allele frequencies stay the same: f(AA) + ½f(Aa) = p2 + Fpq + pq − Fpq = p. Rearranging the heterozygote equation gives a way to estimate F from data: F = 1 − Ho/He, where Ho is the observed heterozygosity and He = 2pq is the heterozygosity expected under random mating.
Calculating F from a pedigree
F for an individual can be calculated by path counting. Find every common ancestor of the individual's two parents. For each common ancestor, trace the path that runs from one parent up to the common ancestor and back down to the other parent, and count n, the number of individuals in that path including both parents and the common ancestor (but not the inbred individual). Each step in a path is a 1/2 chance of passing on a particular allele, and the common ancestor's two alleles are themselves identical by descent with probability FA. Then
F = Σ (1/2)n (1 + FA)
summed over all paths. If the common ancestor is not itself inbred, FA = 0 and each path contributes (1/2)n.
| Mating | Common ancestors and path length | F of offspring |
|---|---|---|
| Self fertilization | Parent is the only ancestor (n = 1) | 1/2 |
| Parent and offspring | One path, n = 2 | 1/4 |
| Full siblings | Two common ancestors, n = 3 each | 1/4 |
| Half siblings | One common ancestor, n = 3 | 1/8 |
| Uncle and niece (or aunt and nephew) | Two common ancestors, n = 4 each | 1/8 |
| First cousins | Two common ancestors, n = 5 each | 1/16 |
| First cousins once removed | Two common ancestors, n = 6 each | 1/32 |
| Second cousins | Two common ancestors, n = 7 each | 1/64 |
Repeated inbreeding and inbred lines
Continued inbreeding pushes F toward 1. Self fertilization is the extreme case: each generation of selfing halves the remaining heterozygosity, so after t generations Ht = H0(1/2)t and F = 1 − (1/2)t. Starting from a fully heterozygous plant, five generations of selfing leave only (1/2)5 = 1/32, about 3 percent, of the original heterozygosity (F ≈ 0.97). Repeated full sibling mating approaches homozygosity more slowly, reaching F ≈ 0.99 after about 20 generations. This is how inbred strains of mice, rats and many crop lines are created, and it is why every member of such a strain is essentially genetically identical, a property exploited in Section 3 of Chapter 11 to estimate environmental variance.
Inbreeding depression and hybrid vigor
Inbreeding depression is the decline in fitness and in trait values such as growth, fertility and survival that follows inbreeding. It has two main genetic explanations. The more important is the dominance hypothesis: populations carry many rare, partially recessive deleterious alleles, mostly hidden in heterozygotes; inbreeding makes them homozygous and exposes them. The overdominance hypothesis proposes that heterozygotes at some loci are intrinsically superior, so losing heterozygosity lowers fitness. The reverse effect, heterosis or hybrid vigor, appears when two different inbred lines are crossed: the F1 is heterozygous at many loci, masking each line's recessive defects, and is often more vigorous than either parent. Hybrid corn, which dominates modern corn production, exploits heterosis, and farmers buy new hybrid seed every year because the F2 loses much of the advantage as segregation restores homozygosity.
Nonrandom mating changes genotype but not allele frequencies. The inbreeding coefficient F, the probability that two alleles are identical by descent, reduces heterozygotes to 2pq(1 − F) and adds Fpq to each homozygote, which greatly increases the frequency of rare recessive disorders. F is calculated by path counting, F = Σ(1/2)n(1 + FA); first cousins give 1/16. Inbreeding depression comes mainly from exposed recessive alleles, and crossing inbred lines produces heterosis.
Section 4Mutation, migration, drift and selection
Four processes change allele frequencies: mutation, migration, genetic drift and natural selection. They differ in speed, in direction and in whether they increase or decrease variation. The table below gives the overview; the rest of the section works through each force.
| Force | Changes allele frequency? | Variation within populations | Variation between populations | Direction |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Mutation | Yes, very slowly | Increases | Increases | Toward mutation equilibrium |
| Migration (gene flow) | Yes | Usually increases | Decreases | Toward the source population |
| Genetic drift | Yes, random | Decreases | Increases | Random; fixation or loss |
| Natural selection | Yes | Directional: decreases; balancing: maintains | Increases or decreases | Toward higher fitness |
| Inbreeding (for comparison) | No | Decreases heterozygosity | Increases if subpopulations inbreed | Toward homozygosity |
Mutation
Mutation is the ultimate source of all new alleles, but as a force changing allele frequencies it is extremely weak. Let A mutate to a at rate u per generation (forward mutation) and a mutate back to A at rate v. The change in the frequency of A in one generation is
Δp = vq − up
At equilibrium Δp = 0, so up = vq, which gives q̂ = u/(u + v) and p̂ = v/(u + v). Typical mutation rates are around 10−5 to 10−6 per gene per generation, so the approach is glacial. With forward mutation alone at u = 10−5, it takes about ln 2/u ≈ 0.693/10−5 ≈ 69,000 generations to halve p. Mutation supplies variation; other forces determine what happens to it.
Migration
Migration, or gene flow, is the movement of alleles between populations when individuals or gametes (such as pollen) move and reproduce. In the simplest model, a fraction m of a recipient population each generation consists of migrants from a source population with allele frequency qm. The new frequency is a weighted average:
q' = (1 − m)q + m qm, so Δq = m(qm − q)
Migration changes allele frequencies fastest when the populations differ most, and it makes populations more similar. Over t generations the difference shrinks geometrically: (qt − qm) = (q0 − qm)(1 − m)t. Even a modest amount of migration, on the order of one migrant per generation, is enough to prevent drift from making populations diverge completely at neutral loci.
Genetic drift
Genetic drift is random change in allele frequencies caused by sampling error. Each generation, the gametes that form the next generation are a finite sample of the parents' gene pool, and like any sample they rarely match it exactly. Flip a coin 10 times and you often get 7 heads; flip it 10,000 times and you get very close to half. In the same way, drift is strong in small populations and weak in large ones. The variance of the change in allele frequency in one generation is pq/2N.
Drift has four key consequences:
- Allele frequencies wander randomly, with no tendency to return to their starting point.
- Eventually an allele is either fixed (frequency 1) or lost (frequency 0). For a neutral allele, the probability of fixation equals its current frequency. A new mutation, present as one copy among 2N, is fixed with probability 1/(2N).
- Heterozygosity declines by a fraction 1/(2N) each generation: Ht = H0(1 − 1/2N)t.
- Replicate populations diverge from one another, each drifting in its own direction.
Effective population size
The N in drift equations is not simply a census count. It is the effective population size (Ne), the size of an idealized population that would drift at the same rate as the real one. Ne is usually much smaller than the census size for three reasons. Unequal numbers of breeding males and females: Ne = 4NmNf/(Nm + Nf). Fluctuating population size: Ne over several generations is the harmonic mean of the sizes, which is dominated by the smallest generation. And variation in family size, since a few parents may leave most of the offspring.
Founder effects and bottlenecks
Two special cases of drift have great practical importance. The founder effect occurs when a new population is started by a small number of individuals, whose alleles are a chance sample of the source population. A bottleneck occurs when an existing population is drastically reduced in size for one or more generations. In both cases, rare alleles are often lost, others rise by chance to high frequency, and the resulting population can differ markedly from its ancestors. Many human populations show founder effects: Ellis van Creveld syndrome (a form of dwarfism with extra fingers) is unusually common among the Old Order Amish of Pennsylvania, traced to a single founding couple, and several recessive disorders, such as Tay Sachs disease, are more frequent among Ashkenazi Jewish populations, partly because of historic bottlenecks. Northern elephant seals, hunted to perhaps 20 to 30 animals, have recovered to large numbers but retain extremely low genetic diversity.
Natural selection
Natural selection occurs when genotypes differ in their contribution to the next generation. That contribution, combining survival and reproduction, is fitness. In population genetics we use relative fitness (w), with the best genotype usually set to 1. The selection coefficient s = 1 − w measures how strongly a genotype is selected against. A lethal genotype that never reproduces has w = 0 and s = 1.
The general method for any selection problem is always the same, and it is worth memorizing as a procedure:
- Write the Hardy Weinberg genotype frequencies before selection: p2, 2pq, q2.
- Multiply each by its relative fitness.
- Add the products to get the mean fitness, w̄.
- Divide each product by w̄ to get genotype frequencies after selection.
- Calculate the new allele frequency: q' = f(aa) + ½f(Aa) after selection.
The speed of selection depends on dominance and on allele frequency. Selection against a dominant allele is fast, because every copy is exposed. Selection against a recessive allele slows dramatically as the allele becomes rare, because nearly all copies hide in heterozygotes. For a recessive lethal (s = 1), qt = q0/(1 + tq0), so the number of generations to go from q0 to qt is t = 1/qt − 1/q0. Reducing q from 0.02 to 0.01 takes 100 − 50 = 50 generations, and from 0.01 to 0.005 another 100. This is why eugenic proposals to eliminate recessive disorders by preventing affected people from reproducing were not only unethical but biologically futile.
Modes of selection
- Directional selection favors one extreme or one allele and moves the population toward it, as in the spread of insecticide resistance or antibiotic resistance.
- Stabilizing selection favors intermediate phenotypes, as for human birth weight, where both very small and very large babies historically had higher mortality.
- Disruptive selection favors both extremes over the middle and can contribute to divergence.
- Balancing selection maintains two or more alleles indefinitely. It includes heterozygote advantage (overdominance) and frequency dependent selection, in which rare alleles have an advantage.
Heterozygote advantage and the sickle cell allele
Let the fitnesses be AA = 1 − s, Aa = 1 and aa = 1 − t. Selection then removes both alleles from homozygotes and keeps them in heterozygotes, and the population reaches a stable equilibrium at
q̂ = s/(s + t), where q is the frequency of a.
The classic example is the sickle cell allele, HbS, in regions with endemic falciparum malaria. HbAHbA individuals are more susceptible to severe malaria, HbSHbS individuals have sickle cell disease, and HbAHbS carriers are partly protected from malaria while rarely having symptoms. With illustrative values s = 0.12 (malaria cost to HbAHbA) and t = 0.80 (cost of sickle cell disease), q̂ = 0.12/(0.12 + 0.80) = 0.12/0.92 = 0.13, similar to the HbS frequencies of 0.1 or more observed in parts of sub-Saharan Africa. Where malaria is absent, the advantage disappears and the allele slowly declines.
Mutation selection balance
Deleterious alleles persist because mutation keeps recreating them while selection removes them. At equilibrium the two rates match. For a recessive deleterious allele, q̂ ≈ √(u/s); for a dominant one, q̂ ≈ u/s. With u = 10−6 and s = 1, a recessive lethal settles at q ≈ √10−6 = 0.001, but a dominant lethal at only 10−6, essentially just the new mutations each generation. Recessive deleterious alleles can therefore be a thousand times more common than dominant ones with the same mutation rate.
Mutation creates variation but changes frequencies very slowly (q̂ = u/[u + v]). Migration moves frequencies toward the source, Δq = m(qm − q). Drift is random, strongest in small populations, fixes a neutral allele with probability equal to its frequency, erodes heterozygosity by 1/2Ne per generation, and drives founder effects and bottlenecks. Selection is computed by weighting genotype frequencies by fitness and dividing by w̄; heterozygote advantage gives q̂ = s/(s + t), and mutation selection balance gives q̂ ≈ √(u/s) for recessives.
Section 5Molecular evolution and speciation
The neutral theory
Sequencing revealed far more molecular variation than selection alone seemed able to explain. Motoo Kimura's neutral theory of molecular evolution proposed that most of the differences we see at the DNA level are selectively neutral, or nearly so, and were fixed by genetic drift rather than by positive selection. The theory does not deny that selection shapes adaptations. It says that most mutations are either harmful, and quickly removed by purifying selection, or neutral, and left to drift; only a small fraction are advantageous.
The theory makes a striking prediction. In a diploid population of size N, about 2Nu new neutral mutations arise at a locus each generation, and each has a probability of 1/(2N) of eventually being fixed by drift. The rate of substitution is the product:
k = 2Nu × 1/(2N) = u
The rate at which neutral substitutions accumulate equals the neutral mutation rate, regardless of population size. Large populations produce more mutations, but each has a smaller chance of fixation, and the two effects cancel exactly.
The molecular clock
If neutral substitutions accumulate at a roughly constant rate, then the number of sequence differences between two species should be roughly proportional to the time since they shared a common ancestor. This is the molecular clock. Because both lineages accumulate changes independently after they split, the divergence between them is
K = 2μT
where K is the number of substitutions per site, μ the substitution rate per site per year, and T the time since divergence. A clock must be calibrated with fossils or dated geological events, and it ticks at different rates in different genes and lineages (for example, faster in rodents, with short generation times, than in primates), so modern methods use "relaxed" clocks that allow rates to vary.
Rates differ with functional constraint
The neutral theory explains why different parts of the genome evolve at very different rates. The more a change is likely to harm function, the more often it is removed by purifying selection, and the slower the observed rate. Changes in sequences with no function accumulate at the full mutation rate.
| Sequence type | Relative rate of substitution | Reason |
|---|---|---|
| Pseudogenes | Fastest | No function, so no constraint; rate approaches mutation rate |
| Synonymous (silent) sites in codons | Fast | Do not change the amino acid |
| Introns and most intergenic DNA | Fast | Mostly weakly constrained, except regulatory elements |
| Nonsynonymous (replacement) sites | Slow | Change the amino acid; often harmful |
| Highly constrained proteins (histones, ubiquitin) | Slowest | Almost every residue is essential for function |
| Fibrinopeptides | Fast for a protein | Cleaved off and discarded during clotting, little constraint |
Comparing the two kinds of coding sites provides one of the most useful tests of selection. Let dN be the number of nonsynonymous substitutions per nonsynonymous site and dS the number of synonymous substitutions per synonymous site. Their ratio, ω = dN/dS, reveals the kind of selection:
- ω < 1: purifying selection; most amino acid changes were harmful and removed. Most genes fall here, often with ω around 0.1 to 0.3.
- ω ≈ 1: neutral evolution, as expected for a pseudogene.
- ω > 1: positive selection; amino acid changes have been favored. Classic examples include the peptide binding region of MHC genes, viral surface proteins such as influenza hemagglutinin, and some genes involved in reproduction and immune defense.
Gene duplication and gene families
New genes most often arise by gene duplication. After a duplication, one copy can keep the original function while the other is free to accumulate changes. Most extra copies decay into pseudogenes, but some acquire new functions (neofunctionalization) or split the original functions between them (subfunctionalization). The globin family is the textbook case: duplications produced α and β globin clusters, myoglobin, and fetal and embryonic globins with different oxygen affinities. Genes related by duplication within a genome are paralogs; genes in different species descended from one gene in their common ancestor are orthologs.
What is a species?
Speciation connects population genetics to the diversity of life. Several species concepts are used. The biological species concept defines a species as a group of actually or potentially interbreeding natural populations reproductively isolated from other such groups. It captures why species stay distinct, but it cannot be applied to asexual organisms or fossils. The morphological species concept uses physical traits and is practical for fossils. The phylogenetic species concept defines a species as the smallest group of populations sharing a common ancestor, diagnosable by shared derived traits, and is widely used with DNA data.
Reproductive isolating mechanisms
Under the biological species concept, the key to speciation is the evolution of reproductive isolation. Barriers are classified by whether they act before or after the formation of a zygote.
| Barrier | Type | Example |
|---|---|---|
| Habitat isolation | Prezygotic | Two garter snake species, one aquatic and one terrestrial, in the same area |
| Temporal isolation | Prezygotic | Related frogs or plants that breed or flower in different seasons |
| Behavioral isolation | Prezygotic | Species specific bird songs and firefly flash patterns |
| Mechanical isolation | Prezygotic | Incompatible genitalia in insects; flower shapes that fit only certain pollinators |
| Gametic isolation | Prezygotic | Sea urchin sperm bindin proteins recognize only their own species' eggs |
| Hybrid inviability | Postzygotic | Many frog hybrids fail during development |
| Hybrid sterility | Postzygotic | Mule (horse × donkey): 63 chromosomes that cannot pair properly in meiosis |
| Hybrid breakdown | Postzygotic | F1 rice hybrids are fertile but many F2 plants are weak or sterile |
Modes of speciation
Speciation is classified by geography. In allopatric speciation, the most common mode, a population is divided by a geographic barrier, such as a rising mountain range, a new river course or the formation of an isthmus, and the separated populations diverge through mutation, drift and selection until they can no longer interbreed. Peripatric speciation is a special case in which a small peripheral population, such as a few colonists on an island, diverges rapidly under strong drift and new selective pressures; the founder effect plays a large role. In parapatric speciation, populations along a continuous range diverge across an environmental gradient despite some gene flow at the boundary. In sympatric speciation, a new species arises within the range of its parent species with no geographic separation. It is rare in animals, though host shifts in insects such as the apple maggot fly and diversification of cichlid fishes in African lakes are candidate examples. In plants, sympatric speciation by polyploidy is common: a tetraploid formed from a diploid ancestor produces sterile triploid offspring when it crosses back, so it is reproductively isolated in a single generation. Bread wheat is an allopolyploid (hexaploid) combining three ancestral genomes.
The genetics of speciation
How can two populations evolve hybrid incompatibility if every intermediate step must remain fit? The Dobzhansky Muller model answers this. Suppose the ancestral genotype is aabb. In one isolated population, allele A arises and becomes fixed, giving AAbb, which is perfectly fit. In the other, allele B arises and becomes fixed, giving aaBB, also fit. A and B have never been tested together. When the populations meet and hybridize, the hybrid carries A and B, and if those alleles interact badly, the hybrid is inviable or sterile. No population ever passed through an unfit stage; the incompatibility appears only in the hybrid. Several such interacting gene pairs have been identified in fruit flies, mice and plants.
A second regularity, Haldane's rule, states that when only one sex of a hybrid is inviable or sterile, it is usually the heterogametic sex: males in mammals and fruit flies (XY), females in birds and butterflies (ZW). A leading explanation is that recessive incompatibility alleles on the X (or Z) chromosome are exposed in the hemizygous sex, much as X-linked recessive diseases appear in males. When hybrids have reduced fitness and the incipient species come back into contact, selection can favor individuals that avoid mating with the other population, strengthening prezygotic isolation, a process called reinforcement.
The neutral theory holds that most molecular differences are neutral and fixed by drift, so neutral substitutions accumulate at the mutation rate and give a molecular clock (K = 2μT). Functionally constrained sites evolve slowly, and dN/dS distinguishes purifying (ω < 1), neutral (ω ≈ 1) and positive (ω > 1) selection. Species are maintained by prezygotic and postzygotic barriers; they usually arise allopatrically, sometimes sympatrically by polyploidy, and Dobzhansky Muller incompatibilities explain how hybrid problems evolve without unfit intermediates.
The chapter in one breath
- Allele frequencies (p, q) describe the gene pool; for codominant alleles p = f(AA) + ½f(Aa), and X-linked loci count one X per male and two per female.
- Hardy Weinberg: with random mating and no evolutionary forces, allele frequencies stay constant and genotypes settle at p2, 2pq, q2 in one generation.
- For a rare recessive, q = √(affected) and carriers 2pq ≈ 2q vastly outnumber affected people.
- A chi square test of Hardy Weinberg with two alleles has 1 degree of freedom (critical value 3.84).
- Inbreeding raises homozygosity by Fpq per class without changing allele frequencies; first cousins give F = 1/16 by path counting.
- Mutation is slow; migration makes populations alike (Δq = m[qm − q]).
- Genetic drift is random, strongest when Ne is small, fixes neutral alleles with probability equal to their frequency, and causes founder effects and bottlenecks.
- Selection problems: weight genotypes by fitness, divide by w̄; heterozygote advantage gives q̂ = s/(s + t), as for sickle cell.
- Mutation selection balance: q̂ ≈ √(u/s) for recessive and u/s for dominant deleterious alleles.
- The neutral theory predicts substitution rate = mutation rate and a molecular clock, K = 2μT; dN/dS reveals purifying or positive selection.
- Species are kept apart by prezygotic and postzygotic barriers and arise mostly by allopatric speciation, with polyploidy common in plants.
Words worth knowing
| Term | What it means |
|---|---|
| Allele frequency | The proportion of all copies of a gene in a population that are a given allele. |
| Genotype frequency | The proportion of individuals in a population with a given genotype. |
| Hardy Weinberg equilibrium | The state in which genotype frequencies equal p2, 2pq and q2 and allele frequencies stay constant. |
| Carrier frequency | The proportion of heterozygotes for a recessive allele, 2pq. |
| Identical by descent | Describes two alleles that are copies of the same ancestral allele. |
| Inbreeding coefficient (F) | The probability that the two alleles at a locus in an individual are identical by descent. |
| Assortative mating | Nonrandom mating based on phenotype, positive for similar and negative for dissimilar partners. |
| Inbreeding depression | Reduced fitness in inbred offspring, mainly from exposed recessive deleterious alleles. |
| Heterosis | Hybrid vigor; superior performance of offspring from crosses between inbred lines. |
| Gene flow | Movement of alleles between populations through migration of individuals or gametes. |
| Genetic drift | Random change in allele frequencies caused by sampling in finite populations. |
| Effective population size (Ne) | The size of an ideal population that would drift at the same rate as the real one. |
| Founder effect | Drift that occurs when a few individuals start a new population. |
| Bottleneck | A drastic temporary reduction in population size that causes drift and loss of variation. |
| Relative fitness (w) | The reproductive contribution of a genotype compared with the best genotype. |
| Selection coefficient (s) | The proportional reduction in fitness of a genotype, s = 1 − w. |
| Heterozygote advantage | Higher fitness of heterozygotes than of either homozygote, which maintains both alleles. |
| Mutation selection balance | The equilibrium at which mutation creates deleterious alleles as fast as selection removes them. |
| Neutral theory | The view that most molecular differences are selectively neutral and fixed by drift. |
| Molecular clock | The roughly constant accumulation of neutral substitutions, used to date divergences. |
| dN/dS | The ratio of nonsynonymous to synonymous substitution rates, used to detect selection. |
| Prezygotic barrier | A reproductive barrier that prevents mating or fertilization. |
| Postzygotic barrier | A reproductive barrier that reduces hybrid viability or fertility. |
| Allopatric speciation | Speciation after a population is divided by a geographic barrier. |
| Dobzhansky Muller incompatibility | A harmful interaction between alleles that evolved separately and meet only in hybrids. |
Check yourself
Developmental and Cancer Genetics
A single fertilized egg builds a body with hundreds of cell types arranged in exactly the right places, and it does this with one genome that every cell carries. Cancer is what happens when the genes that run that program, the ones that tell cells when to divide, when to stop and when to die, are broken one by one in a single lineage of cells. This chapter traces the developmental tool kit found in flies, worms and plants, and how the same genes, damaged in somatic cells, drive the stepwise evolution of a tumor.
By the end of this chapter you can
- Explain why model organisms such as Drosophila, C. elegans, zebrafish, the mouse and Arabidopsis are used, and contrast forward and reverse genetics.
- Distinguish totipotency, pluripotency, determination and differentiation, and explain the evidence for genomic equivalence.
- Predict offspring phenotypes for maternal effect genes such as bicoid.
- Trace the Drosophila segmentation cascade from morphogen gradients through gap, pair rule and segment polarity genes to the Hox genes, and apply the ABC model of flower development.
- Describe how cyclins, cyclin dependent kinases, the Rb and E2F switch and p53 enforce the cell cycle checkpoints.
- Compare proto-oncogenes, oncogenes and tumor suppressor genes, and list the ways a proto-oncogene becomes activated.
- Apply Knudson's two hit hypothesis and loss of heterozygosity to hereditary and sporadic cancers.
- Explain the multistep, clonal nature of cancer using the colorectal adenoma to carcinoma sequence, age incidence data and the hallmarks of cancer.
Section 1Model organisms and developmental genetics
The central puzzle of development
A human begins as one cell and ends as roughly thirty trillion cells of more than two hundred types, yet with rare exceptions (B and T lymphocytes that rearrange their antigen receptor genes, and red cells that discard their nucleus) all of these cells carry the same DNA. Development is therefore a problem of differential gene expression: different subsets of a shared genome are switched on in different cells, at different times, in response to signals and to the cell's own history.
Genomic equivalence and cloning
Early embryologists debated whether cells lose genes as they specialize. Nuclear transfer experiments settled the question. A nucleus taken from a differentiated cell and placed into an enucleated egg can, at least sometimes, direct development of an entire organism. Frog tadpole intestinal nuclei produced swimming tadpoles and some adult frogs, and later a sheep was cloned from the nucleus of an adult mammary gland cell by somatic cell nuclear transfer. The success rate is low, because the egg must erase the donor nucleus's epigenetic marks, but the principle is clear: differentiated cells keep a complete genome. This is genomic equivalence.
A more practical demonstration came when adult skin fibroblasts were reprogrammed into induced pluripotent stem cells (iPSCs) by forcing expression of four transcription factors: Oct4, Sox2, Klf4 and c-Myc. Expression of a few master regulators was enough to reset the cell's identity, which tells us that cell type is maintained by networks of transcription factors and chromatin states, not by permanent changes to the DNA sequence.
Potency, determination and differentiation
Potency describes the range of cell types a cell can still produce. The zygote and, in mammals, the blastomeres up to about the eight cell stage are totipotent: they can form every cell of the embryo and the extraembryonic tissues such as the placenta. Cells of the inner cell mass of the blastocyst are pluripotent: they can form any cell of the body (all three germ layers and the germ line) but not the trophoblast. Embryonic stem cells are cultured pluripotent cells. Adult stem cells, such as hematopoietic stem cells, are multipotent, producing several cell types within one lineage, and some progenitors are unipotent.
Two terms are often confused. Determination is the commitment of a cell to a particular fate. A determined cell may look exactly like its neighbors, but if you transplant it to a new location it still develops according to its original fate. Differentiation is the later, visible acquisition of the specialized structure and proteins of that fate. Determination is therefore tested by transplantation, while differentiation is seen by looking at the cell. Cells become determined either by inheriting cytoplasmic determinants unevenly at division (autonomous specification) or by receiving signals from neighboring cells (induction, or conditional specification).
Why model organisms
We cannot do controlled crosses or mutant screens in humans, so developmental genetics relies on model organisms: species chosen because they are easy to raise, breed quickly, produce many offspring and can be manipulated genetically. Because the core developmental genes are deeply conserved across animals, and many across all eukaryotes, discoveries in a fly or a worm routinely explain human biology.
| Organism | Generation time | Strengths for developmental genetics | Landmark contribution |
|---|---|---|---|
| Saccharomyces cerevisiae (budding yeast) | About 90 minutes per division | Haploid and diploid life cycle, easy gene replacement, temperature sensitive mutants | cdc mutants that defined the cell cycle control genes |
| Drosophila melanogaster (fruit fly) | About 10 days | Four chromosome pairs, balancer chromosomes, large mutant screens, polytene chromosomes | Segmentation genes and Hox genes; maternal effect genes |
| Caenorhabditis elegans (nematode) | About 3 days | Transparent, invariant cell lineage, self fertilizing hermaphrodites, RNA interference by feeding | Complete cell lineage, genes for programmed cell death, microRNAs |
| Danio rerio (zebrafish) | About 3 months | Transparent embryos that develop outside the mother, large clutches, vertebrate body plan | Vertebrate organ formation screens, heart and blood vessel development |
| Mus musculus (mouse) | About 9 to 10 weeks | Mammal, knockout and conditional knockout technology, inbred strains | Mammalian Hox function, models of human genetic disease and cancer |
| Arabidopsis thaliana (thale cress) | About 6 weeks | Small genome, self pollinating, easy transformation with Agrobacterium | ABC model of flower development, plant hormone signaling |
Forward and reverse genetics
There are two directions of attack. In forward genetics you start with a phenotype and find the gene. Animals are treated with a mutagen such as ethyl methanesulfonate (EMS), their descendants are bred to make mutations homozygous, and offspring are screened for a developmental defect. The mutant gene is then mapped and cloned. Forward screens are unbiased; the Drosophila segmentation screens behind Section 2 were forward screens.
In reverse genetics you start with a known gene sequence and ask what it does by disrupting it: a knockout by homologous recombination or CRISPR Cas9, a knockdown by RNA interference or morpholino oligonucleotides, or targeted overexpression. A conditional knockout (for example Cre lox in mice) deletes a gene only in a chosen tissue or time, so genes needed for early survival can be studied later.
Maternal effect and zygotic genes
The earliest steps of animal development are directed by mRNAs and proteins that the mother loads into the egg before fertilization. Genes whose products work this way are maternal effect genes. Their defining genetic property is that the offspring's phenotype is determined by the mother's genotype, not by its own. A bicoid mutant female (genotype bcd/bcd) produces embryos that lack head and thorax and die, even if those embryos received a normal bcd+ allele from their father, because the father's allele is not expressed until too late. In contrast, zygotic genes are transcribed from the embryo's own genome, and their mutant phenotypes follow the embryo's genotype in the usual Mendelian way.
Lessons from the worm: lineage and programmed cell death
C. elegans is so small and transparent that every cell division can be watched under the microscope. The adult hermaphrodite has exactly 959 somatic nuclei, and its cell lineage, the complete family tree from zygote to adult, is the same in every individual. Of the 1,090 somatic cells generated, 131 die by programmed cell death (apoptosis) at predictable times and places. Screens for worms in which those 131 cells survive identified the core apoptosis genes, and every one has a human counterpart.
| C. elegans gene | Role in the worm | Human counterpart | Effect in human cells |
|---|---|---|---|
| egl-1 | Triggers death in cells fated to die | BH3 only proteins (for example PUMA, NOXA, BIM) | Pro-apoptotic; neutralize Bcl-2 |
| ced-9 | Protects cells from death | Bcl-2 | Anti-apoptotic; overexpressed in follicular lymphoma |
| ced-4 | Activates the death protease | Apaf-1 | Forms the apoptosome with cytochrome c |
| ced-3 | Executes cell death | Caspases (caspase 9, caspase 3) | Cleave cellular proteins to dismantle the cell |
The worm also revealed the first microRNAs, lin-4 and let-7, which time the transitions between larval stages by blocking translation of target mRNAs.
Every cell in an organism carries essentially the same genome; development is the controlled, differential expression of that genome. Cells narrow their potency as they become determined and then differentiate. Model organisms, studied by forward screens (phenotype to gene) and reverse genetics (gene to phenotype), revealed conserved tool kits such as maternal effect genes, whose phenotypes follow the mother's genotype, and the apoptosis pathway.
Section 2Pattern formation and homeotic genes
Positional information and morphogens
Pattern formation is the process that organizes differentiated cells into a body plan with axes: anterior to posterior (head to tail), dorsal to ventral (back to belly) and, in limbs, proximal to distal. A cell needs to know where it is. One elegant solution is a morphogen: a substance produced at a localized source that spreads to form a concentration gradient. Cells read the local concentration and switch on different genes above different thresholds. A single gradient can thus specify several distinct zones.
The Drosophila segmentation cascade
The fruit fly embryo is the best understood example of pattern formation. For the first thirteen nuclear divisions, the nuclei share a common cytoplasm (a syncytium), so transcription factors can diffuse between nuclei without crossing membranes. The body is laid out by a hierarchy of gene classes, each class activated or repressed by the one above it, so that the pattern becomes progressively finer.
- Maternal effect (egg polarity) genes. bicoid mRNA is anchored at the anterior pole of the egg. After fertilization it is translated, and Bicoid protein diffuses to form an anterior to posterior gradient, high at the head end. Bicoid is a transcription factor that activates hunchback in the anterior half and represses translation of caudal mRNA. At the posterior pole, nanos mRNA is localized; Nanos protein blocks translation of maternal hunchback mRNA, so Hunchback protein ends up high in front and low behind. Without bicoid embryos lack head and thorax; without nanos, abdomen.
- Gap genes (hunchback, Krüppel, knirps, giant) are the first zygotic genes. Each is expressed in one or two broad bands. Their name comes from the mutant phenotype: loss of a gap gene removes a block of several adjacent segments, leaving a gap.
- Pair rule genes (even-skipped, fushi tarazu, hairy) are expressed in seven stripes, each stripe two segments wide. Each stripe has its own enhancer that reads a unique combination of gap proteins (the even-skipped stripe 2 enhancer is activated by Bicoid and Hunchback and bounded by the repressors Giant and Krüppel). Mutants lose every other segment, so the larva has half the normal number.
- Segment polarity genes (engrailed, wingless, hedgehog) are expressed in fourteen stripes, one per segment, and define the anterior and posterior compartment of each segment. Engrailed cells secrete Hedgehog, and neighboring cells answer with Wingless, which in turn maintains engrailed: a signaling loop that stabilizes each boundary. Mutants have segments in which one half is replaced by a mirror image of the other half.
- Homeotic (Hox) genes, discussed below, then give each segment its distinct identity: antennae on the head, legs on the thorax, wings on the second thoracic segment and so on.
Dorsal and ventral
The dorsal to ventral axis uses a different maternal system. Signaling through the Toll receptor on the ventral side of the embryo causes the transcription factor Dorsal to enter nuclei, but only ventrally, forming a nuclear gradient that is high on the belly side. High Dorsal activates twist and snail, specifying mesoderm; intermediate levels specify neurogenic ectoderm; and Dorsal represses decapentaplegic (dpp), so Dpp is made only on the back. (Loss of dorsal makes embryos that are entirely dorsal, hence the name.)
Homeotic genes and the homeobox
Homeotic mutations transform one body part into another body part that normally develops elsewhere. In the dominant gain of function Antennapedia mutation, the gene is wrongly switched on in the head, and the fly grows legs where its antennae should be. In combinations of loss of function Ultrabithorax mutations, the third thoracic segment takes on the identity of the second, so the fly develops a second pair of wings instead of its balancers (halteres). Notice the logic: losing a Hox gene usually makes a segment look like a more anterior segment, because the remaining, more anterior Hox genes take over.
The Drosophila Hox genes lie in two clusters on chromosome 3: the Antennapedia complex (labial, proboscipedia, Deformed, Sex combs reduced, Antennapedia) and the Bithorax complex (Ultrabithorax, abdominal-A, Abdominal-B). Remarkably, the order of the genes along the chromosome matches the order of the body regions in which they are expressed, from head to tail. This is colinearity.
All Hox genes share a 180 base pair sequence, the homeobox, which encodes a 60 amino acid DNA binding homeodomain folded into three alpha helices (a helix turn helix variant). Hox proteins are therefore transcription factors; each one switches on a battery of downstream "realizator" genes that build the structures of its segment.
Hox genes in vertebrates
Vertebrates have the same genes, multiplied. Mammals carry 39 Hox genes in four clusters (HOXA, HOXB, HOXC, HOXD) on four different chromosomes, arranged in 13 paralog groups. Colinearity holds in both space and time: genes at the 3' end of a cluster are expressed earlier and more anteriorly, and genes at the 5' end later and more posteriorly. Hox codes specify vertebral identity, hindbrain regions and limb segments. Excess retinoic acid, a teratogen, shifts Hox expression and disrupts the body plan.
Pattern in plants: the ABC model
Plants evolved their own homeotic system. An Arabidopsis flower has four concentric whorls: sepals (whorl 1, outermost), petals (whorl 2), stamens (whorl 3) and carpels (whorl 4, center). The ABC model explains floral organ identity with three classes of genes, most of which encode MADS box transcription factors rather than homeodomain proteins:
- A genes (APETALA1, APETALA2) act in whorls 1 and 2.
- B genes (APETALA3, PISTILLATA) act in whorls 2 and 3.
- C gene (AGAMOUS) acts in whorls 3 and 4.
- A and C repress each other, so if one is lost, the other spreads into its territory.
| Genotype | Whorl 1 | Whorl 2 | Whorl 3 | Whorl 4 |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Wild type | A: sepal | A + B: petal | B + C: stamen | C: carpel |
| A mutant (C spreads outward) | C: carpel | B + C: stamen | B + C: stamen | C: carpel |
| B mutant | A: sepal | A: sepal | C: carpel | C: carpel |
| C mutant (A spreads inward) | A: sepal | A + B: petal | A + B: petal | A: sepal (and the flower keeps growing new whorls) |
Pattern is built by a cascade of transcription factors. In Drosophila, maternal morphogen gradients (Bicoid, Nanos, Dorsal) set the axes; gap genes make broad bands, pair rule genes make seven stripes and segment polarity genes make fourteen; Hox genes, colinear on the chromosome and sharing the homeobox, then assign each segment its identity. Plants use MADS box genes in the ABC model, where losing one function lets an antagonist spread and converts organs into other organs.
Section 3Cell cycle control
The phases of the cycle
Development requires cells to divide at the right times and stop at the right times, and cancer is, at its core, a failure of that control. The eukaryotic cell cycle has four phases. In G1 (gap 1) the cell grows and decides whether to divide. In S phase (synthesis) it replicates its DNA, so a human cell goes from a 2C to a 4C DNA content (C is the amount of DNA in one haploid set). In G2 it prepares for division and checks that replication is complete. In M phase it carries out mitosis (prophase, prometaphase, metaphase, anaphase, telophase) and cytokinesis. G1, S and G2 together are called interphase. A typical cultured human cell cycles in about 24 hours: roughly 11 hours in G1, 8 hours in S, 4 hours in G2 and only about 1 hour in M. Cells that stop dividing exit into quiescent G0; neurons stay there for life, whereas liver cells can re-enter the cycle after injury.
Cyclins and cyclin dependent kinases
The engine of the cycle is a family of protein kinases called cyclin dependent kinases (CDKs). A CDK is inactive by itself. It becomes active only when bound to a regulatory partner, a cyclin, whose levels rise and fall during the cycle (hence the name). CDK levels stay fairly constant; it is the oscillating cyclins, made by transcription and destroyed by ubiquitin mediated proteolysis, that give the cycle its rhythm. Each cyclin and CDK pair phosphorylates a different set of target proteins, which pushes the cell through a particular transition.
| Cyclin and CDK pair | When active | Main job | Key regulators |
|---|---|---|---|
| Cyclin D with CDK4 or CDK6 | Mid to late G1 | Begins phosphorylation of Rb in response to growth factors | Cyclin D is made when mitogens signal through Ras and MAP kinase; inhibited by p16 (INK4 family) |
| Cyclin E with CDK2 | Late G1 into S | Completes Rb phosphorylation, starts DNA replication | Inhibited by p21 and p27 (Cip/Kip family) |
| Cyclin A with CDK2 | S phase | Fires replication origins and prevents rereplication | Inhibited by p21 |
| Cyclin B with CDK1 (MPF) | Late G2 through metaphase | Chromosome condensation, nuclear envelope breakdown, spindle assembly | Inhibited by Wee1 phosphorylation; activated by Cdc25 phosphatase; cyclin B destroyed by APC/C |
Cyclin B with CDK1 was first found biochemically as maturation promoting factor (MPF), which drove frog oocytes into meiosis; yeast cdc (cell division cycle) mutant screens identified the same kinase, and sea urchin eggs revealed cyclins as proteins destroyed at every division.
CDK activity is regulated at several levels, which is why it can act as a switch:
- Cyclin binding plus an activating phosphorylation by CDK activating kinase (CAK) are required.
- Inhibitory phosphorylation by Wee1 holds CDK1 off during G2; the phosphatase Cdc25 removes it. Active CDK1 activates Cdc25 and inhibits Wee1, so entry into mitosis is all or none.
- CDK inhibitors (CKIs): the INK4 family (p16) blocks CDK4/6; the Cip/Kip family (p21, p27) blocks CDK2 and CDK1.
- Proteolysis: SCF destroys CKIs at G1/S, and the anaphase promoting complex/cyclosome (APC/C) destroys securin and mitotic cyclins, making transitions irreversible.
The restriction point: Rb and E2F
In mammalian cells the most important decision is made in late G1, at the restriction point. Before it, a cell needs continuous growth factor signaling to proceed; after it, the cell is committed to complete the cycle even if growth factors are removed. The molecular switch is the retinoblastoma protein (Rb). Unphosphorylated (hypophosphorylated) Rb binds the transcription factor E2F and blocks its activation domain, and it recruits histone deacetylases that keep E2F target genes silent. Growth factor signals raise cyclin D; cyclin D with CDK4/6 begins phosphorylating Rb, which releases some E2F. E2F then turns on the gene for cyclin E, and cyclin E with CDK2 phosphorylates Rb further, releasing more E2F. This positive feedback loop converts a gradual rise in growth signals into a sharp, irreversible commitment. Free E2F activates S phase genes such as cyclin A and DNA polymerase subunits.
Checkpoints
A checkpoint is a surveillance pathway that halts the cycle until a condition is met. Checkpoints were defined genetically: yeast rad9 mutants with damaged DNA fail to pause and die. Because the pause is imposed by a separate control system, it can be lost by mutation, as happens in cancer.
| Checkpoint | What it monitors | Sensors and signals | How it stops the cycle |
|---|---|---|---|
| G1/S (restriction point and DNA damage) | Growth signals, cell size, DNA damage | ATM (double strand breaks) and ATR (single stranded DNA), checkpoint kinases Chk2 and Chk1, p53 | p53 induces p21, which blocks cyclin E with CDK2; Rb stays bound to E2F |
| Intra S | Stalled replication forks, damage during replication | ATR and Chk1 | Blocks firing of late origins until repair |
| G2/M | Complete, undamaged DNA replication | ATM, ATR, Chk1 and Chk2 | Chk1 inhibits Cdc25, so CDK1 stays phosphorylated by Wee1 and inactive |
| Spindle assembly (metaphase to anaphase) | Attachment of every kinetochore to the spindle under tension | Mad2, BubR1 and other proteins at unattached kinetochores | Mad2 sequesters Cdc20, so APC/C cannot destroy securin; separase stays inactive and cohesin is not cut |
Sister chromatids are held by cohesin. At anaphase, APC/C with Cdc20 destroys securin, freeing separase to cut cohesin. A single unattached kinetochore can hold this off; a weakened spindle checkpoint produces aneuploid daughter cells, common in tumors.
p53, guardian of the genome
The protein p53, encoded by TP53, is a transcription factor that integrates stress signals. In unstressed cells it is kept at very low levels by MDM2, an E3 ubiquitin ligase that tags p53 for proteasomal destruction (and whose gene is itself switched on by p53, a negative feedback loop). DNA damage activates ATM and ATR, which phosphorylate p53 and MDM2 and block their interaction; p53 accumulates, forms tetramers and binds DNA. Its targets fall into three groups:
- Arrest: p21 (CDKN1A), a CDK inhibitor that halts the cycle at G1/S and G2/M.
- Repair: genes for DNA repair proteins, giving the cell time and tools to fix the damage.
- Apoptosis: if damage is too severe, pro-apoptotic genes such as BAX, PUMA and NOXA, which release cytochrome c from mitochondria and activate the caspase cascade.
Oncogene activation can also activate p53, through the protein ARF (encoded by the same CDKN2A locus as p16), which inhibits MDM2. Thus p53 guards against both damaged DNA and inappropriate proliferation signals.
The cell cycle is driven by CDKs whose activity depends on oscillating cyclins, activating and inhibitory phosphorylation, CDK inhibitors and timed proteolysis. Commitment occurs at the restriction point, where G1 cyclin and CDK complexes phosphorylate Rb and release E2F. Checkpoints at G1/S, G2/M and the spindle stop the cycle when DNA is damaged or chromosomes are unattached, with p53 inducing arrest through p21 or apoptosis when damage is severe.
Section 4Oncogenes and tumor suppressor genes
Cancer is a genetic disease of somatic cells
Cancer is a group of diseases in which cells divide without regard to the normal controls and invade surrounding tissue. It is a genetic disease in the sense that it is caused by changes in genes, but in most cases those changes are somatic mutations, acquired during life in one cell lineage and not passed to children. A minority of cancers (roughly 5 to 10 percent overall) arise in people who inherited a germline mutation that gave every cell in the body a head start. Carcinogens are usually mutagens, tumors are clonal (descended from one altered cell) and specific inherited mutations predispose families to specific cancers.
Two broad classes of genes are involved, and the clearest way to keep them apart is the car analogy. Oncogenes are like an accelerator stuck to the floor: a gain of function in a gene that normally promotes growth. Tumor suppressor genes are like brakes that fail: a loss of function in a gene that normally restrains growth, repairs DNA or triggers apoptosis.
Proto-oncogenes and their activation
The first oncogenes were found in tumor causing retroviruses. The Rous sarcoma virus of chickens carries a gene, v-src, that transforms cells. A nearly identical gene, c-src, turned up in every normal vertebrate genome: the virus had captured a cellular gene in altered form. Such normal cellular genes are called proto-oncogenes. They encode the components of the pathways that tell a cell to divide: growth factors, growth factor receptors, signal transducers such as Ras, nuclear transcription factors such as Myc, and cell cycle proteins such as cyclin D. When mutated or overexpressed, they become oncogenes.
Because one activated allele is enough, oncogenes act dominantly at the level of the cell. The main routes to activation are:
| Mechanism of activation | What changes | Classic example | Associated cancer |
|---|---|---|---|
| Point mutation | A hyperactive protein that cannot be turned off | KRAS codon 12, 13 or 61 mutations block GTP hydrolysis | Pancreatic (about 90 percent), colorectal, lung adenocarcinoma |
| Gene amplification | Many copies of a normal gene, so too much normal protein | ERBB2 (HER2) receptor; MYCN | About 20 percent of breast cancers; neuroblastoma |
| Chromosomal translocation forming a fusion gene | A new chimeric protein with unregulated activity | BCR-ABL1 from t(9;22), the Philadelphia chromosome | Chronic myeloid leukemia |
| Translocation to a strong enhancer | A normal protein made at the wrong time or level | MYC moved next to the immunoglobulin heavy chain enhancer, t(8;14) | Burkitt lymphoma |
| Insertional or viral activation | A viral promoter or a viral copy of the gene drives expression | Retroviral insertion near MYC; v-src | Animal leukemias and sarcomas |
Ras is the most frequently mutated oncogene family in human cancer, altered in roughly one quarter to one third of tumors. Ras, a small GTP binding protein linking receptor tyrosine kinases to the MAP kinase cascade, is on when bound to GTP and turns itself off by hydrolysis, aided by GTPase activating proteins (GAPs). Codon 12, 13 or 61 mutations cripple hydrolysis and lock Ras on. The GAP neurofibromin, encoded by NF1, is a tumor suppressor: one pathway holds both accelerator and brake.
Tumor suppressor genes and the two hit hypothesis
The classic tumor suppressor is the RB1 gene, discovered through retinoblastoma, a cancer of the developing retina in young children (roughly 1 in 15,000 to 20,000 births). About 40 percent of cases are hereditary: these children usually develop tumors in both eyes (bilateral), often several tumors, at an earlier age, and they have an increased risk of other cancers, especially osteosarcoma. The remaining 60 percent are sporadic: a single tumor in one eye (unilateral), appearing later, with no family history.
By comparing the age of onset in the two groups, Alfred Knudson proposed the two hit hypothesis. Retinoblastoma requires two mutational events in the same cell. In hereditary cases the first hit is inherited, so one somatic hit suffices, and among millions of retinal cells that happens several times; in sporadic cases both hits must strike one cell, a much rarer event. Both copies of RB1 must be lost for the tumor to form, so tumor suppressor genes are recessive at the level of the cell. Yet the predisposition is inherited as an autosomal dominant trait with about 90 percent penetrance, because nearly every carrier will experience a second hit somewhere in the retina. This recessive mechanism with dominant inheritance is a heavily tested idea.
Loss of heterozygosity
The second hit is often not a new point mutation. More commonly, the cell loses the remaining normal allele by deleting part of the chromosome, losing the whole chromosome (often followed by duplication of the mutant one), or by mitotic recombination or gene conversion that copies the mutant allele onto the homolog. Each of these converts a heterozygous cell into one that carries only the mutant allele, an event called loss of heterozygosity (LOH). LOH is detectable with nearby DNA markers: a person heterozygous for markers around RB1 in blood cells shows only one marker allele in tumor cells. The second hit can also be epigenetic: hypermethylation of CpG islands in a promoter can silence the remaining allele (common for MLH1, BRCA1 and CDKN2A).
Major tumor suppressors and their pathways
Tumor suppressors are often divided into gatekeepers, which directly control cell proliferation or death (such as RB1, APC and TP53), and caretakers, which maintain genome integrity (such as the mismatch repair genes and BRCA1 and BRCA2). Caretaker loss raises the mutation rate rather than driving growth directly.
| Gene | Normal function | Inherited syndrome | Main tumors |
|---|---|---|---|
| RB1 | Binds E2F; restriction point brake | Hereditary retinoblastoma | Retinoblastoma, osteosarcoma |
| TP53 | Transcription factor for arrest, repair and apoptosis | Li-Fraumeni syndrome | Sarcomas, breast, brain, adrenocortical, leukemia |
| APC | Targets beta catenin for destruction (Wnt pathway) | Familial adenomatous polyposis | Hundreds to thousands of colon polyps, colorectal cancer |
| BRCA1, BRCA2 | Homologous recombination repair of double strand breaks | Hereditary breast and ovarian cancer | Breast, ovarian, prostate, pancreatic |
| MLH1, MSH2, MSH6, PMS2 | DNA mismatch repair | Lynch syndrome | Colorectal (with microsatellite instability), endometrial |
| NF1 | GAP that turns off Ras | Neurofibromatosis type 1 | Neurofibromas, malignant nerve sheath tumors |
Not every tumor suppressor obeys the strict two hit rule. Some are haploinsufficient: losing one copy already reduces protein enough to give cells an advantage (PTEN is an example). And because p53 works as a tetramer, a missense mutant subunit can poison normal ones, a dominant negative effect. TP53 is mutated in about half of all human cancers, more than any other gene.
| Feature | Oncogenes | Tumor suppressor genes |
|---|---|---|
| Normal role | Promote growth and division (proto-oncogenes) | Restrain division, repair DNA, promote apoptosis |
| Type of mutation | Gain of function | Loss of function |
| Alleles needed in the cell | One (dominant in the cell) | Usually two (recessive in the cell) |
| Inherited germline form | Rare (exceptions: RET in multiple endocrine neoplasia type 2, MET) | Common; predisposition shows autosomal dominant inheritance |
| Typical lesions | Point mutation, amplification, translocation | Deletion, nonsense or frameshift mutation, LOH, promoter methylation |
Proto-oncogenes become oncogenes through gain of function (point mutation, amplification or translocation), and one activated allele is enough. Tumor suppressor genes cause cancer through loss of function of both alleles, the second often by loss of heterozygosity or promoter methylation; an inherited first hit makes cancer predisposition behave as an autosomal dominant trait, as Knudson's analysis of retinoblastoma showed. Gatekeepers control growth directly, while caretakers protect the genome.
Section 5The multistep nature of cancer
One mutation is not enough
If a single mutation could cause cancer, cancers would be far more common than they are, and their incidence would not rise so steeply with age. Several independent observations show that cancer requires the accumulation of multiple mutations in one cell lineage:
- Age incidence: the risk of most carcinomas climbs steeply with age, as expected if several rare events must accumulate.
- Experimental transformation: a single activated RAS oncogene cannot transform normal rodent cells, but RAS plus MYC (or RAS plus loss of p53) can. Transgenic mice carrying one oncogene develop occasional, late tumors, while mice carrying two develop tumors faster and more often.
- Sequencing: tumor genomes carry several driver mutations that give a growth advantage, typically a handful (often 2 to 8 in common solid tumors), along with many more passenger mutations that are along for the ride.
Age incidence and the number of steps
Suppose a cancer requires k rare, independent, rate limiting mutations in one cell. The probability that all have occurred by age t rises roughly as tk, and the incidence (new cases per year) rises roughly as tk-1. On a plot of log incidence against log age, the data fall on a straight line with slope k - 1. For many common carcinomas the slope is about 5 to 6, suggesting about six or seven rate limiting steps. The model is an approximation. A person who inherits one step needs one fewer somatic event, so hereditary cancers show a shallower slope and arise earlier.
The colorectal paradigm
Colorectal cancer is the best mapped example of multistep progression because the intermediate stages, polyps of increasing size and dysplasia, can be removed at colonoscopy and analyzed. The classic sequence, worked out by comparing mutations in polyps and cancers, is:
- Loss of APC (both alleles) in a colonic crypt cell. APC normally helps destroy beta catenin; without it, beta catenin accumulates, enters the nucleus and, with TCF transcription factors, keeps Wnt target genes such as MYC on. The crypt cell keeps dividing instead of differentiating, forming a small adenoma. This is the gatekeeper step and it occurs in about 80 percent of sporadic colorectal tumors.
- Activating mutation of KRAS, which accelerates growth of the adenoma.
- Loss of chromosome 18q, including SMAD4, which removes growth inhibition by TGF beta signaling, in late adenomas.
- Loss of TP53, typically at the transition from adenoma to invasive carcinoma, allowing cells with damaged genomes to survive.
- Further changes that permit invasion and metastasis.
The order is a tendency; the accumulation matters more than the exact sequence. A second route, seen in Lynch syndrome and in about 15 percent of sporadic tumors, starts with loss of mismatch repair. These tumors show microsatellite instability and carry many more mutations, including frameshifts in genes with short repeats such as the TGF beta receptor type II gene.
Clonal evolution
Tumor progression is Darwinian evolution inside the body. A cell acquires a mutation that lets it divide a little more than its neighbors; its descendants form a clone; within that clone one cell acquires a second advantageous mutation and its subclone expands; and so on. Each clonal expansion enlarges the target for the next hit. Tumors therefore become heterogeneous mixtures of related subclones, and treatment can select for resistant ones, which is why a cancer that responds at first may relapse.
Genomic instability speeds the process. Loss of caretaker genes raises the point mutation rate (mismatch repair defects) or produces chromosomal instability, with frequent gains and losses of whole chromosomes and arms (spindle checkpoint defects, telomere crisis, loss of p53). Most solid tumors are aneuploid.
The hallmarks of cancer
A useful way to organize the many mutations is by the capabilities they give the cell. The widely taught hallmarks of cancer are:
| Hallmark | Typical genetic basis | Example of a targeted therapy |
|---|---|---|
| Sustaining proliferative signaling | Activated RAS, EGFR, ERBB2, MYC | EGFR and HER2 inhibitors |
| Evading growth suppressors | Loss of RB1, CDKN2A | CDK4/6 inhibitors |
| Resisting cell death | Loss of TP53, Bcl-2 overexpression | Bcl-2 inhibitors |
| Enabling replicative immortality | Reactivation of telomerase (TERT promoter mutations) | Under investigation |
| Inducing angiogenesis | Increased VEGF, loss of VHL | VEGF antibodies and receptor inhibitors |
| Activating invasion and metastasis | Loss of E-cadherin, protease secretion | Limited so far |
| Reprogramming energy metabolism | Aerobic glycolysis (Warburg effect), IDH1 mutations | IDH inhibitors |
| Evading immune destruction | PD-L1 expression, loss of antigen presentation | Immune checkpoint inhibitors (anti PD-1) |
Two enabling characteristics, genome instability and tumor promoting inflammation, help cells acquire the hallmarks. Normal human cells divide only about 40 to 60 times (the Hayflick limit) as telomeres shorten; about 85 to 90 percent of cancers reactivate telomerase.
Environmental causes: mutagens and viruses
Most carcinogens cause cancer by damaging DNA. Tobacco smoke contains polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons that form bulky DNA adducts and leave a signature of G to T transversions in TP53 of lung tumors. Ultraviolet light forms pyrimidine dimers and leaves C to T changes in skin cancers. The Ames test screens chemicals for mutagenicity, using Salmonella strains with a his mutation that cannot make histidine. Bacteria are plated without histidine plus the chemical, usually with rat liver extract (S9) for metabolic activation; only revertants form colonies.
Viruses cause an estimated 10 to 15 percent of cancers worldwide. High risk human papillomavirus types (16 and 18) cause nearly all cervical cancers and many oropharyngeal and anal cancers; their E6 protein targets p53 for degradation and their E7 protein binds and inactivates Rb, knocking out both key brakes at once. Hepatitis B and C, Epstein Barr virus and HTLV-1 are other cancer viruses, and the bacterium Helicobacter pylori drives gastric cancer.
Exploiting the genetics of cancer: synthetic lethality
Restoring a lost tumor suppressor is hard, but its absence creates a weakness. Two genes are synthetically lethal when losing either alone is tolerated but losing both kills the cell. Cells lacking BRCA1 or BRCA2 cannot repair double strand breaks by homologous recombination and depend heavily on other repair pathways. Drugs that inhibit PARP, an enzyme involved in single strand break repair, cause single strand breaks to become double strand breaks during replication; normal cells repair them, but BRCA deficient tumor cells die. PARP inhibitors are now used for BRCA associated cancers.
Cancer develops through the accumulation of several driver mutations in one cell lineage, each followed by clonal expansion. Steep age incidence (log slope about 5 to 6), the stepwise colorectal sequence (APC, KRAS, SMAD4, TP53) and tumor genome sequencing all support the multistep model. Genomic instability accelerates the process; mutagens and viruses supply hits; and the resulting hallmarks, from sustained signaling to immune evasion, point to targeted therapies and screening strategies.
The chapter in one breath
- Development is differential gene expression from a shared genome; nuclear transfer and iPSC reprogramming prove genomic equivalence.
- Cells narrow from totipotent to pluripotent to multipotent; determination (commitment) precedes visible differentiation.
- Model organisms are studied by forward genetics (phenotype to gene) and reverse genetics (gene to phenotype, as in knockouts).
- Maternal effect phenotypes follow the mother's genotype; whole broods are affected.
- In Drosophila, morphogen gradients (Bicoid, Nanos, Dorsal) drive gap, pair rule (7 stripes) and segment polarity (14 stripes) genes, and colinear Hox genes with a 180 bp homeobox assign segment identity.
- The ABC model specifies floral organs; A and C repress each other, so losing one lets the other spread.
- Cyclins activate CDKs; Wee1, Cdc25, CKIs (p16, p21, p27) and proteolysis by SCF and APC/C make transitions sharp and irreversible.
- At the restriction point, cyclin D and E complexes phosphorylate Rb, releasing E2F; checkpoints at G1/S, G2/M and the spindle stop the cycle, with p53 inducing p21 or apoptosis.
- Proto-oncogenes become oncogenes by gain of function (point mutation, amplification, translocation) and act dominantly in the cell.
- Tumor suppressors need two hits (Knudson), often via loss of heterozygosity; an inherited first hit produces autosomal dominant predisposition.
- Cancer is multistep and clonal: age incidence slopes of about 6, the APC, KRAS, SMAD4, TP53 colorectal sequence and the hallmarks of cancer describe how tumors evolve.
- Mutagens (detected by the Ames test) and viruses such as HPV supply hits; synthetic lethality (PARP inhibitors in BRCA deficient tumors) turns lost genes into targets.
Words worth knowing
| Term | What it means |
|---|---|
| Totipotent | Able to give rise to every cell of the organism, including extraembryonic tissues such as the placenta. |
| Induced pluripotent stem cell (iPSC) | A differentiated cell reprogrammed to pluripotency by expressing a few transcription factors such as Oct4, Sox2, Klf4 and c-Myc. |
| Determination | Commitment of a cell to a particular fate, shown by transplantation, before any visible specialization. |
| Forward genetics | Starting from a mutant phenotype and identifying the gene responsible. |
| Maternal effect gene | A gene whose product, deposited in the egg by the mother, determines the offspring phenotype regardless of the offspring's own genotype. |
| Morphogen | A substance whose concentration gradient gives cells positional information and specifies different fates at different thresholds. |
| Gap genes | Zygotic segmentation genes expressed in broad bands; mutants lose blocks of adjacent segments. |
| Pair rule genes | Segmentation genes expressed in seven stripes; mutants lose every other segment. |
| Segment polarity genes | Genes expressed in fourteen stripes that define the anterior and posterior parts of each segment. |
| Homeotic (Hox) gene | A gene that specifies the identity of a body region; mutations transform one structure into another. |
| Homeobox | A conserved 180 base pair sequence encoding the 60 amino acid DNA binding homeodomain. |
| Cyclin dependent kinase (CDK) | A protein kinase that drives cell cycle transitions and is active only when bound to a cyclin. |
| Restriction point | The point in late G1 after which a cell is committed to divide even without further growth factor signals. |
| Checkpoint | A surveillance pathway that halts the cell cycle until a condition, such as intact DNA or full spindle attachment, is met. |
| Proto-oncogene | A normal gene that promotes cell growth or division and can be converted into an oncogene. |
| Oncogene | A mutated or overexpressed form of a proto-oncogene with a gain of function that promotes cancer. |
| Tumor suppressor gene | A gene whose normal product restrains growth or protects the genome; cancer results when both copies lose function. |
| Two hit hypothesis | Knudson's model that both alleles of a tumor suppressor must be inactivated, one of which may be inherited. |
| Loss of heterozygosity (LOH) | Loss of the remaining normal allele in a heterozygous cell by deletion, chromosome loss or recombination. |
| Driver mutation | A mutation that gives a cancer cell a selective growth advantage. |
| Ames test | A bacterial reversion assay that detects chemical mutagens, often with liver extract to mimic metabolic activation. |
| Synthetic lethality | A relationship in which loss of either of two genes is tolerated but loss of both kills the cell. |
Check yourself
Human Inheritance, Genetic Testing and Counseling
Everything in this book comes together when a family sits down with a clinician and asks what a diagnosis means for them, their children and their relatives. Human genetics applies Mendel, Hardy and Weinberg, Bayes and the molecular biology of mutation to real decisions: whether to test, how to read a result, how to estimate a risk and how to share it. This chapter covers the major patterns of single gene disease, the genetics of common complex disease, the tests now available from before conception to adulthood, the arithmetic of genetic counseling and the ethical questions that come with knowing more about our genomes.
By the end of this chapter you can
- Recognize autosomal dominant, autosomal recessive, X linked and mitochondrial disorders and explain penetrance, expressivity, anticipation and imprinting.
- Use the Hardy Weinberg equation to estimate carrier frequencies from disease incidence.
- Explain the liability threshold model, heritability, twin concordance and the patterns of recurrence risk for multifactorial traits.
- Interpret genome wide association studies, odds ratios and polygenic risk scores.
- Compare diagnostic, predictive, carrier, prenatal and newborn testing, and calculate sensitivity, specificity and positive predictive value.
- Calculate recurrence and carrier risks, including conditional (Bayesian) risk, for counseling problems.
- Discuss informed consent, privacy, genetic discrimination, testing of minors, secondary findings and germline editing.
Section 1Single gene disorders in humans
How human inheritance is studied
Human geneticists cannot arrange crosses, so they work backward from families. A pedigree records relationships and phenotypes across generations, and the inheritance pattern is inferred from who is affected. The person through whom a family comes to attention is the proband; the person seeking advice is the consultand. Single gene (Mendelian) disorders are individually rare, but there are thousands of them, and together they affect roughly 1 percent of people. Catalogs of human genes and phenotypes now list more than 7,000 Mendelian conditions with a known molecular basis.
Autosomal dominant disorders
In autosomal dominant (AD) inheritance, one copy of the variant allele is enough to cause disease. The pedigree shows affected individuals in every generation (vertical transmission), males and females affected about equally, and male to male transmission, which rules out X linkage. Each child of an affected heterozygote has a 1/2 chance of inheriting the variant. Most affected people are heterozygous; homozygotes, when they occur, are often more severely affected.
Dominant disorders arise by several molecular mechanisms. Some involve haploinsufficiency, in which half the normal protein is not enough (familial hypercholesterolemia from LDLR variants, with half the normal LDL receptors). Some involve a dominant negative effect, in which an abnormal protein disrupts the normal one, as in Marfan syndrome (FBN1, fibrillin 1) and osteogenesis imperfecta (collagen type I). Others are gain of function, as in achondroplasia, where a specific FGFR3 variant (Gly380Arg) makes a growth plate receptor overactive, and Huntington disease, where an expanded protein acquires toxic properties.
Three features complicate dominant pedigrees:
- Incomplete penetrance: some people with the genotype show no phenotype. Penetrance is the percentage of genotype carriers who are affected. Hereditary retinoblastoma is about 90 percent penetrant; BRCA1 variants confer a high but incomplete lifetime cancer risk. A nonpenetrant carrier produces a "skipped generation."
- Variable expressivity: carriers differ in severity. In neurofibromatosis type 1, one family member may have only a few café au lait spots while another has thousands of neurofibromas. Penetrance is all or none for a person; expressivity is a matter of degree.
- New mutations: about 80 percent of people with achondroplasia have unaffected parents. Many such new variants arise in sperm, and their frequency rises with paternal age. Occasionally a parent carries the variant in part of the germ line only (germline mosaicism), so two children are affected although both parents test negative in blood.
Autosomal recessive disorders
In autosomal recessive (AR) inheritance, disease requires two variant alleles. Affected people usually have unaffected heterozygous (carrier) parents; the pattern is horizontal, appearing in siblings rather than across generations; males and females are equally affected; and consanguinity raises the risk, because related parents are more likely to carry the same rare allele. Two carrier parents have, at each conception, a 1/4 chance of an affected child, 1/2 of a carrier and 1/4 of a noncarrier. Most recessive disorders result from loss of function, typically of enzymes, which explains why carriers (with 50 percent activity) are healthy. Many inborn errors of metabolism follow this pattern.
| Disorder | Gene and protein | Pattern | Key features and genetics |
|---|---|---|---|
| Cystic fibrosis | CFTR, chloride channel | AR | Thick secretions in lungs and pancreas; F508del is the most common variant (about 70 percent of alleles in people of Northern European ancestry) |
| Sickle cell disease | HBB, beta globin | AR | Glu6Val substitution; polymerized hemoglobin S sickles red cells; carriers protected against severe malaria |
| Phenylketonuria | PAH, phenylalanine hydroxylase | AR | Phenylalanine builds up and harms the brain; prevented by newborn screening and diet |
| Tay-Sachs disease | HEXA, hexosaminidase A | AR | GM2 ganglioside storage, neurodegeneration in infancy; carrier screening reduced incidence dramatically |
| Huntington disease | HTT, huntingtin | AD | CAG repeat expansion; adult onset movement disorder and dementia; anticipation |
| Achondroplasia | FGFR3 | AD | Gain of function; most cases new mutations, linked to paternal age |
| Marfan syndrome | FBN1, fibrillin 1 | AD | Tall stature, lens dislocation, aortic root dilation; variable expressivity |
| Duchenne muscular dystrophy | DMD, dystrophin | XR | Frameshift or nonsense variants abolish dystrophin; about one third of cases are new mutations |
| Hemophilia A | F8, factor VIII | XR | Bleeding into joints and muscles; about 1 in 5,000 male births |
| Fragile X syndrome | FMR1 | X linked | CGG repeat expansion silences the gene; most common inherited cause of intellectual disability |
| Leber hereditary optic neuropathy | Mitochondrial complex I genes | Mitochondrial | Sudden vision loss in young adults; maternal transmission only |
X linked disorders
Because males are hemizygous for the X chromosome, a single recessive allele on the X is expressed in a male. In X linked recessive inheritance, affected people are mostly males; affected males are related through unaffected carrier females; there is no male to male transmission (fathers pass a Y to sons); and all daughters of an affected male are obligate carriers. A carrier mother has a 1/2 chance of passing the allele to each child, so half her sons are affected and half her daughters are carriers. Carrier females are usually healthy but can show symptoms because of skewed X inactivation. Duchenne muscular dystrophy, hemophilia A and B, red green color blindness and G6PD deficiency are examples. In X linked dominant disorders (such as X linked hypophosphatemic rickets), affected fathers pass the condition to all daughters and no sons, and females are affected about twice as often as males, usually more mildly.
Mitochondrial inheritance
The 16,569 base pair mitochondrial genome encodes 13 proteins of oxidative phosphorylation plus 22 tRNAs and 2 rRNAs. Mitochondria are inherited through the egg, so mitochondrial disorders show maternal inheritance: an affected mother can pass the condition to all her children, while an affected father passes it to none. Cells contain hundreds to thousands of mitochondrial genomes, and a mixture of normal and variant genomes (heteroplasmy) is common. Because the proportion can shift at random during egg formation (the mitochondrial bottleneck) and among tissues, severity varies greatly within a family, and symptoms appear when the variant fraction passes a tissue's threshold. Tissues with high energy demand (brain, muscle, retina, heart) suffer most, as in MELAS (mitochondrial encephalomyopathy, lactic acidosis and strokelike episodes) and Leber hereditary optic neuropathy.
Repeat expansions and anticipation
Several neurological disorders are caused by trinucleotide repeat expansions, which are unstable and tend to grow when transmitted. Longer repeats cause earlier onset and more severe disease, so the disorder appears earlier and worse in successive generations, a phenomenon called anticipation. The parent of origin matters: Huntington disease repeats expand mainly in male meiosis (juvenile cases usually inherit from the father), while fragile X and congenital myotonic dystrophy expansions occur through the mother.
Genomic imprinting and other exceptions
For a few genes, only the copy from one parent is expressed, because the other is silenced by DNA methylation laid down in the parent's germ line. This is genomic imprinting. The classic pair is on chromosome 15q11 to q13. Loss of the paternal contribution (a paternal deletion in about 70 percent of cases, or maternal uniparental disomy, two maternal copies and no paternal copy, in about 25 percent) causes Prader-Willi syndrome, with neonatal hypotonia, later overeating and obesity, and mild intellectual disability. Loss of the maternal contribution, specifically of maternal UBE3A expression in neurons, causes Angelman syndrome, with severe intellectual disability, seizures, absent speech and a happy demeanor. The same deletion produces two different diseases depending on which parent it came from.
Two more terms are frequently confused. Locus heterogeneity means variants in different genes cause the same phenotype (hearing loss from any of more than 100 genes; two deaf parents with recessive deafness in different genes can have all hearing children). Allelic heterogeneity means different variants in the same gene, such as the more than 2,000 known CFTR variants, cause disease. Pleiotropy means one gene affects several apparently unrelated traits, as FBN1 affects the eye, skeleton and aorta.
Single gene disorders follow recognizable patterns: AD (vertical, male to male transmission, 1/2 risk to children), AR (horizontal, carrier parents, 1/4 risk, consanguinity), X linked recessive (mostly males, no male to male transmission) and mitochondrial (maternal, with heteroplasmy). Incomplete penetrance, variable expressivity, new mutations, anticipation from repeat expansions and imprinting explain pedigrees that do not look textbook perfect, and Hardy Weinberg converts disease incidence into carrier frequency.
Section 2Complex and multifactorial disease
From single genes to many
Most common diseases, including coronary artery disease, type 2 diabetes, asthma, schizophrenia, most birth defects and most cancers, run in families but do not follow Mendelian ratios. They are complex or multifactorial traits, shaped by many genetic variants of small effect acting together with environmental factors. Some, like height or blood pressure, are quantitative traits that vary continuously. Others, such as cleft lip or pyloric stenosis, are present or absent, yet still have a polygenic basis. The bridge between these two ideas is the liability threshold model.
The liability threshold model
Imagine that every person has an unseen liability to a disease, the sum of many genetic and environmental contributions. Because it is built from many small additive factors, liability is normally distributed in the population. Only people whose liability exceeds a threshold develop the disease. Relatives of an affected person share some of that person's risk alleles, so their liability distribution is shifted toward the threshold, and a larger fraction of them cross it.
The model explains several characteristic features of multifactorial traits that distinguish them from Mendelian ones:
- Recurrence risk is low but above the population risk, typically 2 to 5 percent for first degree relatives of an affected person, compared with a population risk often well under 1 percent.
- Risk falls off steeply with distance of relationship: much more than the halving seen for a dominant gene. First degree relatives share half their genes, second degree a quarter, and the risk drops toward the population value quickly.
- Risk rises with the number of affected relatives: two affected children suggest the parents carry many risk factors. (For a Mendelian disorder, by contrast, the risk to the next child of carrier parents stays 1/4 no matter how many children are affected.)
- Risk rises with severity: relatives of a person with bilateral cleft lip and palate have a higher risk than relatives of a person with a small unilateral cleft.
- Risk is higher for relatives of the less often affected sex. Pyloric stenosis is about five times more common in boys. A girl must carry more liability to be affected, so her relatives have a higher risk than relatives of an affected boy. This is the Carter effect.
Heritability and twin studies
Heritability is the proportion of the variation in a trait, within a particular population and environment, that is due to genetic differences. Broad sense heritability (H2 = VG/VP) includes all genetic variance; narrow sense heritability (h2 = VA/VP) includes only additive variance, the part that predicts resemblance between parents and offspring. Heritability describes variation in a population, not the fraction of an individual's trait due to genes, and it can change when the environment changes. A trait can be highly heritable yet strongly changed by the environment: height is about 80 percent heritable, yet average heights rose substantially over the last century as nutrition improved.
Twin studies estimate genetic influence by comparing monozygotic (MZ) twins, who share essentially all their DNA, with dizygotic (DZ) twins, who share on average half, like ordinary siblings. For an either/or trait, we compare concordance, the proportion of twin pairs in which both twins are affected given that one is. If MZ concordance is much higher than DZ concordance, genes matter; if MZ concordance is well below 100 percent, the environment (or chance) also matters. For quantitative traits, we compare correlations, and Falconer's formula estimates h2 = 2(rMZ - rDZ).
| Condition | MZ concordance | DZ concordance | Interpretation |
|---|---|---|---|
| Cleft lip with or without cleft palate | About 40 percent | About 4 percent | Strong genetic contribution, important nongenetic factors |
| Type 1 diabetes | About 40 percent | About 5 percent | Strong genetic effect (HLA region), environment needed |
| Schizophrenia | About 45 percent | About 15 percent | Highly heritable, polygenic |
| Rheumatoid arthritis | About 15 percent | About 4 percent | Moderate genetic contribution |
| A single gene AD trait (for comparison) | About 100 percent | About 50 percent | Determined almost entirely by genotype |
Finding the genes: genome wide association studies
Linkage analysis, which tracks a marker through large families, works well for Mendelian disease but poorly for common disease, where each variant adds only a little risk. The genome wide association study (GWAS) instead compares the frequency of hundreds of thousands to millions of single nucleotide polymorphisms (SNPs) between many unrelated cases and controls. A SNP associated with disease is either causal or, more often, in linkage disequilibrium with a nearby causal variant. Because so many tests are performed, the conventional threshold for genome wide significance is p < 5 × 10-8 (roughly 0.05 divided by one million independent tests).
The strength of an association is reported as an odds ratio (OR): the odds of carrying the risk allele among cases divided by the odds among controls. Most GWAS hits for common diseases have odds ratios of only 1.1 to 1.5. Well known exceptions with larger effects include the APOE ε4 allele in late onset Alzheimer disease (roughly 3 fold risk for one copy and 8 to 12 fold for two) and variants in the HLA region in autoimmune disease.
GWAS revealed that common diseases are highly polygenic: hundreds to thousands of loci each contribute a small effect, and most lie in noncoding regulatory DNA rather than in protein coding sequence. Together, identified SNPs often explain less of the heritability than twin studies predict, the problem of missing heritability, attributed to many variants with effects too small to detect, rare variants not captured on SNP arrays and gene by environment interactions. Summing a person's risk alleles, each weighted by its effect size, gives a polygenic risk score (PRS). People in the top few percent of a coronary disease PRS can have a risk comparable to carriers of a monogenic familial hypercholesterolemia variant. However, PRSs predict less accurately in populations that differ in ancestry from the GWAS participants, who have been overwhelmingly of European ancestry.
Gene and environment together
Environmental factors often interact with genotype. Folic acid supplementation before and early in pregnancy reduces the risk of neural tube defects (spina bifida, anencephaly) by roughly half or more; the general recommendation is 0.4 mg daily, with a higher dose (commonly 4 mg) for women who have had an affected pregnancy. Smoking multiplies the lung disease risk of people with alpha 1 antitrypsin deficiency. Phenylketonuria itself, a single gene disorder, shows that even a strongly genetic condition can be completely prevented by changing the environment (the diet).
Common diseases are multifactorial. In the liability threshold model, risk alleles and environment add to a normally distributed liability, and disease appears above a threshold, which explains why recurrence risk is modest, falls steeply with relationship, and rises with more or more severely affected relatives and with the less often affected sex. Twin studies and Falconer's formula estimate heritability; GWAS find many small effect loci, reported as odds ratios, that can be combined into polygenic risk scores.
Section 3Genetic testing: diagnostic, carrier, prenatal and newborn screening
Screening versus diagnostic testing
Two words organize this section. A screening test is offered to a whole population or a large group with no particular reason for concern, to find the few people at increased risk; it is designed to be safe, cheap and sensitive, and a positive result must be confirmed. A diagnostic test is done in a person already suspected of having a condition and aims to give a definitive answer. Within genetic testing, the main purposes are:
| Type of test | Who is tested | Question answered | Example |
|---|---|---|---|
| Diagnostic | A person with signs or symptoms | Does this person have the condition, and what is the cause? | Exome sequencing for a child with developmental delay |
| Predictive (presymptomatic) | A healthy person with a family history | Will this person develop, or have increased risk of, a later onset disorder? | Testing for the familial HTT expansion or BRCA1 variant |
| Carrier | Healthy people, often before or during pregnancy | Does this person carry one recessive or X linked variant? | Cystic fibrosis, spinal muscular atrophy, hemoglobinopathy screening |
| Prenatal screening | Pregnant people | Is this pregnancy at increased risk of a chromosome or structural problem? | Cell free DNA screening, serum marker screening, ultrasound |
| Prenatal diagnosis | Pregnancies at increased risk | Does the fetus have the condition? | Chorionic villus sampling, amniocentesis |
| Preimplantation genetic testing | Embryos from in vitro fertilization | Which embryos are free of a familial variant or aneuploidy? | Testing a biopsy of a few trophectoderm cells |
| Newborn screening | All newborns | Does this baby have a treatable condition that is silent at birth? | Phenylketonuria, congenital hypothyroidism, cystic fibrosis |
| Pharmacogenetic | A person about to receive a drug | Will this person metabolize or respond to the drug normally? | CYP2C19 before clopidogrel, HLA-B*57:01 before abacavir |
Laboratory methods
The method must match the type of variant suspected. A karyotype (G banded chromosomes) detects aneuploidy and large rearrangements of about 5 to 10 megabases or more, including balanced translocations. FISH uses fluorescent probes to detect specific deletions or count chromosomes rapidly in interphase cells. A chromosomal microarray detects copy number gains and losses down to tens of kilobases and is the first line test for unexplained developmental delay or multiple anomalies, but it cannot detect balanced rearrangements. Targeted variant testing looks for one known familial variant. Sequencing ranges from a single gene to a multigene panel, the exome (about 1 to 2 percent of the genome that codes for protein) or the whole genome. Repeat expansions require special methods (PCR sizing or Southern blot), and methylation tests detect imprinting disorders.
Sequencing a genome finds millions of variants, so interpretation is the hard part. Variants are classified on a five tier scale: pathogenic, likely pathogenic, variant of uncertain significance (VUS), likely benign and benign, using evidence such as population frequency, predicted effect on the protein, segregation in families, functional studies and whether the variant arose de novo. A VUS should not be used to make clinical decisions, and many are reclassified, usually as benign, as evidence accumulates.
Measuring test performance
Every test is judged by four numbers. Sensitivity is the proportion of affected people who test positive (true positives divided by all affected). Specificity is the proportion of unaffected people who test negative. These are properties of the test. The positive predictive value (PPV) is the proportion of positive results that are truly affected, and the negative predictive value (NPV) is the proportion of negative results that are truly unaffected. Predictive values depend heavily on how common the condition is in the people tested, and this is where intuition most often fails.
Prenatal screening and diagnosis
The risk of a pregnancy with a chromosome aneuploidy rises with maternal age because of nondisjunction in aging oocytes; the risk of trisomy 21 at term is about 1 in 1,500 at age 20, 1 in 350 at age 35 and 1 in 100 at age 40. Today screening is offered to all pregnant people regardless of age.
- Cell free DNA (cfDNA) screening, often called noninvasive prenatal testing, sequences DNA fragments in maternal plasma, of which roughly 10 percent come from the placenta. Overrepresentation of chromosome 21 fragments signals trisomy 21. It can be done from about 10 weeks and detects about 99 percent of trisomy 21. Because the DNA comes from the placenta, confined placental mosaicism and maternal conditions can cause false results, and a low fetal fraction (as in maternal obesity) can make the test fail.
- First trimester combined screening (11 to 14 weeks) combines maternal age, ultrasound measurement of the nuchal translucency and two serum markers (PAPP-A and free beta hCG), detecting about 85 percent of trisomy 21.
- Second trimester serum screening (the quad screen, about 15 to 22 weeks) measures AFP, hCG, unconjugated estriol and inhibin A. In trisomy 21, AFP and estriol are low and hCG and inhibin A are high. An elevated AFP alone suggests an open neural tube defect.
- Chorionic villus sampling (CVS, about 10 to 13 weeks) samples placental tissue and gives an earlier result. Amniocentesis (from about 15 weeks) samples fetal cells from amniotic fluid. Both are diagnostic, allow karyotype, microarray or targeted testing, and carry a small procedure related miscarriage risk, now estimated well below 1 percent.
Preimplantation genetic testing (PGT) tests one or a few cells from embryos created by in vitro fertilization, so that only unaffected embryos are transferred. It is used by couples who know they are at risk for a single gene disorder (PGT-M) or carry a structural rearrangement (PGT-SR), and it avoids decisions about an established pregnancy, though it requires IVF.
Carrier screening
Carrier screening identifies couples at risk before or early in pregnancy. Historically it was targeted by ancestry: Tay-Sachs screening in Ashkenazi Jewish communities, which reduced the incidence of the disease by more than 90 percent, beta thalassemia screening in Mediterranean populations and sickle cell screening in people of African ancestry. Ancestry is an imperfect guide in mixed populations, so many programs now offer pan-ethnic or expanded carrier screening covering dozens to hundreds of recessive conditions for everyone. Spinal muscular atrophy (deletion of SMN1, carrier frequency about 1 in 40 to 1 in 60) shows a pitfall: some carriers have two copies of SMN1 on one chromosome and none on the other, so a copy number test reads them as normal ("silent carriers").
Newborn screening
Newborn screening is the largest genetic testing program in the world. A few drops of blood from a heel stick, usually collected 24 to 48 hours after birth, are dried on filter paper and tested for treatable disorders that cause irreversible harm if not caught early. Tandem mass spectrometry detects dozens of amino acid, organic acid and fatty acid oxidation disorders from a single spot. Programs also include hearing screening and pulse oximetry for critical congenital heart disease.
| Condition | What is measured | Treatment that prevents harm |
|---|---|---|
| Phenylketonuria | Elevated phenylalanine (tandem mass spectrometry) | Low phenylalanine diet started in the first weeks |
| Congenital hypothyroidism | Low T4 and/or high TSH | Thyroid hormone replacement prevents intellectual disability |
| Galactosemia | GALT enzyme activity | Remove galactose (milk sugar) from the diet |
| Cystic fibrosis | Immunoreactive trypsinogen, then CFTR variants, confirmed by sweat chloride | Early nutrition, airway clearance, modulator drugs |
| Sickle cell disease | Hemoglobin pattern by electrophoresis or HPLC | Penicillin prophylaxis and vaccines prevent fatal infections |
| Severe combined immunodeficiency | Low T cell receptor excision circles (TRECs) | Bone marrow transplant or gene therapy before infections |
| Spinal muscular atrophy | Absent SMN1 exon 7 by PCR | Gene replacement or splicing modifying therapy before symptoms |
Screening tests sort large groups by risk; diagnostic tests give definitive answers. The test method must fit the variant type: karyotype, FISH, microarray, targeted testing or sequencing, with variants classified from pathogenic to benign. Sensitivity and specificity describe a test, while predictive values depend on prevalence, so even an excellent screen has a modest PPV when a condition is rare. Prenatal options run from cfDNA and serum screening to CVS and amniocentesis, and newborn screening catches treatable disorders before harm occurs.
Section 4Genetic counseling and risk calculation
What genetic counseling is
Genetic counseling is a communication process that helps people understand and adapt to the medical, psychological and family implications of genetic contributions to disease. It integrates three things: interpreting family and medical histories to assess risk; educating about inheritance, testing, management, prevention and resources; and counseling to promote informed choices and adaptation. A typical session includes taking a three generation pedigree, confirming diagnoses from records, explaining the condition and its inheritance, calculating risks, discussing testing options with their benefits and limits, obtaining informed consent and, after testing, explaining results and arranging follow-up.
Traditionally, counseling has been nondirective: the counselor provides balanced information and supports the client's decision, especially about reproduction, rather than recommending a choice. In practice, when a result points to a clearly effective intervention (such as risk reducing surgery for a BRCA1 carrier or colonoscopy in Lynch syndrome), counselors give clear medical recommendations while respecting the person's autonomy. Counseling also attends to emotions such as guilt in a parent who "passed on" a variant, anxiety about uncertain results and the burden of telling relatives.
Mendelian risks and conditional probability
Many counseling risks come straight from Mendelian rules, but the most common error is to forget information that is already known. The classic example is the healthy sibling of a person with an autosomal recessive disease. Both parents are obligate carriers, so at conception the sibling had a 1/4 chance of being affected, 1/2 of being a carrier and 1/4 of being a noncarrier. But the sibling is known to be unaffected, so the affected outcome is eliminated, and the carrier risk is (1/2)/(1/2 + 1/4) = 2/3, not 1/2.
Bayesian risk calculation
When there is additional information, such as unaffected children or a negative test, counselors use Bayes' theorem to combine it with the starting risk. The method is a short table with four rows:
- Prior probability: the risk based on the pedigree alone, for each hypothesis (for example, carrier and noncarrier).
- Conditional probability: the chance of the observed information (such as three unaffected sons) under each hypothesis.
- Joint probability: prior multiplied by conditional for each hypothesis.
- Posterior probability: each joint probability divided by the sum of all joint probabilities.
| Row | Carrier | Noncarrier |
|---|---|---|
| Prior | 1/2 | 1/2 |
| Conditional (3 unaffected sons) | (1/2)3 = 1/8 | 1 |
| Joint | 1/16 | 8/16 |
| Posterior | 1/16 ÷ 9/16 = 1/9 | 8/16 ÷ 9/16 = 8/9 |
The same method handles negative carrier tests and late onset disease. For Ben in the cystic fibrosis problem, the prior is 1/25 carrier and 24/25 noncarrier; the conditional probability of a negative result is 0.10 if he is a carrier (the test misses 10 percent) and 1 if he is not. Joint: 0.004 and 0.96; posterior carrier risk = 0.004/0.964 = 0.0041, about 1/241. For Huntington disease, suppose the child of an affected parent is unaffected at an age by which half of carriers show symptoms. Prior: 1/2 and 1/2. Conditional probability of being unaffected: 1/2 if a carrier, 1 if not. Joint: 1/4 and 1/2. Posterior risk = (1/4)/(3/4) = 1/3.
Consanguinity and empirical risks
The coefficient of relationship is the proportion of genes two relatives share by descent: 1/2 for first degree relatives (parents, siblings, children), 1/4 for second degree and 1/8 for first cousins. The coefficient of inbreeding (F) of a child is the probability that both alleles at a locus are identical by descent; for the child of first cousins, F = 1/16. The background risk of a serious birth defect or genetic disorder in any pregnancy is about 3 to 4 percent; for first cousin parents it is increased by about 2 to 3 percentage points, mostly from autosomal recessive disease.
For multifactorial conditions there is no Mendelian formula, so counselors use empirical risks, observed recurrence figures from family studies. A useful rule (Edwards' approximation) estimates the risk to first degree relatives as roughly the square root of the population incidence: for a population incidence of 1/1,000, the first degree recurrence risk is about √0.001 = 0.032, or about 3 percent.
| Situation | Risk to the next child (or carrier risk) |
|---|---|
| Parent heterozygous for an AD disorder, full penetrance | 1/2 |
| Both parents carriers of an AR disorder | 1/4 affected; unaffected sibling 2/3 carrier |
| Mother a carrier of an X linked recessive disorder | 1/2 of sons affected; 1/2 of daughters carriers |
| Father affected with an X linked recessive disorder | All daughters carriers; no sons affected |
| Child with an apparently new AD variant, parents unaffected | Low (about 1 percent), reflecting germline mosaicism |
| Isolated multifactorial defect (such as cleft lip) | Empirical, typically 2 to 5 percent for siblings |
Genetic counseling combines risk assessment, education and support, traditionally in a nondirective way. Risk calculations start with Mendelian probabilities but must use everything known: an unaffected sibling of a recessive patient has a 2/3 carrier risk, and Bayes' theorem (prior, conditional, joint, posterior) lowers or raises risks based on unaffected children, negative tests or age. Consanguinity raises recessive risks, and multifactorial risks come from empirical data.
Section 5Ethical, legal and social issues
Principles that guide genetic medicine
Genetic information is unusual medical information. It is predictive (it can forecast disease decades ahead), familial (a result about one person is also information about parents, siblings and children), permanent (it does not change) and increasingly identifying (a genome is a unique fingerprint). These features raise ethical, legal and social issues, often abbreviated ELSI, that go beyond those of most medical tests. Four standard principles of bioethics frame the discussion.
| Principle | Meaning | Genetic example |
|---|---|---|
| Autonomy | Respect for a person's right to make informed decisions | Informed consent before testing; the right not to know a result |
| Beneficence | Acting for the person's benefit | Offering surveillance or surgery to a person with a cancer predisposition |
| Nonmaleficence | Avoiding harm | Not reporting a variant of uncertain significance as if it were pathogenic |
| Justice | Fair distribution of benefits and burdens | Equal access to testing; diverse reference databases so results are accurate for everyone |
Informed consent and the right not to know
Before a genetic test, a person should understand its purpose, what it can and cannot detect, the possible results (positive, negative, uncertain, unexpected), the implications for relatives, the possibility of findings unrelated to the original question, how samples and data will be stored and used, and the protections against discrimination. Because there is no cure for some conditions, the right not to know is also respected. Predictive testing for Huntington disease follows a careful protocol, with counseling before and after testing and time to reflect, because a positive result foretells an untreatable disease, and some at risk people choose never to be tested.
Testing children
Children cannot give consent themselves, so the guiding question is whether testing during childhood brings a medical benefit to the child. Testing is appropriate when a condition begins in childhood or when childhood interventions help: RET testing in families with multiple endocrine neoplasia type 2 (preventive thyroid removal in early childhood) or APC testing in familial adenomatous polyposis (colonoscopy beginning around age 10 to 12). Predictive testing for adult onset conditions without childhood interventions, such as Huntington disease or BRCA1 variants, is generally deferred until the child can decide as an adult, preserving their future autonomy. Carrier testing of children is likewise usually deferred.
Confidentiality and the family
Because relatives share variants, a result can be lifesaving for them. Clinicians encourage patients to share results, often with a family letter, and offer cascade testing to relatives. Rarely, a patient refuses to tell relatives at high risk of a serious, preventable condition. Most professional guidance holds that confidentiality may be breached only in exceptional circumstances, when serious harm is likely, preventable and the relatives are identifiable, and only after attempts to persuade the patient have failed.
Genetic discrimination and privacy
A major fear is that insurers or employers will use genetic information against people. In the United States, the Genetic Information Nondiscrimination Act (GINA) prohibits health insurers from using genetic information to set eligibility or premiums and prohibits employers from using it in hiring, firing or promotion. Its limits are frequently tested: GINA does not cover life insurance, disability insurance or long term care insurance, does not apply to employers with fewer than 15 employees, and does not protect people once they have a manifest disease (other laws, such as health care law that bars preexisting condition exclusions, help there). Other countries have different laws or voluntary agreements with insurers.
Privacy is harder to guarantee than it once seemed. Genomes cannot be truly anonymized: researchers have shown that names can sometimes be inferred by matching Y chromosome markers to surnames in genealogy databases. Direct to consumer (DTC) tests sell ancestry and some health information without a clinician, and consumer databases have been used in forensic genetic genealogy, identifying crime suspects through distant relatives who uploaded their own DNA. DTC health results can also mislead: a test that checks a few common BRCA variants misses most pathogenic variants, so a "negative" result is not reassuring, and raw data interpretations can have high false positive rates.
Secondary findings
Exome and genome sequencing can reveal variants unrelated to the reason for testing. Professional guidance recommends that laboratories offer to report pathogenic variants in a defined list of medically actionable genes (for example BRCA1, BRCA2, the Lynch syndrome genes, LDLR, and genes for inherited arrhythmias and cardiomyopathies), because early knowledge allows prevention. About 2 to 3 percent of people sequenced carry such a finding. Patients may opt out of receiving them, consistent with the right not to know.
Equity, history and the future
Genetics has a troubled history. The eugenics movement of the early twentieth century used crude ideas of heredity to justify forced sterilization laws and immigration restrictions, and these ideas fed into atrocities. Modern genetics emphasizes voluntary, informed individual choice, but critics note that prenatal screening raises questions about how society values people with disabilities. Equity remains a present concern: most GWAS participants have been of European ancestry, so variant databases and polygenic scores perform worse for others, and people of African ancestry more often receive uncertain results.
Gene therapy now treats several genetic diseases. Somatic therapies, which alter only the patient's cells, include viral vector gene replacement for spinal muscular atrophy and inherited retinal dystrophy, and ex vivo CRISPR editing of blood stem cells that reactivates fetal hemoglobin in sickle cell disease and beta thalassemia. Germline editing, which would change embryos and all their descendants, is a different matter. A widely condemned experiment in which embryos were edited and brought to birth led to near universal calls that germline editing not be used for reproduction while safety (off target edits, mosaicism) and ethical questions remain unresolved, especially since PGT already lets most at risk couples avoid passing on a variant.
Genetic information is predictive, familial, permanent and identifying, so it calls for informed consent, respect for the right not to know and care with confidentiality. Children are tested only when childhood benefit exists; cascade testing extends benefit to relatives; GINA bars genetic discrimination in health insurance and employment but not in life, disability or long term care insurance. Secondary findings, DTC testing, privacy, equity and germline editing are the live issues in modern genetic medicine.
The chapter in one breath
- Autosomal dominant traits show vertical and male to male transmission; autosomal recessive traits show carrier parents, 1/4 recurrence and links to consanguinity.
- X linked recessive traits mostly affect males with no male to male transmission; mitochondrial traits pass only through mothers, with heteroplasmy.
- Penetrance, expressivity, new mutations, anticipation and imprinting explain irregular pedigrees.
- Hardy Weinberg turns incidence into carrier frequency: CF at 1/2,500 means q = 1/50 and carriers about 1/25.
- The liability threshold model explains multifactorial recurrence patterns, including the Carter effect.
- Heritability describes population variation; Falconer's formula gives h2 = 2(rMZ - rDZ).
- GWAS find many small effect SNPs (p < 5 × 10-8, modest odds ratios) that sum into polygenic risk scores.
- Testing may be diagnostic, predictive, carrier, prenatal, preimplantation or newborn; PPV depends on prevalence.
- Counseling risk: an unaffected sibling of a recessive patient is a carrier with probability 2/3; Bayesian analysis updates risk with new evidence.
- ELSI: informed consent, testing minors only for childhood benefit, cascade testing, GINA's limits, secondary findings, equity and germline editing.
Words worth knowing
| Term | What it means |
|---|---|
| Proband | The affected person through whom a family comes to medical attention. |
| Consultand | The person who seeks genetic counseling or testing. |
| Penetrance | The percentage of people with a genotype who show the associated phenotype. |
| Expressivity | The degree or severity with which a genotype is expressed among affected people. |
| Germline mosaicism | A variant present in some of a parent's germ cells but not in their blood or other tissues. |
| Hemizygous | Having only one copy of a gene, as males do for X linked genes. |
| Heteroplasmy | A mixture of normal and variant mitochondrial genomes in a cell or person. |
| Anticipation | Earlier onset or greater severity in successive generations, usually from repeat expansion. |
| Genomic imprinting | Expression of a gene from only one parent's copy because of parent specific methylation. |
| Uniparental disomy | Inheritance of both copies of a chromosome from one parent. |
| Locus heterogeneity | Variants in different genes producing the same phenotype. |
| Liability | The combined genetic and environmental susceptibility to a multifactorial disease. |
| Heritability | The proportion of trait variation in a population attributable to genetic differences. |
| Concordance | The proportion of twin pairs in which both twins have a trait, given that one does. |
| Genome wide association study (GWAS) | A study comparing genome wide SNP frequencies between cases and controls. |
| Odds ratio | The odds of exposure (such as a risk allele) in cases divided by the odds in controls. |
| Polygenic risk score | A sum of many risk alleles, each weighted by effect size, estimating inherited risk. |
| Sensitivity | The proportion of affected people correctly identified by a test. |
| Specificity | The proportion of unaffected people correctly identified as negative. |
| Positive predictive value | The proportion of positive results that are true positives; depends on prevalence. |
| Variant of uncertain significance | A variant without enough evidence to call it pathogenic or benign. |
| Cell free DNA screening | Prenatal screening that analyzes placental DNA fragments in maternal blood. |
| Bayesian analysis | Combining a prior risk with conditional information to obtain a revised (posterior) risk. |
| Cascade testing | Testing relatives of a person with a known variant, moving outward through the family. |
| Secondary finding | A medically actionable result unrelated to the reason a test was ordered. |